JP2023126345A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can be preferably managed.SOLUTION: In a game machine, as game sections, a normal section and an advantageous section are set. In the advantageous section, shift to an ART state may be generated, in the normal section, shift to the ART state is not generated. In the configuration, a total game number of consumed games is measured using a total game number counter 74a, and a game number of games consumed in the advantageous section is measured using an advantageous game number counter 74b. Then, a ratio of the advantageous game number with respect to the total game number is calculated, and the arithmetic result is displayed using a display part 66 for double use and an advantageous section display part 67. At the time, on the basis of reception of an ON signal from a start detecting sensor 41a and stop detecting sensors 42a-44a, display of the arithmetic result is finished.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. If the result of the stoppage after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-045989

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably control the execution of a predetermined gaming state, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

Note that the above problem is not limited to pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, but also applies to other gaming machines.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably control the execution of a predetermined gaming state.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a first control means for managing the progress of the game;
a second control means that controls execution of the performance based on information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
a predetermined setting means for setting a predetermined gaming state;
means for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means to a side closer to the end information based on the fact that the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state and an update opportunity occurs;
a predetermined termination means for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the continuation reference information becoming the termination information in the predetermined gaming state;
a predetermined updating means that updates the continuation reference information to a side that moves it away from the termination information by a predetermined amount of update information when a predetermined provision condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state;
a first transmitting means for transmitting first transmission information corresponding to the start of the predetermined gaming state;
a second transmitting means for transmitting second transmission information corresponding to the updated information when the continuation reference information is updated to move away from the termination information;
Equipped with
The second control means
a predetermined performance starting means for starting a performance corresponding to the predetermined gaming state based on reception of the first transmission information;
a reception response means for executing a reception response process for executing an effect corresponding to the continuation reference information being updated to move away from the termination information based on the reception of the second transmission information;
It is characterized by having the following.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably control the execution of a predetermined gaming state.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. (a) It is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on a dual-purpose display section. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a random number circuit group provided on the main control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configurations of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits. 3 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the combination performed by main side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for normal mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established when the normal mode lottery table is selected. It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for the first RT mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second RT mode lottery table. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning pattern when the second RT mode lottery table is selected. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values with different winning probabilities between setting values of “1” to “6”; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an offset table. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition data acquisition process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by main side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section that exist in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game section performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transition lottery process for false precursor conditions performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing when the game ends, which is executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section performed by main side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the transition to the advantageous section and the return to the normal section are performed. It is a flowchart which shows the transition lottery process for chance states performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for chance states performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart showing normal production control processing executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control process for false precursor conditions performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how false omen effects and chance effects are executed. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a false omen performance on an image display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a chance performance on an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonuses performed by main side MPU. 7 is a flowchart showing bonus processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game during a bonus that is executed by the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing preparation state processing executed by the main MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of main side RAM, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of production side RAM. 12 is a flowchart showing additional processing executed by the main MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the A loop lottery table, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining various continuous lottery tables, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the B loop lottery table. . 3 is a flowchart showing A-loop processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing B-loop processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts for explaining the outline of effects that occur in the ART state. It is a flow chart showing non-normal performance control processing executed by the performance side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for direct top performance performed by the performance side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the A loop production process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the special additional production performed by production side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of special additional effects. It is a flowchart which shows the special additional production process performed by production side MPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how the expected performance and special additional performance are executed when the A loop occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the B loop production process performed by production side MPU. (a) to (c) are time charts showing how a special freeze effect is executed when a B loop occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stock release performed by production side MPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the ART state. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how various release effects are executed. 3 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for ending productions performed by production side MPU. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in a situation where an ending effect is being executed. It is a flowchart showing the process for ending the ending effect executed by the effect side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze setting process performed by main side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the ending effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the performance control process for the advantage maintenance area performed by the performance side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a bonus winning announcement image, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a bonus type announcement image. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how advantageous maintenance sections progress. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how game history management results are displayed using a dual-purpose display unit. 12 is a flowchart showing pseudo bonus generation management processing executed by the main MPU in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus management process executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo bonus start process performed by main side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an initial continuation game number table, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a transition condition game number table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main side RAM. 12 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game during a pseudo bonus that is executed by the main MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a first additional table, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a second additional table. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo bonus progress process performed by main side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the handling of the number of additional games changes depending on the status of the ART winning flag in the pseudo bonus state. It is a flowchart which shows the performance control process for pseudo bonuses performed by the performance side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how a pre-branch performance and a branch performance are executed in a pseudo bonus state. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining first to fourth additional tables in the third embodiment; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an index correspondence table. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining first to fourth compressed data; It is a flowchart which shows the additional lottery process performed by main side MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing additional index acquisition processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows random number acquisition processing performed by main side MPU in a 4th embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a random number circuit group provided in a main control board in a fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows normal production control processing performed by production side MPU in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control process for false precursor states performed by the production|presentation side MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a bonus announcement during the ending performed by the production|presentation side MPU in 8th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 has a plurality of wooden panels fixed to it, so that the casing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open toward the front.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The front door 12 is supported by the casing 11 using a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side thereof as a rotation axis so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the casing 11. Note that the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side thereof, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed with three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed into a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis that extends substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window portion 21L, 21M, and 21R. There is. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, 21R. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated while game media such as medals and virtual medals are being bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is arranged directly below the display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes in a state where it can be stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44. The period until the execution of various processes such as the granting of a number and the management of the gaming state is completed corresponds to one game (game round).

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 if the acceptance is permitted, and if the acceptance is prohibited, the medals are guided to the hopper device 53. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal outlet 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of dispensing the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning corresponding to the provision of game media on the active line is established. There is.

As shown in FIG. 1, below the medal slot 45, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 become stuck in the selector 52. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a first credit input button 47 for inputting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and a first credit input button 47 for inputting two virtual medals at a time. A second credit input button 48 for inputting virtual medals and a third credit input button 49 for inputting virtual medals one at a time are provided.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment button 51 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 58 as real medals.

Inside the housing 11, on the left side of the hopper device 53, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a power supply device 54 is provided. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 that resets various states of the slot machine 10, and a reset button 56 that changes the setting state of the slot machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 57 is provided that is operated to change the setting within the range of ``Setting 6''.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 4 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to correspond to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main controller 70, which will be described later, from the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. This is a number to recognize the symbols in a certain state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

Symbols include "Bell" symbol (for example, 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (for example, 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), " Red 7” symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), “White 7” symbol (For example, the 5th position on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a specified number of gaming media bet, and if a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving gaming media, Either the benefit of re-gaming or the transition of gaming status is granted.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be won. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the subline SL1 connecting the upper row symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle row symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row symbols of the right reel 32R, the upper row symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper row symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper row symbols of the right reel 32R. The connected subline SL2, the subline SL3 that connects the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the lower symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols of the right reel 32R, the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. Even if a combination of winning symbols is established on a line extending in a straight line, such as the subline SL4 connecting the upper row symbols, the winning will not be established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of the correspondence between the symbol combinations that result in winnings and the benefits that will be awarded when the winnings occur. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of symbols that result in a winning combination and the benefits that are awarded when the winning combination occurs.

Minor prizes for which game media are given include 1st supplementary prize, 2nd supplementary prize, 3rd supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, and cherry prize. There is. Specifically, on the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, This will be the first supplementary prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second supplementary prize will be won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third supplementary prize will be won. becomes. If one of the first to third supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "1".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol, the first bell will be won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the second bell will be won. becomes. If one of the first to second bell wins, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "11".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon prize is won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon prize is won. becomes. If one of the first to second watermelon prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "5". When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L becomes a "Cherry" symbol on the main line ML, a cherry prize is awarded regardless of which of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "2".

Winnings that give you the privilege of replaying the next game without betting game media include regular replay winnings, 1st chance replay winnings, 2nd chance replay winnings, 1st RT replay winnings, and 1st chance replay winnings. There are 2RT replay wins, 1st fall replay wins, and 2nd fall replay wins. Specifically, on the main line ML, if the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L are "Replay" symbols, the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M are "Replay" symbols, and the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R are "Replay" symbols, On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, or on the main line ML In the above case, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, a normal replay win is obtained.

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first chance replay will occur. It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Replay" symbol, a second chance replay occurs. It will be a prize.

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the 1st RT replay prize is won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Replay" symbol, the 2nd RT Replay prize is won. becomes.

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the first falling replay It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second falling replay It will be a prize.

If any of the above replay wins occur, a replay benefit will be given that will allow you to play the next game without having to bet on game media. Specifically, if one of the replays wins in a game in which "3" gaming media is bet, there is no need to bet on the gaming media, but the next game is played with "3" gaming media bet. It becomes possible to start playing the game.

Among the various replay winnings mentioned above, the first RT replay winning, the second RT replay winning, the first falling replay winning, and the second falling replay winning not only trigger the granting of the replay winning privilege but also trigger the transition to the lottery mode. In this slot machine 10, a plurality of types of lottery modes are set so that the types of roles to be drawn and the winning probabilities of each role are different in the lottery process (FIG. 16), and the transition between these lottery modes is This occurs when a replay prize that triggers a shift to lottery mode is established. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be explained in detail later.

The state transition prizes in which only the gaming state transition is performed include the 1st BB prize, the 2nd BB prize, the 3rd BB prize, the 4th BB prize, the 1st RB prize, and the 2nd RB prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. If there is, the 1st BB prize will be awarded. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, then the 2BB prize winner. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "White 7" symbol, then the 3BB prize winner. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, then 4BB prize winner. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the 1st RB It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second RB It will be a prize.

When the first BB prize, the second BB prize, the third BB prize, or the fourth BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Further, when the first RB winning or the second RB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state correspond to bonus states. The bonus state is a game state in which the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is higher than in game states other than the bonus state. Specifically, in addition to winning the winning combination that makes it possible to win the first bell with a higher probability (for example, approximately 1/1.5) than in other gaming states, if you win the winning combination, each The first bell prize is achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as in other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the expected net increase in gaming media per unit number of games is higher than in gaming states other than the bonus state. Note that the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be smaller than in other game states, and in the bonus state, the number of game media required per unit number of games may be smaller than in game states other than the bonus state. If the expected net increase value is high, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be greater than in other game states.

Among the bonus states, the BB state continues over a plurality of games and ends when a termination condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of the game execution. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, the termination condition is that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state is equal to or greater than the BB termination reference number (specifically, "350"). is set as . Note that the termination condition may be satisfied when the number of games executed in the BB state reaches the BB termination reference number of games.

Among the bonus states, the RB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when a termination condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, the termination condition is that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the RB state is equal to or greater than the RB termination reference number (specifically, "150"). is set as . This RB end reference number is smaller than the BB end reference number. Therefore, the BB state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state. Note that the termination condition may be satisfied when the number of games executed in the RB state reaches the RB termination reference number of games. In this case, by setting the RB end standard number of games to be smaller than the BB end standard number of games, it is possible to make the BB state a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be explained.

At the top of the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided, as well as an image display device 63. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and the sound output is controlled so that when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, a sound or sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or sound corresponding to the winning result is output. The sound output is controlled so that it is output. Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. Other display devices having a display surface may be used, or a dot matrix display may be used. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display screen. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display images corresponding to the winning results of the combinations in the internal lottery and the winning results in each game on the display screen. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals that are awarded when winning a small prize. In addition to displaying the number of gaming media, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, a display corresponding to the notified content is performed, and furthermore, the management result of the game history is notified. There are provided a dual-purpose display section 66 that displays a display indicating that the game is an advantageous section, and an advantageous section display section 67 that displays a display that corresponds to the fact that the game section is an advantageous section. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a dual-purpose display section 66 and an advantageous section display section 67 are provided. The common display area 68 includes a dual-purpose display section 66 provided by two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b arranged side by side in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 7(a), and a light emitting section. The advantageous section display section 67 is summarized.

If any of the minor prizes (1st to 3rd supplementary prizes, 1st to 2nd bell prizes, 1st to 2nd watermelon prizes, or cherry prizes) corresponding to the provision of game media is achieved, that small prize At the end of the game in which the winning combination is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the winning winning of the small winning combination is displayed on the combined display section 66. Specifically, if any of the first to third supplementary winnings is achieved, the left 7-segment display 66a will be hidden and "1" will be displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that "1" game media has been awarded. If any of the first to second bell wins is achieved, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, and "11" game media is awarded. You will be notified that it has been granted. Furthermore, if any of the first to second watermelon prizes is won, the 7-segment display 66a on the left will not be displayed, and "5" will be displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right. ” will be notified that the game media has been awarded. Furthermore, when a cherry prize is achieved, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right, so that "2" game media is awarded. This will be announced. On the other hand, even if a winning is achieved in which no gaming media is awarded, such as any replay winning, any BB winning, or any RB winning, the display corresponding to the winning will not be displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. In this case, each seven segment display 66a, 66b is maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of game media awarded on the dual-purpose display section 66 ends when the game media is bet to start the next game after the game in which the display was made, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the timing of this bet. The containers 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the notified stopping order is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, and the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The stop order is that the left reel 32L is the first stop, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. A stop order in which the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary, and a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are arbitrary. There is an arbitrary stopping order and a stopping order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order on the image display device 63 includes the winning combination including the first bell winning data in the winning lottery process, the winning winning combination including the first RT replay winning data, and the second RT replay winning data. It can be executed when a winning combination is won, when a winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, or when a winning winning combination including the second falling replay winning data is won. Specifically, when winning a combination that includes the 1st bell winning data, the 1st bell will be won if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. holds true. Then, if the first bell is won, the player is given "11" game media as already explained.

When winning a winning combination including the first RT replay winning data, the first RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned stopping orders. Then, when the first RT replay winning is achieved, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode in which it is easier to win a winning combination that includes any replay winning data (that is, it is easier to achieve any replay winning) than in the normal mode. . In addition, if you win a winning combination that includes the 2nd RT replay winning data, the 2nd RT replay winning will be established if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. . Then, if the second RT replay winning is achieved, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode in which it is easier to win a winning combination that includes any replay winning data than in the first RT mode (that is, it is easier to achieve any replay winning). do.

If you win a combination that includes the first falling replay winning data, the first falling replay winning will be avoided if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. Ru. If the first fall replay winning is achieved, the lottery mode will shift from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but by avoiding the establishment of the first falling replay winning, this transition to the normal mode can be avoided. . In addition, if you win a combination that includes the 2nd falling replay winning data, the 2nd falling replay winning will be won if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. Avoided. When the second falling replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but the transition to the first RT mode is avoided by avoiding the establishment of the second falling replay winning. I can do it.

When any of the above stop orders is notified on the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the dual-purpose display section 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification target is displayed. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 is set in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the stop order notification on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display section 66 may be set to correspond to some or all of the stop order notification contents on the image display device 63. Good too.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 is different from the display content that is displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and in each unit display image G1 to G3, images corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is announced when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , the left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

The image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, while the dual-purpose display section 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, on the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and in each unit display image G1 to G3, the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is While a corresponding image is displayed, the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display that is unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Thereby, even if a display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the dual-purpose display section 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. Also from this point of view, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the dual-purpose display section 66 compared to the image display device 63. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the opposite side to the image display device 63 across the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the dual-purpose display section 66 is placed at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the dual-purpose display section 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponds to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 is displayed. This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a command to stop all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. will be terminated if this occurs.

The dual-purpose display section 66 is arranged at the center of the common display area 68, whereas the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged at the corner side of the common display area 68. The advantageous section display section 67 is a display section for informing that the game section is an advantageous section out of the normal section and the advantageous section. An advantageous section is a stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to make a win that is advantageous to the player when winning a winning combination that is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This section corresponds to either a section where the order is announced or a section where the probability of transition to the ART state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is higher than the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section refers to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the player to achieve a win that is advantageous to the player if the winning combination is different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a section in which the stopping order of the game is not notified, and the probability of transition to the ART state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is lower than that in the advantageous zone, or a zone in which transition to the ART state does not occur.

When the conditions for transition to an advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section and the transition is made to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display section 67 turns on to start notifying that the section is in an advantageous section. Further, when the conditions for transition to the normal section are satisfied in the advantageous section and the transition is made to the normal section, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off and the notification that it is the advantageous section is terminated. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager, etc. that this is an advantageous section. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66, which is provided collectively in the common display area 68, is turned on when a game medium is given, and turned off when the next game starts, and also displays the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop order of the game is displayed on the image display device 63, the light is turned on, and when the game ends, the light is turned off. Therefore, in a configuration in which the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 to prevent it from becoming too conspicuous to the player, in a situation where the advantageous section is an advantageous section, the advantageous section display section 67 is placed in the common display area 68. It becomes possible to actively create a situation where only 67 is in a lit state, and it becomes easier for the manager of the game hall to check the advantageous section display section 67.

Note that instead of the configuration in which the advantageous area display section 67 remains lit during the advantageous section, a configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section display section 67 flashes at a predetermined cycle during the advantageous section. Furthermore, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that forms the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 81. An MPU 72 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. Although the board box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main controller 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in a board box 81 such that an opposing wall 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 and exposing the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81, and It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with a structure to prevent separation of these case bodies and to leave traces when these case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81 . As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are broken and the case body is separated in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented using some of the joints 83, another joint 83 By bringing these into a connected state, it becomes possible to prevent the case body from separating again. Furthermore, since the joint 83 is destroyed when the case body is separated, and traces thereof remain, it is possible to determine whether or not the case body has been illegally separated by visually checking the joint part 83. Become. Further, a sealing sticker 84 is pasted on one side of the board box 81 other than the one side on which the coupling portion 83 is arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave traces of the seal 84 if it is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The production control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 in the front door 12 in an overlapping manner. The production control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that, like the main control device 70, the production control device 90 includes a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 9.

As already explained, the MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A certain RAM 74, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, there is a reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal input. An inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects medals inserted from the mouth 45, a credit insertion detection sensor 47a, 48a, 49a detects the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49 individually, and an operation of the settlement button 51 is detected. A settlement detection sensor 51a, a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and a setting that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as a key detection sensor are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

Connected to the output side of the MPU 72 are the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the dual-purpose display section 66, the advantageous section display section 67, the production control device 90, etc. . In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is permitted, and directs them to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is prohibited. It has a function of discharging medals to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting them. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state. Specifically, the selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state. and the position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching the output state and stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that when the award of game media occurs, the number of game media to which the award is made is displayed. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous section display section 67 so that, when the section is an advantageous section, a notification that it is an advantageous section is provided. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. In addition, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the production control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the production control device 90 to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is executed so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas direct display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed in the production control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the target of relatively complicated display control, and the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is the target of relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed by the MPU 72. Thereby, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes improving the degree of attention to the performance and a display that emphasizes reliability.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply section and a power outage monitoring circuit that supply drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit supplies power to the power supply section from an external power source. monitors the current voltage, and outputs a power outage signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes processing at the time of a power outage by receiving a power outage signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power outage. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power outage power supply section for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power outage in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is retained in the RAM 74 when backup power can be supplied from the power supply unit during a power outage (for example, on the 1st or 2nd day). be done. However, by pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 and turning on the power of the slot machine 10, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized.

The production control device 90 includes a production control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various productions. The production control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A certain RAM 94 is built in, as well as a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips. In addition, although backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply part of the power supply unit 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, the configuration is such that backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. Good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main controller 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. make it happen.

Further, although not shown in the drawings, the production control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sends a drawing list that instructs the content of the image corresponding to each update timing to the VDP according to the determined execution content of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are respectively referred to as the main side MPU 72, the main side ROM 73, and the main side RAM 74, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the production control device 90 are respectively referred to as the production side. They are called MPU92, production side ROM93, and production side RAM94.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 10.

In the main processing, initialization processing is first performed (step S101). In the initialization process, an interrupt by a timer interrupt process is enabled, and various initial settings are made for the register group, I/O device, etc. in the main MPU 72. Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the power is turned on (step S102). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S102: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S103: NO), the winning probability remains unchanged. Setting processing is executed (step S105). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is turned on when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing the clearing process (step S104), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S105).

In the clearing process, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, in the main side RAM 74, an area for storing the setting values of the slot machine 10, an area for storing data indicating whether or not it is in the bonus state, and data indicating the total number of game media given in the bonus state were stored. area, an area where data indicating the gaming state is stored, an area where data for specifying the end condition of the ART state is stored, an area where data indicating the gaming section is stored, and data on the management results of the gaming history are stored. Clear each area of the main side RAM 74 to "0" including the area where the data has been deleted. As a result, when the clearing process is executed, the state will be in the normal gaming state and the normal section regardless of the state before the power cut off, and the state before the power cut off will not be able to proceed with the game due to the occurrence of an abnormality. If it is in a regulated state, the abnormal state is canceled. It should be noted that in the clearing process, the area in which the game history management result data is stored (specifically, the total number of games counter 74a and the number of advantageous games counter 74b) may be configured to be excluded from the target of "0" clearing. .

In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65. In addition, when the main side RAM 74 clearing process (step S104) is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the credit display section 65 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S104) If not executed, a display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power was shut off is displayed. In the winning probability setting process, each time the reset button 56 is operated, the set value is updated by 1, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the setting value is "Setting 6", the setting value is updated to "Setting 1". The winning probability setting process ends when the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is ended.

After executing the winning probability setting process, an advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S106). In the advantageous section initialization process, processing for initializing information regarding the advantageous section is executed. The contents of the initialization process for the advantageous section are the same as steps S1307, S1314, and S1321, which will be described later. Thereby, when the winning probability setting process is executed, the game section will definitely become the normal section. Note that the specific processing contents of the advantageous section initialization processing will be explained later. After executing the advantageous section initialization process, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). The normal processing will be explained in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process from step S108 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was shut off. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main side RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, it is determined that the setting value is normal if it is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and it is determined that it is abnormal if it is equal to or greater than "0" or "7". If the set value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power outage flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to see if the value is normal.

If an affirmative determination is made in all steps S108 to S110, it means that the power outage processing at the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 72 and restoring the data saved in the main side RAM 74 to the register of the main side MPU 72, the register of the main side MPU 72 can be changed. The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Furthermore, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after transmitting a power restoration command for recognizing the execution of the power restoration process to the production side MPU 92 (step S113), the process returns to the address before the power was cut off (step S114).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0", all actuators connected to the relevant output ports are disabled. is turned off (step S116), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S104).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 used in normal processing to be described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1" or not. If the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and a power outage process is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power outage processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether the data in the main side RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main side RAM 74 when the power outage is resolved, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes from step S204 onwards are performed. In step S204, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor provided on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S207, the status of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal or not.

In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S210, command output processing is performed to send various commands to the production side MPU 92. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72. In step S213, a management process is executed to manage the game history and display contents corresponding to the management results on the combined display unit 66. Thereafter, in step S214, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is ended. Note that details of the management process in step S213 will be explained later.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 12.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). Thereafter, a start waiting process is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winnings have occurred in the previous game. If any replay winning has occurred, a replay process is performed in which the same number of bets as the previous bet is set, and the start waiting process is ended. If no replay winnings have occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After the end of the medal return process or when the payment button 51 is not operated, it is determined whether the medal insertion or credit input buttons 47 to 49 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if both medal insertion and credit input buttons 47 to 49 have not been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After executing the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number (specifically "3") (step S303), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number Then, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the main line ML is activated, and then reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. After that, a winning combination lottery process is executed to perform a winning combination lottery process for the current game (step S306), and on condition that the value of the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S307: YES), a reel control process is executed to drive and control each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the current combination (step S308).

After that, a medium attachment process is executed (step S309). In the media granting process, when a minor winning combination is achieved in the current game, a process for granting the player a number of game media corresponding to the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current minor win is added to the credit counter provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit storage number, drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage number is dispensed to the medal receiving tray 59. In addition, in the media awarding process, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is display-controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media that is currently subject to award is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until a new bet on game media is made.

Thereafter, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable setting of the game state and game period corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the status of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S311). Further, on the condition that the value of the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S312: YES), the reception permission process is executed (step S313). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

<Configuration for conducting lottery>
Next, prior to explaining the winning combination lottery process in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12), a configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the main MPU 72 will be described. 13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the random number circuit group 100 provided on the main control board 71.

As shown in FIG. 13, the random number circuit group 100 includes first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. Further, the random number circuit group 100 is provided with first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d, respectively. In addition, the random number circuit group 100 includes a shared clock circuit 104 that inputs a clock signal in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and a shared clock circuit 104 that inputs a clock signal in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and each of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. First to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d that individually input clock signals are provided.

As shown in FIG. 14, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are provided with first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l each having an 8-bit storage area. The values of these first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l are obtained from the first to twelfth random number circuits 104 provided in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, as shown in FIG. The data is updated by inputting a clock signal to the 12 shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. For example, in the case of the first shared random number circuit 101a, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the first shared random number circuit 101a, and the random number generation circuit receives the clock signal. As a result, the 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the first random number counter 106a is updated. For example, in the case of the eighth shared random number circuit 101h, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the eighth shared random number circuit 101h, and the random number generation circuit generates the clock signal. By receiving this, the 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the eighth random number counter 106h is updated. Note that the random number generation circuit is provided in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is branched into 12 lines in the main control board 71, and each of the branched signal paths is connected to one of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. Connected to the corresponding random number circuit. Therefore, a clock signal is input to each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at the same timing. As a result, the update period of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are all constant at the period in which the clock signal is output from the shared clock circuit 104, and the update timing of the random numbers is also changed from the shared clock circuit 104. It becomes constant at the timing when the clock signal is output.

The 8-bit random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated by generating random numbers from "0" to "255" in a predetermined order and by generating all of these random numbers once. This is done so that one cycle of updating is completed. This update cycle is then repeated. In this case, the updating order of random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is different from each other. For example, in the first shared random number circuit 101a, the random number update order is set so that the random numbers increase by 1 in ascending order from "0" to "255", and the second shared random number circuit 101b The update order of random numbers is set so that the random numbers decrease by 1 in descending order from "255" to "0", and the third shared random number circuit 101c updates all even numbers in ascending order. The random number update order is set so that all odd numbers are updated in ascending order later, and the fourth to twelfth shared random number circuits 101d to 101l are set to update orders different from these update orders and mutually different update orders. has been done. As a result, even if the update period and update timing of random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are constant as described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l It is possible to prevent the random numbers from always being the same at each update timing.

Furthermore, if the random number update completes one cycle in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, a new update cycle will be started from an initial value different from the initial value of the update cycle. , the manner in which the initial value is selected in relation to the number of update cycles differs among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to diversify the combination patterns of random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at each update timing.

As shown in FIG. 14, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b are provided with a thirteenth random number counter 106m and a fourteenth random number counter 106n each having a 16-bit storage area, and a third dedicated random number counter 106m and a fourteenth random number counter 106n are provided, respectively. The random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d are provided with a 15th random number counter 106o and a 16th random number counter 106p each having an 8-bit storage area. The values of these 13th to 16th random number counters 106m to 106p are determined by the first to fourth dedicated clocks provided individually corresponding to the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d, respectively, as shown in FIG. It is updated by inputting a clock signal from the circuits 105a to 105d to the corresponding first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d.

For example, in the case of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the random number generation circuit generates the clock signal. By receiving this, the 16-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the 13th random number counter 106m is updated. In addition, in the case of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, and the random number generation circuit generates a clock signal. By receiving this, the 16-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the fourteenth random number counter 106n is updated. In addition, in the case of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the random number generation circuit generates a clock signal. By receiving this, the 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the 15th random number counter 106o is updated. In addition, in the case of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, the clock signal output from the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d is input to a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, and the random number generation circuit generates a clock signal. By receiving this, the 8-bit data input from the random number generation circuit to the 16th random number counter 106p is updated.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are not provided with individual clock circuits as described above, but are provided with a shared clock circuit 104 that is common to each of them. The random number update period and random number update timing in the 12 shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are constant. On the other hand, the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are respectively provided with first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d. Specifically, the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is connected to the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is connected to the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. The path is connected to the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is connected to the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the signal path is connected to the fourth dedicated random number circuit 105d. A signal path for transmitting the clock signal output from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is connected to the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d.

The output cycles of the clock signals in the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d are different from each other. This allows the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d to have their own random number update cycles and random number update timings. Further, the output period of the clock signal of each of the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d is different from the output period of the clock signal of the shared clock circuit 104. As a result, the random number update cycle and random number update timing in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are made different from the random number update cycle and random number update timing in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. becomes possible.

To update the 16-bit random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, random numbers from "0" to "65535" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once. This is done so that one cycle of updating is completed. This update cycle is then repeated. In this case, the updating orders of random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b are different from each other. For example, the update order of random numbers is set such that the first dedicated random number circuit 102a updates all even numbers in ascending order and then updates all odd numbers in ascending order, and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b updates all odd numbers in ascending order. The random number update order is set so that all even numbers are subsequently updated in ascending order. This makes it possible to make the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b different not only in the random number update period and random number update timing but also in the random number update order, and these first dedicated random number circuits 102a And it becomes possible to ensure the uniqueness of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b update the random numbers in the same order. Even in this case, when the supply of operating power to the main controller 70 is started, the initial values for starting random number updating are mutually different in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. By making them different, it becomes possible to make it difficult to obtain the same random number.

In updating the 8-bit random numbers in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, random numbers from "0" to "255" are generated in a predetermined order, and all of these random numbers are generated once. This is done so that one update cycle is completed. This update cycle is then repeated. In this case, the order of updating random numbers in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d are different from each other. For example, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c updates all even numbers in descending order and then updates all odd numbers in descending order, and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d updates all odd numbers in descending order. The update order of random numbers is set so that all even numbers are subsequently updated in descending order. This allows the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d to differ not only in the random number update period and the random number update timing but also in the random number update order, and these third dedicated random number circuits 102c And it becomes possible to ensure the uniqueness of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d.

Note that the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d update the random numbers in the same order. Even in this case, when the supply of operating power to the main controller 70 is started, the initial values when updating the random numbers are mutually different in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. By making them different, it becomes possible to make it difficult to obtain the same random number.

In a situation where it is possible to start a new game, the random numbers generated in the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used as a trigger for starting a new game. 41 is operated, the data is written to the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p provided corresponding to the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d, respectively. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the main MPU 72 outputs a latch signal when the start lever 41 is operated as an opportunity to start a new game in a situation where it is possible to start a new game. A latch signal output section 107 is provided for this purpose. The signal path for transmitting the latch signal output from the latch signal output section 107 is branched into 16 lines in the main control board 71, and each of the branched signal paths is connected to one of the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p. Connected to the corresponding register. As a result, when a latch signal is output from the latch signal output section 107 based on the operation of the start lever 41, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d Random numbers generated in each are written into latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d, respectively. The random numbers written in the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p are obtained and used as necessary when the main side MPU 72 performs various lottery drawings.

Here, the random numbers generated in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d and written to the thirteenth to sixteenth latch registers 103m to 103p are uniquely determined by the type of lottery processing to be used. There is. Specifically, the 16-bit random number generated in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and written in the 13th latch register 103m is used in the winning combination lottery process described later, and the 16-bit random number generated in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b and written in the 13th latch register 103m is used The 16-bit random number written in the 14th latch register 103n is used in the transition lottery process to the advantageous section described later, and the 8-bit random number generated in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and written in the 15th latch register 103o is used as described later. The 8-bit random number generated in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d and written to the 16th latch register 103p is used in the transition lottery process for the ART state, which will be described later. Ru. As already explained, the random numbers in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are updated at their own update cycles and timings, and in their own order. In this case, the random numbers of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used in the winning combination lottery process, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section, the transition lottery process for this precursor state, and the transition lottery process to the ART state. With this configuration, it becomes possible to perform each of these lottery processes independently without synchronizing them with each other.

Further, lottery processing for winning combinations is performed in each game, and in the normal section, the lottery processing for shifting to the advantageous section is frequently executed in each game. In addition, there is a high possibility that the transition lottery process for this precursor state and the transition lottery process to the ART state will be performed in the game in which the transition lottery process to the advantageous section has been performed, and furthermore, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a transition to the ART state. This is a deciding lottery process. Under these circumstances, by adopting a configuration in which the random numbers of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are used in each of these lottery processes, the results of each of these lottery processes are not synchronized, and each It becomes possible to strictly perform lottery processing.

On the other hand, the random numbers generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and written to the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are not uniquely determined for the type of lottery processing to be used. First, it will be used in one of a plurality of predetermined lottery processes. The number of types of the plurality of predetermined lottery processes is set to be larger than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. The first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l are used in a predetermined order, and when it is time to execute a predetermined lottery process among a plurality of types of lottery processes, for example, the first common random number circuit 101a If the target is to be used, the random number written to the first latch register 103a is used, and for example, if the eighth shared random number circuit 101h is to be used, the random number written to the eighth latch register 103h is used. Random numbers are used. In other words, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared in multiple types of lottery processes that are set to be a larger number than the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to reduce the number of random number circuits compared to a configuration in which random number circuits are individually set for each of a plurality of types of lottery processing.

In this configuration in which the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l are used in common in multiple types of lottery processes, as already explained, the random numbers in the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated in the same way. This is done at regular intervals and at the same update timing. Further, the random numbers generated by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are all 8-bit random numbers. As a result, when executing a predetermined lottery process included in multiple types of lottery processes, for example, the random number of the first common random number circuit 101a is acquired at the first lottery timing, and the eighth common random number is acquired at the second lottery timing. Even if the random numbers of the circuit 101h are obtained, these random numbers can be treated as being updated in a fixed manner. On the other hand, since the random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated in different update orders, they are not completely synchronized. As a result, when multiple lottery processes among the multiple types of lottery processes described above are executed in the same game, it is possible to prevent the random numbers obtained in the multiple lottery processes from having the same value. . Incidentally, the above-mentioned multiple types of lottery processing include a lottery process for transition to a false omen state, a lottery process for transition to a chance state, a lottery process for the number of additional games, a lottery process for transition to A loop, and a lottery process for transition to B loop, which will be described later. This includes lottery processing, etc.

Next, the random number acquisition process executed by the main MPU 72 to acquire the above random numbers will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 15. Note that the random number acquisition process is executed as a common subroutine process each time the main MPU 72 needs to perform various lottery selections.

When the lottery process to be executed this time is a winning lottery process, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a becomes the target for using random numbers (step S401: YES). In this case, numerical information of the random number is acquired from the thirteenth latch register 103m into which the random number of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S402).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is a lottery process to move to an advantageous section, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b becomes the target for using random numbers (step S403: YES). In this case, numerical information of the random number is obtained from the fourteenth latch register 103n into which the random number of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b was written when the start lever 41 was operated to start the current game (step S404).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is the transition lottery process for the present precursor state, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c becomes the target for using random numbers (step S405: YES). In this case, numerical information of the random number is obtained from the fifteenth latch register 103o in which the random number of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S406).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is a lottery process to transition to the ART state, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d becomes the target for using random numbers (step S407: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is acquired from the 16th latch register 103p into which the random number of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d was written when the start lever 41 was operated to start the current game (step S408).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is neither the winning combination lottery process, the transition lottery process to an advantageous section, the transition lottery process for this precursor state, nor the transition lottery process to the ART state, the first to twelfth common random numbers The circuits 101a to 101l become targets for using random numbers (step S407: NO). In this case, first, the value of the random number pointer provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S409). The random number pointer is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used for random numbers, and it stores numerical information from "0" to "11". It can be taken. Then, when the random number pointer is "0", the first shared random number circuit 101a becomes the target for using random numbers, and when the random number pointer is "1", the second shared random number circuit 101b becomes the target for using random numbers, When the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c is the target for using random numbers, and when the random number pointer is "m", the m+1st shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used for random numbers. target (m is an integer greater than or equal to 0).

If the value of the random number pointer after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "11" (step S410: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S411). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is incremented by 1 each time it is used for lottery processing in the numerical range of "0" to "11", and when it exceeds the maximum value of the numerical range, it becomes the minimum value. It will be looped back. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used as random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a are to be used in a predetermined order each time they are to be used in lottery processing. .about.101l are sequentially changed, and after the last common random number circuits 101a to 101l are used, the first common random number circuits 101a to 101l are used again.

If a negative determination is made in step S410, or if the process in step S411 is executed, the random numbers of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are the current random numbers. Numerical information of a random number is acquired from the latch register written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the game (step S412). As a result, even if the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared in a lottery process with a number of types exceeding the number of first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l It becomes possible to obtain random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l in each lottery process within the range of the number of shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

Furthermore, the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is less than or equal to the number of lottery processes that occur simultaneously in one game among the lottery processes that use the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. It becomes. As a result, even if a plurality of lottery processes to be used occur simultaneously in one game, random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l in each of the plurality of lottery processes can be obtained. becomes possible.

<Lottery process for roles>
Next, the winning combination lottery process executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 16.

First, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S501). The contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the winning combination lottery process, the random number written in the 13th latch register 103m is obtained from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. In detail, as already explained, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a generates random numbers from "0" to "65535", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the process proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). At the timing when an affirmative determination is made, the random number written to the thirteenth latch register 103m by the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is acquired.

After acquiring the random numbers, a lottery table for determining the validity of the combination is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S502). In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on, and the predetermined operation is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to set based on which winning probability the winning combination processing is to be executed. "Setting n+1" has a more advantageous winning probability for the player than "Setting n". Specifically, since the winning probability of the winning combination that triggers the transition to the BB state is higher in "setting n+1" than in "setting n," players It will be advantageous for. Furthermore, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72 even if the setting values are the same level: the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Furthermore, as gaming states, bonus states (BB state and RB state) exist separately from the states of each of these lottery modes. In step S502, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value, the current lottery mode, and the current gaming state is selected.

Taking "Setting 3" as an example, the lottery tables corresponding to each of the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode in the non-bonus state will be described. First, the normal mode lottery table that is selected in the normal mode will be explained. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. Note that in the following description, reference is made to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 18 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 17, index values IV are set in the normal mode lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a.

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with first bell winning data and first supplementary winning data. In the case of winning with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. The first bell prize is guaranteed to occur regardless of the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first supplementary prize is guaranteed to occur.

In this slot machine 10, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to slide for up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reel before a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid winning a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If five or more symbols exist between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also referred to as a "missing shot"). say). The 1st to 3rd supplementary winnings, 1st bell winnings, 2nd bell winnings, and various replay winnings are winnings that will not be missed if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, cherry prize, 1st BB prize, 2nd BB prize, 3rd BB prize, 4th BB prize, 1st RB prize, and 2nd RB prize are determined by the stop button 42 corresponding to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a winning mode in which a prize may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation of ~44.

As shown in FIG. 17, the index value IV=2 is set with first bell winning data and second supplementary winning data. In the case of a win with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. 18, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types and respective The first bell prize is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second supplementary prize is surely achieved.

As shown in FIG. 17, the index value IV=3 is set with the first bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data. In the case of a win with the index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. The first bell prize is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize is surely achieved.

As shown in FIG. 17, only the first bell winning data is set to the index value IV=4. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 18, the 1st bell prize is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. . As shown in FIG. 17, only the second bell winning data is set to the index value IV=17. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 18, the 2nd bell win is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. .

As shown in FIG. 17, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=5. In the case of winning with index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 18, the first watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be achieved. As shown in FIG. 17, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=18. If the win is achieved with the index value IV=18, the second watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 17, only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=6. In the case of a win with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 18, a cherry win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that a cherry prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 17, only the third BB winning data is set to the index value IV=7. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 18, the 3rd BB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the 3rd BB prize will not be achieved. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the 4th BB winning data is set to the index value IV=8. In the case of winning with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 18, the 4th BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the 4th BB prize will not be achieved. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the first RB winning data is set to the index value IV=9. In the case of winning with index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 18, the first RB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first RB prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 17, only the first BB winning data is set to the index value IV=19. In the case of winning with the index value IV=19, as shown in FIG. 18, the 1st BB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first BB prize will not be achieved. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV=20. In the case of winning with index value IV=20, as shown in FIG. 18, the 2nd BB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second BB prize will not be achieved. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the second RB winning data is set to the index value IV=21. In the case of winning with index value IV=21, as shown in FIG. 18, the second RB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second RB winning will not be achieved.

Here, the winning data other than the bonus winning data including the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data will be deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning data was won. It does not carry over to subsequent games. On the other hand, the above-mentioned bonus winning data is stored and retained until the corresponding bonus winning is achieved, even in the subsequent games after the winning game, unless the main side RAM 74 is cleared. . In this case, in a game in which bonus winning data is carried over, index values IV corresponding to all bonus winning data are excluded from lottery targets. This makes it possible to prevent new bonus winning data from being stored even though the bonus winning data has already been stored, and prevents multiple bonus winning data from being stored cumulatively. It becomes possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 17, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=10. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 18, the first chance replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=22. In the case of winning with index value IV=22, as shown in FIG. 18, the second chance replay winning is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do.

As shown in FIG. 17, the index values IV=11 to 16 are set with normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data. In this case, if you win with index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. , if the third stop (the reel where the last stop command occurred) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases In this case, a normal replay winning is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

When the normal mode lottery table in FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV=1, the probability of winning when index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when index value IV=3 are determined. The probability of each is approximately 1/6.6. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is approximately 1/13.1. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is approximately 1/164. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is approximately 1/423. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 are each about 1/437. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 is approximately 1/328. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is approximately 1/655. Also, the probability of winning when index value IV = 11, the probability of winning when index value IV = 12, the probability of winning when index value IV = 13, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 13. The probability of winning when index value IV=14, the probability of winning when index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when index value IV=16 are each approximately 1/41. It is. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is approximately 1/16.4. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=18 is approximately 1/146. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=19 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=20 are each about 1/437. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=21 is approximately 1/328. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV=22 is approximately 1/655.

Here, as already explained, in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as the winning data of index values IV=11 to 16. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/41. If a win is achieved with the index value IV = 11 to 16, the stop order of the first stop, second stop, and third stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, a first RT mode lottery table that is selected when the first RT mode is "setting 3" will be described. FIGS. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first RT mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, the winning data set for each index value IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are ) is the same as In addition, the winning data set for each index value IV = 23 to 28 in the first RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as that of each index value IV = 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table. is the same as

In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 and 23 to 24 are set with winnings that enable the awarding of game media, and the combinations are set for each of the index values IV=1 to 6 and 23 to 24. Since the winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV = 1 to 6 and 17 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table, the types of winnings that can be awarded with gaming media and the winnings The probability of winning is the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode.

In addition, bonus winning data is set for index values IV=7 to 9, 25 to 27 in the first RT mode lottery table, similar to index values IV=7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the normal mode lottery table. , the winning probability is the same as the normal mode lottery table. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. In addition, chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 10, 28 in the first RT mode lottery table, similar to the index value IV = 10, 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the probability of winning is set in the normal mode lottery table. It is the same as the lottery table for In other words, the probability of winning each chance replay combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 22 are different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, the second RT replay winning data is set as the winning data of index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8.

If you win with index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 20, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, then A second RT replay prize is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, a normal replay prize is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases. Also, if you win with index value IV = 13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases.

In the 1st RT mode, if the index value IV is any one of 11 to 16, it will be won, and the stop order of the first stop, second stop, and third stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. If this happens, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the second RT mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, first fall replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as winning data with index values IV=17 to 22. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=17 to 22 is approximately 1/10.9.

If you win with index value IV=17 in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 20, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. If the right reel is 32R, the normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first falling replay win will occur at the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44. It will definitely happen regardless. Also, if you win with index value IV = 18, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 19, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 20, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 21, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 22, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the normal mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, combinations that enable replay winnings are set at index values IV=10 to 22 and 28. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning combination (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) that makes it possible to achieve a replay prize in the first RT mode is approximately 1/1. It is 4.1. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/6.7. In other words, the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode that is selected when the second RT mode is "Setting 3" will be explained. FIGS. 21 and 22 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21, the winning data set for each index value IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are ) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 19). In addition, the winning data set for each index value IV = 18 to 23 in the second RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are The index values are the same as each of the index values IV=23 to 28 in the 2RT mode lottery table.

In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 and 18 to 19 are set with winnings that enable the awarding of game media, and the combinations are set for each of the index values IV=1 to 6 and 18 to 19. The winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV=1 to 6, 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV=1 to 6, 1 to 22 in the first RT mode lottery table. 23 to 24, the types of winning combinations for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. It has become.

In addition, the index values IV = 7 to 9, 20 to 22 in the second RT mode lottery table are the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the first RT mode lottery table. The bonus winning data is set similarly to =7 to 9 and 25 to 27, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Also, the index value IV = 10, 23 in the second RT mode lottery table has the same chance as the index value IV = 10, 22 in the normal mode lottery table and the index value IV = 10, 28 in the first RT mode lottery table. Replay winning data is set, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. In other words, the probability of winning each chance replay combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 17 are different from those in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 21, second fall replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. . The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8.

If you win with index value IV=11 in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 22, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. If the right reel is 32R, the normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of the operation of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the second falling replay win will occur at the timing of the operation of each stop button 42-44. It will definitely happen regardless. Also, if you win with index value IV = 12, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 13, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 15, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 16, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, only normal replay winning data is set at index value IV=17. The probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is set higher than the probability of winning other combinations, and specifically, the probability of winning is approximately 1/5.5. If a win is achieved with this index value IV=17, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

In the second RT mode lottery table, combinations that enable replay winnings are set at index values IV=10 to 17 and 23. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning combination (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) that makes it possible to achieve a replay prize in the second RT mode is approximately 1. /3.0. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7, and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/4.1. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the replay probability is the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode. They may have the same configuration.

In addition, in addition to the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, the main side ROM 73 also contains a lottery table for reference in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) when in the BB state or RB state. This is an internal lottery table that stores a bonus lottery table to be used, and is referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 16) when a bonus winning combination has been won but the corresponding bonus winning has not been achieved. is memorized.

At the bonus lottery table, you win the winning combination that allows you to win the first bell at a rate of approximately 1/1.5, and if you win the winning combination, you will be given the winning order of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the winning order of each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R, the first bell prize is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of 32M and 32R. Furthermore, at the bonus lottery table, the winning combination that allows the first watermelon prize to be won is won at a rate of approximately 1/6.6, and the winning combination that allows the establishment of the cherry prize is won at a rate of approximately 1/7.8. These first watermelon winnings and cherry winnings are not established depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By setting the bonus lottery table as described above, in the BB state or RB state, the first bell is basically won in each game and "11" game media are awarded. However, the first watermelon prize or cherry prize may be achieved, and if the first watermelon prize is achieved, "5" game media will be awarded, and if the cherry prize is achieved, "2" game media will be awarded. Granted. On the other hand, the BB state ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state becomes equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (for example, "350"), and the RB state ends when the RB state ends. The game ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start reaches or exceeds the RB end reference number (for example, "150"). Therefore, the number of games required to complete the BB state and the RB state will vary depending on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) and whether or not a winning combination occurs. It should be noted that the bonus lottery table is common between set values "1" to "6" that vary the advantage of the slot machine 10.

The internal lottery table has winning data corresponding to index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV. In addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so that it becomes the winning probability of the sum of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, when a bonus role is internally won, the role that allows the award of game media and the winning probability of that role are the same as in the normal mode, and the replay probability is the same as in the normal mode. A bonus combination is not won, and furthermore, a combination that triggers the transition to the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode is not won.

Here, in all of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV and " There are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values of 1" to 6. FIGS. 23(a) to 23(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values IV with different winning probabilities between setting values "1" to "6", and FIG. 23(a) is a normal mode 23(b) shows the case of the lottery table for the first RT mode, and FIG. 23(c) shows the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 23(a), in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV=17 to 22 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the setting values of "1" to "6", and the index value IV =1 to 16 are index values IV that have the same probability of winning among the setting values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 23(b), in the lottery table for the first RT mode, index values IV=23 to 28 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the setting values of "1" to "6", and the index values IV=1 to 22 are index values IV that have the same probability of winning among the set values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 23(c), in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV=18 to 23 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6", and the index values IV=1 to 17 are index values IV that have the same probability of winning among the setting values of "1" to "6".

In other words, no matter which lottery table it is, the index value IV with the same winning probability between the set values "1" to "6" is the index value IV in the front range that is a consecutive number from index value IV = 1. The index values IV that have different winning probabilities between the setting values "1" to "6" are from the index value IV next to the last index value IV in the front range to the last index value IV. The index values are summarized in the rear range index value IV, which is a serial number. In this way, the index values IV with the same probability of winning between the setting values of "1" and "6" are aggregated in the front range, and the index values with different probability of winning between the setting values of "1" and "6" are aggregated into the front range. By consolidating the IVs into the rear range, it is possible to set index values IV that have the same winning probability and index values IV that have different winning probabilities between the set values "1" to "6" at the design stage of the slot machine 10. It becomes easier to make corrections.

In each lottery table, the index values IV included in the rear range have different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6", but the index values IV included in the rear range are different, but are set for each index value IV included in the rear range. Winning data and winning probabilities are common to each lottery table. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV=17 to 22 are included in the rear range as shown in FIG. ), index values IV=23 to 28 are included in the rear range, and in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV=18 to 23 are included in the rear range, as shown in FIG. 23(c). included in. In this case, the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table are the set winning data and The winning probabilities are the same, and the index value IV = 18 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 24 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV = 19 in the second RT mode lottery table. The set winning data and winning probability are the same, and the index value IV = 19 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV = 25 in the second RT mode lottery table. The index value IV = 20 means that the set winning data and winning probability are the same, and the index value IV = 20 in the normal mode lottery table and the index value IV = 26 in the first RT mode lottery table. The index value IV=21 in the second RT mode lottery table means that the set winning data and winning probability are the same, and the index value IV=21 in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table The index value IV=27 in the second RT mode lottery table and the index value IV=22 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same winning data and winning probability, and the index value IV=22 in the normal mode lottery table. The index value IV=28 in the first RT mode lottery table and the index value IV=23 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same winning data and winning probability. As a result, it is possible to make the types of winning combinations that have different winning probabilities between the setting values of "1" to "6" common in each lottery table, and also to It is possible to make the probability of winning for each set value the same.

By the way, there is an index value where only the second bell winning data is set, an index value where only the second watermelon winning data is set, an index value where only the first BB winning data is set, an index where only the second BB winning data is set. For each winning probability of index value, index value where only 2nd RB winning data is set, and index value IV where only 2nd chance replay winning data is set, a larger setting value has a higher winning probability than a smaller setting value. It is set to have a tendency to increase. However, this is not limited to this, and if a larger setting value is more advantageous to the player than a smaller setting value, for some index values, a larger setting value may win more than a smaller setting value. The configuration may be such that the probability tends to be low.

As already explained, in each lottery table, the index values IV=1 to 10 included in the front range are set with the same winning data, and the winning probabilities are also the same. As a result, in each lottery table, the winning probabilities are made the same for roles that have the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6" and that have the same type of winning data set. becomes possible.

In the configuration in which the front range and the rear range are set as described above, the front range includes a role that allows the award of game media, a role that allows replay winnings, and a role that allows bonus winnings. In addition, in the rear range, a winning combination that allows the award of game media, a winning combination that allows replay winnings, and a winning combination that allows bonus winnings are also set. In other words, the winning combinations that allow the provision of game media are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these winning combinations have lost continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, the combinations that allow replay winnings are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, the winning combinations that make it possible to win a bonus are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the rear range. In this case, there is a risk that the processing configuration for grasping the winning combination in various processes after the execution of the winning combination processing (FIG. 16) may become complicated.

In addition, the index values set in the latter half of the front range in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table include winning data and Since the winning data for changing the replay probability is set, the first index value IV of the rear range is different in each lottery table. For example, the index value IV in which only the second bell winning data is set is "17" in the normal mode lottery table, "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "18" in the second RT mode lottery table. Become. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the first BB winning data is set is "19" in the normal mode lottery table, "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. becomes. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set is "22" in the normal mode lottery table, "28" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "28" in the second RT mode lottery table. 23". In this case, if you try to handle the same winning combination with different index values IV in various processes after executing the winning winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the index value will be It becomes necessary to understand not only the IV but also the current lottery mode, which may complicate the processing configuration.

In order to eliminate the above-mentioned inconveniences. In this slot machine 10, an offset table 111 is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the offset table 111.

As shown in FIG. 24, information on winning numbers is set in the offset table 111. Numerical information from "1" to "41" is set as successive numbers as winning number information. In the offset table 111, each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, each index value IV of the first RT mode lottery table, and each index value IV of the second RT mode lottery table is set from "1" to "41". It is associated with information about one of the winning numbers. This correspondence consists of a group of minor roles that are roles that allow the award of game media, a group of bonus roles that are roles that enable the establishment of bonus winnings, and a group of roles that enable the establishment of replay winnings. This is done so that each group of replay winning combinations is formed by information on consecutive winning numbers. Furthermore, this association is made so that even if the winning data of the same type is set in different lottery modes, it can be handled as information on the same winning number.

Specifically, a group of information about winning numbers that are consecutive numbers from "1" to "8" is a small group, and a group of information about winning numbers that are consecutive numbers from "9" to "14" is a bonus. The offset table 111 is set so that the group of winning number information that is a serial number after "15" becomes a group of winning combinations. In addition, in the replay role group, replay roles for which normal replay winning data is not set are aggregated in the winning number information of "15" and "16", and normal replay winning data is not set in the information of winning numbers after "17". Replay roles with winning data set are aggregated.

In each lottery table, the index value IV of "1" is set with the first bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data, but the index value IV=1 is "1" in any lottery table. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "2" is set with the first bell winning data and the second supplementary winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "3" is set with the first bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, only the first bell winning data is set in the index value IV of "4", but the index value IV = 4 is set with the information of the winning number "4" in any lottery table. has been done.

The index value IV of “17” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “23” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “18” in the second RT mode lottery table are the second bell winning data. These index values IV are set with information about the winning number "5". As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 16).

In each lottery table, only the first watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV of "5", but the index value IV = 5 is set with the information of the winning number "6" in any lottery table. has been done.

The index value IV of “18” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “24” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “19” in the second RT mode lottery table are the second watermelon winning data. These index values IV are set with information about the winning number "7". As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 16).

In each lottery table, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV of "6", but the information of the winning number "8" is set in the index value IV = 6 in any lottery table. There is. In each lottery table, only the 3rd BB winning data is set in the index value IV of "7", but the information of the winning number "9" is set in the index value IV = 7 in any lottery table. ing. In each lottery table, only the 4th BB winning data is set in the index value IV of "8", but the information of the winning number "10" is set in the index value IV = 8 in any lottery table. ing.

The index value IV of "19" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "20" in the second RT mode lottery table contain only the 1st BB winning data. are set, but information about the winning number "11" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 16).

Only the 2nd BB winning data is included in the index value IV of "20" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "26" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "21" in the second RT mode lottery table. are set, but information about the winning number "12" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 16).

In each lottery table, only the 1st RB winning data is set in the index value IV of "9", but the information of the winning number "13" is set in the index value IV = 9 in any lottery table. ing.

Only the 2nd RB winning data is included in the index value IV of "21" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "27" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "22" in the second RT mode lottery table. are set, but information about the winning number "14" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 16).

In each lottery table, only the first chance replay winning data is set for the index value IV of "10", but for the index value IV = 10, information about the winning number "15" is set in any lottery table. It is set.

The index value IV of “22” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “28” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “23” in the second RT mode lottery table will give you a second chance replay win. Although only data is set, information about the winning number "16" is set in these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 16).

Winning numbers after "17" do not have a common index value IV in each lottery table, and individual winning number information is set for each index value IV of each lottery table. This is because the type of winning data set in the index value IV associated with the winning numbers after "17" is not common among the lottery tables. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set are set with the information of the winning numbers "17" to "22", respectively. ing. In addition, in the first RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 11 to 16, where the normal replay winning data and the second RT replay winning data are set, are set with winning number information of "23" to "28", respectively. In addition, the index values IV=17 to 22, in which the normal replay winning data and the first fall replay winning data are set, are set with winning number information of "29" to "34", respectively. In addition, in the second RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 11 to 16, in which the normal replay winning data and the second fall replay winning data are set, are set with winning number information of "35" to "40", respectively. In addition, the index value IV=17, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, has information about the winning number "41" set therein.

By providing the offset table 111 as described above, a combination of winning combinations that allows the awarding of game media, winnings that allow replay winnings, and winnings that allow bonus winnings are mixed in the front range and the back range. In various processes after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), it is now possible to handle the winnings in the same group in a consolidated state. In addition, even though the same winning data is set, the winnings for which different index values IV are set between each lottery table are treated as the same information in various processes after the lottery processing (Figure 16) of the winning combination. becomes possible. Furthermore, when transmitting the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) to the production side MPU 92, it is sufficient to set the information of the winning number in the command for transmitting the result, so the amount of information of the command can be It is possible to suppress it.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the index values IV of the bonus lottery table and the internal lottery table are also included in the offset table 111 for the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. Information on common winning numbers is associated with each index value IV. In the case of a bonus lottery table, there are an index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set, an index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set, and an index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set. However, the index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set is associated with the winning number information of "4", and the index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set is " The index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set is associated with the information on the winning number "8". In addition, in the case of an internal lottery table, as already explained, the winning data corresponding to index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table are set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV. In addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so that the winning probability is the sum of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, the index values IV corresponding to index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table correspond to the winning number information corresponding to those index values IV in the normal mode lottery table. The index value IV for which only normal replay winning data is set is the same as the index value IV = 17 for which only normal replay winning data is set in the second RT mode lottery table. Information is associated.

Returning to the description of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), after selecting the lottery table (step S502), the first round flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S503). In the winning combination lottery process, the index value IV in the front range has the same winning probability between the setting values of "1" to "6", and the winning probability differs between the setting values of "1" to "6". A lottery is performed from the index values IV in the front range among the index values IV in the rear range. In this case, the first round flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current lottery target is in the front range.

Thereafter, a first reference value is set in the target index counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S504). The target index counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the type of winning combination that is a lottery target. Further, the first reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the front range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the case of the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=1 to 16 corresponds to the front range, so the first reference value is "16", and in the case of the first RT mode lottery table, the index value IV= Since 1 to 22 correspond to the front range, the first reference value is "22", and in the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV = 1 to 17 corresponds to the front range, so the first reference value is "17". ”.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if it is a bonus lottery table, only three index values IV are set, and all of these index values IV have a winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". Since they are the same, the first reference value is "3". Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the front range is set as the first reference value.

Thereafter, a determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set (step S505). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV set to the index value IV currently being selected for lottery to the current determination value DV. In the first judgment value setting process, the random number obtained in step S501 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV set in the index value IV corresponding to the first reference value is added to this random number to create a new judgment value. Let the judgment value DV be. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, the first reference value is "16", so the point value PV set to index value IV = 16 in the normal mode lottery table is added to the random number obtained in step S501. The obtained value is set as the judgment value DV.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the combination currently selected for lottery is valid (step S506). In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it does not exceed "65535", the value of the target index counter is subtracted by 1 (step S507), and it is determined whether the value of the target index counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" ( Step S508). If the value of the target index counter is not "0" (step S508: NO), the process returns to step S505, and a determination is made as to whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the updated value of the target index counter is correct.

If the value of the target index counter is "0" (step S508: YES), it is determined whether the current state is a bonus state (step S509). Since the index value IV of the rear range is not set in the bonus lottery table, if the current state is the bonus state (step S509: YES), it is assumed that no winning role was won in this game. The process directly advances to step S514.

If the current state is not a bonus state (step S509: NO), it is determined whether the first round flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S510). That is, it is determined whether the index value group IV for which the determination of the validity of the winning combination has been completed is in the front range. If the first round flag is set to "1" (step S510: YES), after clearing the first round flag to "0" (step S511), the second reference value is set in the target index counter ( Step S512). The second reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the rear range in each lottery table. Specifically, for the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 17 to 22 corresponds to the rear range, and for the first RT mode lottery table, the index value IV = 23 to 28 corresponds to the rear range. However, in the case of the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV=18 to 23 corresponds to the rear range, so the second reference value is "6" in any lottery table. Note that in the case of a bonus lottery table, the second reference value will not be set because there is no index value IV included in the rear range. Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the rear range is set as the second reference value. After setting the second reference value, the process returns to step S505, and a determination is made as to whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the second reference value is correct. If a negative determination is made in step S510, it is assumed that no winning combination was won in this game, and the process directly advances to step S514.

On the other hand, if the number exceeds "65535" in step S506, information on the winning number corresponding to the role currently being drawn is acquired, as well as winning data corresponding to the role currently being drawn. The winning data acquisition process for setting the winning data in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S513). FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the winning data acquisition process.

First, by determining whether "1" is set in the first round flag of the main side RAM 74, it is determined whether the winning combination this time is the index value IV included in the previous range ( Step S601). If the first round flag is set to "1" (step S601: YES), the value of the target index counter in the main side RAM 74 corresponds to the index value IV that was won this time, so the process from step S603 onward is executed as is. Execute processing.

On the other hand, when the value of the first round flag is "0", it means that the winning combination this time is the index value IV included in the rear range. When determining the validity of the index value IV included in the rear range, a second reference value is set in the target index counter, and the second reference value is the number of index values IV included in the rear range. Therefore, the index value IV of the winning combination this time does not match the value of the target index counter. Then, the difference between the index value IV of the winning combination actually won this time and the value of the target index counter matches the first reference value of the lottery table that was the object of the lottery this time. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step S601, the first reference value of the lottery table that is the target of the current lottery is added to the value of the target index counter (step S602). The first reference value added in this case is "16" if it is a lottery table for the normal mode, "22" if it is a lottery table for the first RT mode, and "17" if it is a lottery table for the second RT mode. becomes.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S601 or if the process in step S602 is executed, the offset table 111 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S603). Then, the winning number information corresponding to the type of lottery table targeted for the current lottery and the current value of the target index counter is read from the offset table 111, and the winning number information is used as the winning number information in the current game. It is stored in the main side RAM 74 as (step S604). It should be noted that, as a matter of course, if none of the winning combinations is won, the winning number information is not stored in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, information on the winning data included in the winning combination this time is developed in the main side RAM 74 (step S605). The main side RAM 74 has the same number of winning data areas as the number of winning data existing in the slot machine 10, and in step S605, the winning data included in the currently won winning combination is set in the main RAM 74. Set "1" in the area corresponding to the winning data other than various bonus winning data such as 1st BB winning data, 2nd BB winning data, 3rd BB winning data, 4th BB winning data, 1st RB winning data, and 2nd RT winning data. The winning corresponding area corresponding to the winning data that is not included in the winning combination this time is cleared to "0". The value of the winning corresponding area corresponding to various bonus winning data is set to "1" when a winning combination including the corresponding winning data is won, and the clearing process of the main side RAM 74 is not executed until the corresponding winning is achieved. It remains set to "1" for as long as possible. Then, the winning corresponding area corresponding to the bonus winning data set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the corresponding winning is achieved or when the clearing process of the main side RAM 74 is executed. Note that the winning corresponding area corresponding to winning data other than various bonus winning data is cleared to "0" even if no winning combination is won in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16).

Returning to the description of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), if an affirmative determination is made in step S509, if a negative determination is made in step S510, or if the process of step S513 is executed, the stop information for reel stop control is After executing the stop information first setting process for setting (step S514), a process for determining the content of the performance is executed (step S515). In the performance content determination processing, processing is executed to determine the general content of the performance to be performed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the current game. As for the content of the general framework, in the normal gaming state, high expectation content, medium expectation content, and low expectation content are set so that the expectation level for the bonus state or ART state to occur gradually decreases. ing. In the performance content determination process, the general content of the performance is determined by lottery using a lottery table that corresponds to the combination of the current game state, the current game section, and the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

Thereafter, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S516). In the transmission process, information corresponding to the general contents determined in the performance content determination process and, if the winning role has been won in the current role lottery process (Figure 16), the winning role. Information on the corresponding winning number and information corresponding to the current lottery mode and the current gaming state are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production-side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started. This is a command to make it recognized.

When receiving the game start command, the performance side MPU 92 grasps the general content of the performance in the current game from the game start command. Then, the performance side MPU 92 transmits the details of the performance in a manner corresponding to the grasped general content of the performance, the winning number information set in the game start command, the information corresponding to the current lottery mode, and the current situation. The decision is made based on information corresponding to the gaming state of the player. Then, a data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled, and the display of the image display device 63 is performed. Execute control.

After that, in step S517, the first control process for the game section is executed, in step S518, the bonus process at the start of the game is executed, in step S519, the add-on process is executed, and in step S520, the notification control process is executed. Execute. The contents of these processes will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (step S701). In the rotation start process, a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the previous game. If the wait time has not elapsed, wait until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main side RAM 74. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Moreover, the main side MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting up the lamps (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44 when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed. This will be notified to players, etc.

Thereafter, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S702). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S702 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. (Step S703). If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S702, and the process of step S702 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S704). The stop instruction command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which stop button 42 to 44 has been operated to generate a stop instruction. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S705 to S711 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is checked (step S705). Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Thereafter, based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S706).

In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a stopping mode in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. A stopping mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding for 1 symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 2 symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 3 symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 4 symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available, including a stopping mode in which the slide is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S706, a value between "0" and "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined (step S707). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stopped symbol are equal (step S708), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reel (step S709). After that, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S710). If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S711), and the process returns to step S702.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), and by using the stop information, , it becomes possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reached symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is derived while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. .

As a process for setting the above-mentioned stop information, a stop information first setting process is executed in step S514 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), and a process is executed in step S711 of the reel control process (FIG. 26). There is a second stop information setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the winning combination lottery process. The second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. do.

If it is determined in step S710 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S712. In the winning determination process, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data developed in the main side RAM 74, the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes a winning hand in the winning hand lottery process. It is determined whether or not it is a combination of corresponding symbols, and if it is a combination of symbols that corresponds to a winning combination, winning corresponding processing is executed as a winning of the winning combination has been established.

In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main side RAM 74 so that if the winning is a small prize winning, game media can be awarded in the media granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that a replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302).

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S713). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not a winning has been achieved this time, and if a winning has been achieved, data indicating the type of winning.

<About gaming status and gaming section>
Next, the game state and game period will be explained. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming states and gaming sections that exist in the slot machine 10.

In this slot machine 10, the gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a bonus internal state ST2, a BB state ST3, an RB state ST4, a false precursor state ST5, a real precursor state ST6, a chance state ST7, and a preparation state. ST8 and ART state ST9 exist. These gaming states ST1 to ST9 do not occur overlappingly with each other.

The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state that remains when the clearing process (step S104) of the main side RAM 74 is executed. In addition, if the transition to the preparation state ST8 does not occur when the BB state ST3 ends, if the transition to the preparation state ST8 does not occur when the RB state ST4 ends, and if the false precursor state ST5 ends, there is a chance If the transition to the preparation state ST8 does not occur when the state ST7 ends, and if the ART state ST9 ends without being triggered by a transition to the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4, the gaming state changes to the normal gaming state ST1. becomes. The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state that is less advantageous than the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9 in terms of the expected value of game media awarded in one game. The degree of advantage is approximately the same as that of the precursor state ST5, the actual precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7. Further, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the normal gaming state ST1. It should be noted that when the main side RAM 74 clearing process (step S104) is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered, which is the normal mode.

The bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state that remains when a bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved in a game in which any bonus winning data is set, and the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved. This is a gaming state that ends when . In the bonus internal state ST2, as already explained, the internal lottery table is referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). In this case, since the internal lottery table does not have a winning combination (that is, index value IV) that causes the lottery mode to shift, the lottery mode does not shift in the bonus internal state ST2. Since the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is the same as when the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) is referred to, it can be said that the bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained at the normal mode. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be higher than that in the normal mode, for example, it may be the same as the replay probability in the first RT mode, or the replay probability in the second RT mode may be the same. The replay probability may be the same as the replay probability, the replay probability between the normal mode and the first RT mode, or the replay probability between the first RT mode and the second RT mode. The replay probability may be higher than that in the second RT mode. Furthermore, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be lower than that in the normal mode.

The contents of BB state ST3 and RB state ST4 are as already explained. In the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4, no transition to the lottery mode occurs.

The false precursor state ST5 stays in the normal game state ST1 by becoming a transition winning in the lottery process for transition to the false precursor state ST5. The number of consecutive games in the false precursor state ST5 is determined by lottery in the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability for a short number of consecutive games is set higher than the winning probability for a long number of consecutive games. The false precursor state ST5 continues for the determined number of consecutive games unless a bonus combination is won, the transition to the real precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7 occurs.

In the false precursor state ST5, as the content of each game's performance on the image display device 63, a performance with a high degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 is likely to be executed. Furthermore, in the false omen state ST5, a flashier effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game in the false omen state ST5, an effect in which the same character is displayed or an effect according to a series of stories may be performed in a plurality of games. Then, an effect is displayed to make the player aware that the transition to the ART state ST9 will not occur in the final game. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the false omen state ST5.

This precursor state ST6 stays in the normal game state ST1 or false precursor state ST5 by becoming a transition winner in the lottery process to transition to the actual precursor state ST6, and when the present precursor state ST6 ends, it changes to the ART state ST9. A transition is made to a preparation state ST8, which is a pre-transition state. Furthermore, if a winning bonus combination occurs during the main precursor state ST6, the actual precursor state ST6 ends, but after the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination ends, the state shifts to the preparation state ST8. The number of consecutive games in this precursory state ST6 is determined by lottery in the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability for a long number of consecutive games is set higher than the winning probability for a short number of consecutive games. Further, the expected value of the number of consecutive games selected in the real precursor state ST6 is a longer number of games than the expected value of the number of consecutive games selected in the false precursor state ST5.

In this precursor state ST6, as the content of each game's performance on the image display device 63, a performance with a high degree of expectation for transition to the ART state ST9 is likely to be executed. The performance executed in this case is a performance that can also be performed in the false omen state ST5, but the performance in which the expectation level of transition to the ART state ST9 is higher is executed in the main omen state ST6 than in the false omen state ST5. easy. Furthermore, in the present precursor state ST6, a more flashy effect is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game in the present precursor state ST6, an effect in which the same character is displayed or an effect according to a series of stories may be performed in a plurality of games. Then, an effect is displayed to make the player aware that the transition to the ART state ST9 will occur in the final game. Due to the existence of the false precursor state ST5 and the real precursor state ST6 as described above, when the precursor effects corresponding to these precursor states ST5 and ST6 are executed, the player shifts to the ART state ST9. We expect that. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the present precursor state ST6. Note that the number of consecutive games in the present precursor state ST6 may be fixed to a predetermined plurality of games, such as 10 games, for example.

The chance state ST7 stays in the normal gaming state ST1 or the false omen state ST5 by becoming a transition winning in the lottery process for transitioning to the chance state ST7. The chance state ST7 is a gaming state that continues for five games, and if the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is a predetermined lottery result, the chance state ST7 is a game state that continues for five games, and if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) is a predetermined lottery result, the chance state ST7 is changed to the ART state ST9 with the winning probability corresponding to the lottery result. Execute transition lottery processing. If the transition to the ART state ST9 is successful, the transition to the preparation state ST8 is performed, which is the state before the transition to the ART state ST9. In this case, if you win the transition to ART state ST9 in the lottery process, even if the number of consecutive games in chance state ST7 has not been used up, you can prepare in the next game after the game in which you won the transition. A transition to state ST8 occurs. Furthermore, if a bonus winning combination occurs during the chance state ST7, the chance state ST7 ends.

In the chance state ST7, an effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is executed as the effect content of each game on the image display device 63. Then, in the game that has won the transition in the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9, an effect indicating that the transition has been won is performed. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the chance state ST7. Note that the number of consecutive games in the chance state ST7 may be determined by lottery from among a plurality of types of number of games.

The preparation state ST8 is a gaming state that remains as a pre-stage before moving to the ART state ST9, and can be moved from the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, the main precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the preparation state ST8. In the preparation state ST8, when the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the establishment of the first bell prize is announced. Then, when the first bell is won, "11" game media are awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game in the preparation state ST8. In addition, in the preparation state ST8, if the winning numbers "17" to "22" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize is announced, and the winning numbers "23" to "22" are announced. When the winning number "28" is set, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay prize is announced, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize is notified. When the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST8 and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, the gaming state shifts to the ART state ST9. In addition, a transition to the preparation state ST8 may occur in a situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode, but in this case, the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode, and then a transition to the second RT mode occurs. In this case, the state shifts to ART state ST9.

As described above, the ART state ST9 is a gaming state that is entered when the second RT replay winning is established in the preparation state ST8. The ART state ST9 ends when the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 becomes "0". In this case, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. Further, if the bonus is won during the ART state ST9, the state shifts to the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, or RB state ST4. In this case, after the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 ends, the state shifts to the preparation state ST8, and finally returns to the ART state ST9.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the ART state ST9. In the ART state ST9, when a winning number of "1" to "3" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell is announced. Then, when the first bell is won, "11" game media are awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game in the ART state ST9. In addition, in the ART state ST9, if the winning numbers "17" to "22" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize is announced, and the winning numbers "23" to "22" are announced. When the winning number "28" is set, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay prize is announced, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize will be announced, and if the winning numbers from "35" to "40" are set, the second falling replay prize will be won. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of is notified. As a result, the lottery mode is basically maintained at the second RT mode in the ART state ST9. The second RT mode is a mode in which the replay probability is higher than the normal mode and the first RT mode. In other words, the ART state ST9 is a gaming state in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is notified, and is basically a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected net increase in gaming media in the ART state ST9. Note that even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST9, the ART state ST9 is maintained and the ART state is maintained even if the situation is not the second RT mode. The remaining number of consecutive games in ST9 is subtracted.

In the configuration in which various gaming states ST1 to ST9 exist as described above, a gaming section is set apart from these gaming states ST1 to ST9. A normal section SC1 and an advantageous section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the elements that determine the gaming situation are the set values "1" to "6", the lottery modes of normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, and various gaming states ST1 to ST9. There are two game sections: a normal section SC1 and an advantageous section SC2.

The normal section SC1 refers to the normal section SC1 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to achieve a win that is advantageous to the player when winning a winning combination that is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a section in which the stopping order is not announced, and the probability that the transition condition to the ART state ST9, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, will be satisfied is lower than in the advantageous section SC2. More specifically, the conditions for transition to the ART state ST9 are not satisfied in the normal section SC1. When the main side RAM 74 clearing process (step S104) is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 and the normal mode become the normal section SC1. Furthermore, when the initialization process for advantageous section SC2 is executed in advantageous section SC2, it also becomes normal section SC1.

The advantageous section SC2 refers to a section of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables a player to achieve an advantageous win when winning a winning combination that is different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This section corresponds to at least one of the section where the stop order is announced and the section where the probability of transition to the ART state ST9, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is higher than the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 is a reel 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of a prize with the largest number of game media awarded among the winning types included in the winning combinations, which vary depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R continues reliably until it is executed at least once. Specifically, the advantageous section SC2 is the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on which the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16), making it possible to win the first bell. The notification of the stop order continues reliably until the notification of the stop order is executed at least once. In addition, the minimum termination condition will be satisfied if the notification of the stop order is executed at least once, and the minimum termination condition will be satisfied regardless of whether or not the first bell prize is actually achieved. do. Then, when the notification is executed at least once, the advantageous section SC2 is set according to the end condition determined according to the situation in which the advantageous section SC2 is set, and the number of consecutive games of the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games. The process continues until one of the conditions is met.

As shown in FIG. 27, the player can stay in the normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 in both the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the false precursor state ST5, the real precursor state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9 do not stay in the normal section SC1, but only in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, a specific processing configuration that makes it possible to set the gaming states ST1 to ST9 and gaming sections SC1 and SC2 as described above will be explained. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the first control process for the game section is executed in step S517 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). The process of step S517 is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the bonus internal state ST2, bonus state ST3, ST4, preparation state ST8, or ART state ST9 (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, the processes from step S802 onwards are executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The advantageous section flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is an advantageous section SC2, and when the advantageous section flag is set to "1", it is an advantageous section SC2. A case where the value of the section flag is "0" is the normal section SC1.

If the game section is the normal section SC1 (step S802: NO), the winning number "4", "6", "8", or "15" is selected in the lottery process for the current role (Fig. 16). It is determined whether it has been set (step S803). If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, a lottery process for moving to the advantageous section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the advantageous transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S804). In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that a winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of winning the transition to the advantageous section SC2. Incidentally, the advantageous transition table is the same regardless of the setting values of "1" to "6". The fact that the table is common regardless of the set value applies to all lottery processes other than the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). Furthermore, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S805). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the lottery process for transition to the advantageous section SC2, the random number written in the 14th latch register 103n is obtained from the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. In detail, as already explained, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b generates random numbers from "0" to "65535", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the process proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). At the timing when an affirmative determination is made, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b obtains the random number written in the fourteenth latch register 103n. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S805 with the advantageous transition table read out in step S804, it is determined whether or not the transition to the advantageous section SC2 has been won (step S806).

If the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is successful (step S806: YES), the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the value of the advantageous continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Then, the unreported flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S807). The advantageous continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section SC2. The unannounced flag is the reel 32L that, after moving to the advantageous section SC2, is set with the winning numbers "1" to "3" in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16), making it possible to establish the first bell prize. This flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R has already occurred.

As already explained, the first control process of the game section is executed at the start of the game. In this case, if the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won in the lottery process for moving to the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in the first control process of the relevant game section. As a result, a shift to the advantageous section SC2 occurs at the start of the game in which the player wins the shift to the advantageous section SC2. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the next game of the game in which the transfer to the advantageous section SC2 was won, and the game in which the transfer to the advantageous section SC2 was won. A configuration may also be adopted in which the shift to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in a game two or more games later than the previous one.

After setting the transition to the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state (step S808). As a result, the advantageous section display section 67 starts notifying that the vehicle is in the advantageous section SC2.

By entering the advantageous section SC2, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified. Here, the notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 29. Note that the notification control process is executed in step S520 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). The process of step S520 is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

In a situation where the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S901: YES), one of the winning numbers "1" to "3" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). (Step S902: YES), the following conditions are met: the gaming state is in the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9, and the unreported flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". (step S903 or step S904: YES), a process is executed to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the establishment of the first bell prize.

Specifically, first, a stopping order understanding process for winning the first bell is executed (step S905). In the stop order grasping process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 so that a display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66 (step S906). This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. Thereafter, a command for winning a bell is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S907). Information that enables the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize in the current game is set in the bell winning command.

Thereafter, the unreported flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S908). In this case, if the value of the unreported flag is already "0", that state is maintained, and if the value of the unreported flag is "1", it is changed to "0". This makes it possible for the main side MPU 72 to specify that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize has already been executed in the current advantageous section SC2.

In the notification control process, if any winning number from "17" to "28" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S909: YES), the gaming state is set to the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9. On the condition that (step S910: YES), a process is executed to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to achieve the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win.

Specifically, first, a process for understanding the stop order for promotion replay is executed (step S911). In the stop order grasping process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to achieve the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 so that a display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66 (step S912). This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. Thereafter, a command for promotion replay is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S913). The promotion replay command is set with information that allows the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize in the current game. be done.

In the notification control process, if any winning number from "29" to "40" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S914: YES), it is determined that the gaming state is the ART state ST9. As a condition (step S915: YES), a process is executed to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning from occurring.

Specifically, first, a stopping order grasping process for avoiding a fall replay is executed (step S916). In the stop order grasping process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 so that a display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66 (step S917). This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. Thereafter, a fall replay avoidance command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S918). The falling replay avoidance command includes a command to enable the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will make it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning in the current game. information is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if any winning number from "29" to "34" is set in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16) when the gaming state is the preparation state ST8, the first Processing is executed to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which makes it possible to avoid the formation of a falling replay winning. On the other hand, even if any winning number from "35" to "40" is set in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16) when the gaming state is in the preparation state ST8, the second falling replay prize is established. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows avoidance of this is not notified. Since the condition for transitioning from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 is that the second RT replay winning is established, if the transition to the preparation state ST8 occurs in the second RT mode, the establishment of the second fall replay winning is not avoided. This makes it possible to provide an opportunity to once fall to the first RT mode and win the second RT replay prize.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the notification process executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the notification process is repeatedly executed in the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

When a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1001: YES), an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the stop order command received this time Data necessary for displaying on the image display device 63 is set (step S1002). However, at this timing, images of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command are not displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in a measurement counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S1003). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating until they reach constant speed rotation, and is set to, for example, 0.5 milliseconds. The value set in the measurement counter is decremented each time the notification process is started.

In the notification processing, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the production side RAM 94 has elapsed (step S1004: YES), notification start processing is executed (step S1005). In the notification start process, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S1002. As a result, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8(a), for example. This display on the image display device 63 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game.

In the case of the above configuration, after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the dual-purpose display section 66, which is directly display-controlled by the main side MPU 72, the production side MPU 92 directly controls the display. A notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the image display device 63 whose display is controlled. As a result, when the image display device 63 is executing the notification regarding the winning combination, the dual-purpose display section 66 will surely execute the notification regarding the winning combination, and the reel being executed on the image display device 63 will be reliably notified. When confirming whether or not the notification corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R is due to fraudulent activity using the display contents of the dual-purpose display unit 66, the confirmation can be performed at any timing. It becomes possible.

Note that the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 end at the same or substantially the same timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 is completed, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66 is determined. The configuration may be such that the notification corresponding to the above ends, or the order may be reversed.

Returning to the explanation of the first control process of the game section (FIG. 28), if the advantageous section flag is set to "1" in a game before the current game (step S802: YES), or in the current game. If the advantageous section flag is set to "1" (step S807), it is determined whether the current gaming state is a chance state ST7 (step S809). If it is a chance state ST7 (step S809: YES), chance state processing is executed (step S810). The chance state processing will be explained later.

If it is not the chance state ST7 (step S809: NO), has any winning number from "4" to "8", "15", or "16" been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 16)? It is determined whether or not (step S811). If an affirmative determination is made in step S811, on the condition that the current gaming state is not the main precursor state ST6 (step S812: NO), the transition lottery process for the main precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and At least one transition lottery process among the transition lottery processes for the false precursor state is executed.

In detail, first, the transition lottery process for this precursor state will be explained. In the transfer lottery process, first, the main sign transfer table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S813). In this case, the main portent transition table is set so that the winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of winning the transition to the main portent state ST6. Furthermore, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S814). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the transition lottery process for this precursor state, the random number written in the fifteenth latch register 103o is obtained from the third dedicated random number circuit 102c. In detail, as already explained, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c generates random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the process proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). At the timing when an affirmative determination is made, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c obtains the random number written in the fifteenth latch register 103o. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S814 with the actual precursor transition table read in step S813, it is determined whether the transition to the actual precursor state ST6 has been won (step S815).

If the transition to the main sign state ST6 is won (step S815: YES), the main sign winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S816). The main sign winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the main sign state ST6 has been won at the start of the current game, and "1" is set in the main sign winning flag. If so, processing for transitioning to the main precursor state ST6 is executed at the end of the game. In other words, the gaming state will shift to the main precursor state ST6 in the next game after the game in which the transition to the main precursor state ST6 is won.

If the transition to the main precursor state ST6 has not been won (step S815: NO), a transition lottery process for the chance state is executed (step S817). Details of the transition lottery process for the chance state will be explained later. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won in the current game, or whether the current gaming state is the false omen state ST5 (step S818). If a negative determination is made in step S818, a transition lottery process for a false precursor state is executed (step S819).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing transition lottery processing for a false precursor state. In the transfer lottery process, first, the false omen transfer table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S1101). In this case, the false omen transition table is set so that the winning number with a higher probability of winning has a higher probability of becoming a winning transition to the false omen state ST5. Furthermore, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S1102). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the lottery process for transition to the false precursor state ST5, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is transferred to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the written random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, normal processing (Fig. ) Obtain the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S1102 with the false omen transition table read out in step S1101, it is determined whether the transition to the false omen state ST5 has been won (step S1103).

If the transition to the false precursor state ST5 is successful (step S1103: YES), the false precursor victory flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1104). The false omen winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the false omen state ST5 has been won at the start of the current game, and the false omen winning flag is set to "1". If so, processing for transitioning to the false omen state ST5 is executed at the end of the game. In other words, the gaming state will shift to the false precursor state ST5 in the next game after the game in which the transition to the false precursor state ST5 is won.

By executing each transition lottery process as described above, in the case of the actual precursor state ST6 or chance state ST7, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state, the transition lottery process for the actual precursor state, and the chance state None of the transfer lottery processing is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the false precursor state ST5, the real precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7 from being newly set in a situation where the actual precursor state ST6 or the chance state ST7 has already been started.

On the other hand, even in the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real precursor state and the transition lottery process for the chance state are executed. This makes it possible to prioritize a new transition to the actual precursor state ST6 or chance state ST7, which leads to a transition to the ART state ST9, over execution of the false precursor state ST5, which does not lead to a transition to the ART state ST9. .

If the false precursor state ST5 has already been set, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent a new false precursor state ST5 from being executed redundantly even though the false precursor state ST5 has already been executed.

If it is neither the false precursor state ST5, the real precursor state ST6, nor the chance state ST7, the execution priority of each transition lottery process is that the transition lottery process for the actual precursor state has the highest priority, and the transition lottery process for the chance state has the highest execution priority. The next highest value is set, and the transition lottery process for false precursor conditions is set the lowest. Further, in the case of the false precursor state ST5, the execution priority of the transition lottery process for the real precursor state is set higher than that of the transition lottery process for the chance state. This gives top priority to the transition to the main precursor state ST6, which will definitely cause the transition to the ART state ST9, and also changes the priority of the chance state ST7, which can cause the transition to the ART state ST9, to the ART state ST9. The priority can be set higher than that of the false precursor state ST5 in which no transition occurs.

In a game where any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", or "16" is set, if the transition lottery process for this precursor state does not result in a transition winning, the chance state The transition lottery process is executed, and if the transition lottery process for the chance state does not result in a transition winning, the transition lottery process for the false omen state is executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which any one of the false precursor state ST5, the real precursor state ST6, and the chance state ST7 is set.

Here, the lottery process to move to the advantageous section SC2 is executed when any winning number of "4", "6", "8", or "15" is set in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 16). be done. All of the winning numbers corresponding to these winning numbers have the same probability of winning within the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the lottery process for shifting to the advantageous section SC2 is executed in response to winning a winning combination in which there is no set difference in winning probability. This makes it possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the set values of "1" to "6" regarding the transition probability to the advantageous section SC2.

On the other hand, the transition lottery process for the real omen state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false omen state are the lottery processes for winning combinations (FIG. 16) such as "4" to "8", "15", This is executed when one of the winning numbers "16" is set. Among these winning numbers, "4", "6", "8", and "15" are winning probabilities that are the same among the set values of "1" to "6" as described above. These winning numbers are the same as the winning numbers that trigger the execution of the lottery process to move to the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, the transition lottery process to the advantageous section SC2 and at least one transition lottery process among the transition lottery process for the real precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false precursor state are the same. It may be executed in the game.

Among the above winning numbers, "5," "7," and "16" are combinations with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6." In other words, the transition lottery process for the real precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false precursor state are executed in response to winning a winning combination in which there is no set difference in winning probability. It is executed when a winning combination with a set difference in probabilities is won. As a result, with regard to the probability of transition to false precursor state ST5, the probability of transition to real precursor state ST6, and the probability of transition to chance state ST7, it is possible to have an advantage or disadvantage between the set values of "1" to "6". It becomes possible to

However, the transition lottery process for the real precursor state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false precursor state are executed on the condition that the game section is the advantageous section SC2. In other words, on the condition that the game is started in a situation where the advantageous section SC2 is already in place, or the game is a game that has been won to be transferred to the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery processing for the present precursor state and the transition lottery processing for the chance state are performed. And the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is executed. Therefore, for the transition to the advantageous section SC2, which is the preliminary stage for transitioning to the false precursor state ST5, the real precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7, the setting values between "1" and "6" are favorable or After transitioning to the advantageous section SC2, it is determined whether there is an advantage or disadvantage between the set values of "1" to "6" regarding the transition to the false precursor state ST5, the real precursor state ST6, or the chance state ST7 while avoiding any disadvantage. It becomes possible to make it possible for this to occur.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 when the game ends will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 32. Note that the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed in step S310 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). Since the process of step S310 is executed after the reel control process (step S308), it is executed after all of the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game.

First, bonus processing for controlling the transition and progress of the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is executed (step S1201). The bonus processing will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, on the condition that the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 are none (step S1202: NO), control processing for the lottery mode is executed (step S1203). In the lottery mode control process, if the first RT replay winning is achieved in the current game, the normal mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and if the second RT replay winning is achieved in the current game, the transition is made to the first RT mode. The mode is transferred from the 1st RT mode to the 2nd RT mode, and if the 1st fall replay winning is achieved in this game, the mode is transferred from the 1st RT mode to the normal mode, and the 2nd falling replay winning is achieved in this game. If so, the second RT mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

Thereafter, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S1204). Specifically, if the gaming state is one of the normal gaming state ST1, false precursor state ST5, real precursor state ST6, and chance state ST7, normal processing is executed (step S1205), and the gaming state is changed to the preparation state. If the gaming state is ST8, preparation state processing is executed (step S1206), and if the gaming state is ART state ST9, ART state processing is executed (step S1207). Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, or if any of the processes in steps S1205 to S1207 are executed, a second control process for the game section is executed (step S1208). In the second control process for the gaming section, when the conditions for transitioning from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 are satisfied, a process for transferring the gaming section to the normal section SC1 is executed.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the second control process of the game section. Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game has all stopped, the second control process in the game section is also performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. is executed after all rotations have stopped.

In steps S1301 to S1311, when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, a process for ending the advantageous section SC2 is executed. The contents of these processes will be explained in detail later.

If it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S1303: YES) and a negative determination is made in step S1306, the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 and the value of the advantageous maintenance counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether there is one (step S1312). The advantage maintenance counter is used to maintain the advantage section SC2 for the number of advantage maintenance games even after the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 when the ART state ST9 ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of games in which the advantage is maintained.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, it is determined whether the value of the unreported flag in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S1313). As already explained, the unannounced flag allows winning numbers "1" to "3" to be set in the hand lottery process (Figure 16) after moving to the advantageous section SC2, making it possible to win the first bell. This flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has already occurred. If the notification of the stop order has already occurred, the value of the unreported flag is "0".

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1313, an advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S1314). In the advantageous section initialization process, the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the initialization process of the advantageous section, even if you stay in any of the false precursor state ST5, real precursor state ST6, chance state ST7, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9, the continuation of those gaming states ST5 to ST9 The gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the gaming states ST5 to ST9, including a counter for storing the number of games. In addition, since the process of step S1314 is executed on the condition that the normal gaming state ST1 is established, the process of clearing the advantageous section flag to "0" is executed without executing the process of clearing the various data. Thereafter, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the off state (step S1315). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section on the advantageous section display section 67 is ended.

As already explained, when a transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs, a transition to a false precursor state ST5, a real precursor state ST6, or a chance state ST7 may occur. In this case, the advantageous section SC2 is terminated on the condition that the normal gaming state ST1 is present, so if the false precursor state ST5, real precursor state ST6, or chance state ST7 is present, it is possible to win the first bell. Even after the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed, the advantageous section SC2 is maintained.

Although details will be described later, when BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is started in advantageous section SC2, it is easier to shift to ART state ST9 than when BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is started in normal section SC1. In this case, as described above, if the false omen state ST5 is maintained in the advantageous section SC2, this effect is used to make the player expect that the false omen state ST5 may be the real omen state ST6. It is possible to set not only the state but also the state in which the degree of expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the false precursor state ST5.

Furthermore, even in the normal gaming state ST1, if the unreported flag is set to "1", the advantageous section SC2 is not ended. As a result, even if the false precursor state ST5 ends or the chance state ST7 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST9, the first bell prize is established after the advantageous section SC2 starts. The advantageous section SC2 will continue until the notification of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed once. If the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started while the advantageous section SC2 continues, the expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 increases. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to achieve the first bell prize in the false omen state ST5 or the chance state ST7 is announced, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

The processing of steps S1316 to S1322 in the second control processing of the game section is executed in a predetermined bonus internal state ST2. This process will be explained in detail later.

Here, the manner in which the transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the return to the normal section SC1 are performed will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 34. 34(a) shows a period in the normal section SC1, FIG. 34(b) shows a period in the advantageous section SC2, and FIG. 34(c) shows a period in which there is no setting difference in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). Figure 34(d) shows the timing of winning a role that triggers the execution of the various transfer lottery processes described above, and FIG. 34(e) shows the execution period of the real precursor state ST6, and FIG. 34(f) shows the execution period of the false precursor state ST5.

First, a case will be described in which a transition to the main precursor state ST6 also occurs in a game in which the game section has transitioned to the advantageous zone SC2.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), at the timing t1, which is the situation in the normal section SC1, the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is performed as "4", "6", " By setting either the winning number ``8'' or ``15'' (hereinafter also referred to as a trigger winning number with no setting difference), the lottery process for moving to the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the winning number is transferred. As a result, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b). Further, at the timing of t1, the transition lottery process for this precursor state is executed, triggered by the setting of the trigger winning number with no setting difference, and the transition winning occurs. As a result, the gaming state shifts to the main precursor state ST6 as shown in FIG. 34(e). That is, in the game where the game section has shifted to the advantageous section SC2, a shift to the main precursor state ST6 also occurs. When the state shifts to the main precursor state ST6, the state finally shifts to the ART state ST9.

Next, a case will be described in which a shift to false omen state ST5 occurs in a game after the game in which the game section has shifted to advantageous section SC2, and furthermore, when false omen state ST5 ends, advantageous section SC2 also ends. .

As shown in FIG. 34(a), at timing t2, which is the situation in the normal section SC1, as shown in FIG. 16" winning numbers (hereinafter also referred to as trigger winning numbers with setting differences). In this case, even if a trigger winning number that is in the normal section SC1 and has a setting difference is set, the lottery process for transitioning to the advantageous zone SC2 will not be executed, so the lottery process for transitioning to the false precursor state and the transition lottery process for the real precursor state will not be executed. Lottery processing is not executed. Note that the transition lottery process for the chance state is also not executed.

After that, at timing t3, a trigger winning number with no setting difference is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) as shown in FIG. By winning the transition in , the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b). However, at the timing of t3, although the transition lottery process for the false precursor state and the transition lottery process for the real precursor state are executed, a transition lottery process is not achieved in either of the transition lottery processes.

Thereafter, at timing t4, trigger winning numbers with setting differences are set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) as shown in FIG. 34(d). In this case, since the advantageous section SC2 has already been set, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state and the transition lottery process for the real precursor state are executed. Then, by winning the transition lottery in the transition lottery process for the false omen state, the state shifts to the false omen state ST5 as shown in FIG. 34(f).

After that, at timing t5, the remaining number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 becomes "0" and the termination condition of the false precursor state ST5 is satisfied, so that the false precursor state ST5 is activated as shown in FIG. 34(f). When the game ends, the game returns to the normal game state ST1. In this case, from the timing of t4 to the timing of t5, the winning number information of any one of "1" to "3" has already been set in the winning combination processing (Fig. 16), and the first bell prize is established. Since the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables this is reported, the unreported flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, when the condition for ending the false precursor state ST5 is satisfied at timing t5, the condition for ending the advantageous section SC2 is also satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b), the gaming section returns from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 at the timing t5.

Next, a case will be described in which a transition to the false precursor state ST5 occurs in a game in which the game section has transitioned to the advantageous region SC2, and the advantageous region SC2 ends in a game after the game in which the false precursor state ST5 has ended. .

As shown in FIG. 34(a), at timing t6, which is the situation in the normal section SC1, a trigger winning number with no setting difference is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) as shown in FIG. 34(c). As a result, the lottery process for moving to the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the winning is achieved. As a result, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the timing t6, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b). Further, at the timing of t6, the transition lottery process for the false omen state is executed, triggered by the setting of the trigger winning number with no setting difference, and a transition win occurs. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a false precursor state ST5 as shown in FIG. 34(f). In other words, in a game where the game section has shifted to the advantageous section SC2, a shift to the false omen state ST5 also occurs.

After that, at timing t7, the remaining number of continuous games in the false precursor state ST5 becomes "0" and the termination condition of the false precursor state ST5 is satisfied, so that the false precursor state ST5 is activated as shown in FIG. 34(f). When the game ends, the game returns to the normal game state ST1. However, since information on any of the winning numbers "1" to "3" has not been set in the winning combination processing (Figure 16) between timing t6 and timing t7, it is possible to win the first bell. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported, and the unreported flag in the main RAM 74 remains set to "1". Therefore, even if the conditions for ending the false precursor state ST5 are satisfied at the timing t7, the conditions for ending the advantageous section SC2 are not satisfied. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the advantageous section SC2 is maintained at timing t7.

After that, at timing t8, in the winning combination processing (FIG. 16), the winning number information of any one of "1" to "3" is set, and the reels 32L, 32M make it possible to win the first bell. , 32R, the unreported flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b), the gaming section returns from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 at the timing t8.

As described above, the advantageous section SC2 ends together with the game in which the false omen state ST5 ends, depending on the timing at which the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is executed. In some cases, the false precursor state ST5 ends in a later game than the game in which it ends. As a result, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the advantageous section SC2 ends, and it is also possible to make the player expect that the advantageous section SC2 will be maintained even if the false omen state ST5 ends. Become. Note that the advantageous section SC2 does not end before the false precursor state ST5 ends. Furthermore, regarding the chance state ST7, the advantageous section SC2 may end together with the game in which the chance state ST7 ends, or the advantageous section SC2 may end in a game after the game in which the chance state ST7 ends. be.

Next, a case will be described in which a transition to a false precursor state ST5 occurs in a game in which the game section has transitioned to an advantageous region SC2, and furthermore, a transition to a real precursor state ST6 occurs in the middle of the false precursor state ST5.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), at timing t9, which is the situation in the normal section SC1, a trigger winning number with no setting difference is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) as shown in FIG. 34(c). As a result, the lottery process for moving to the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the winning is achieved. As a result, the game section shifts from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the timing t9, as shown in FIGS. 34(a) and 34(b). Further, at the timing of t9, the transition lottery process for the false precursor state is executed, triggered by the setting of the trigger winning number with no setting difference, and the transition winning occurs. As a result, the gaming state shifts to a false precursor state ST5 as shown in FIG. 34(f). In other words, in the game where the game section has shifted to the advantageous section SC2, a shift to the false omen state ST5 also occurs.

After that, as shown in FIG. 34(f), at timing t10, when the false omen state ST5 continues, there is a setting difference in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) as shown in FIG. 34(d). The trigger winning number will be set. In this case, since it has already been set to the advantageous section SC2 and is in the false precursor state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real precursor state is executed. Then, by winning the transition in the transition lottery process for the actual precursor state, the false precursor state ST5 is terminated midway and the actual precursor state ST6 is newly created, as shown in FIGS. 34(e) and 34(f). will be started on. When transitioning to the main precursor state ST6, the transition to the ART state ST9 will finally occur.

As mentioned above, if a trigger winning number with a setting difference is set even during the false omen state ST5, a transition to the real omen state ST6 will occur, so the performance corresponding to the omen states ST5 and ST6 will be executed. Even in the middle of the game, the player expects to win the winning combination corresponding to the trigger winning number with a difference in setting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention level in a situation where the effects corresponding to the precursor states ST5 and ST6 are being executed.

<About execution control of effects in portent states ST5, ST6 and chance state ST7>
Next, execution control of effects in the precursor states ST5 and ST6 and the chance state ST7 will be explained. First, the transition lottery process for the chance state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. Note that the transition lottery process for the chance state is executed in step S817 in the first control process (FIG. 28) of the game section. Since the first control process of the game section is executed after the determination of the validity of the combination is completed at the start of the game, the transition lottery process for the chance state is also executed after the determination of the validity of the combination is completed at the start of the game. .

First, the chance transfer table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S1401). In this case, the chance transition table is set so that a winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of being won and transferred to the chance state ST7. Furthermore, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S1402). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the transition lottery process for the chance state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S1402 with the chance transition table read out in step S1401, it is determined whether the transition to chance state ST7 has been won (step S1403).

If the transition to the chance state ST7 is won (step S1403: YES), the chance winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1404). The chance win flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to chance state ST7 has been won at the start of the current game, and when the chance win flag is set to "1", At the end of the game, processing for transitioning to the chance state ST7 is executed. In other words, the gaming state will shift to chance state ST7 in the next game after the game in which the game is won.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 36. Note that the normal process is executed in step S1205 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). Since the corresponding processing at the end of a game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game, the normal processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game. executed.

If the chance winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1501: YES), it means that the transition to the chance state ST7 has been won at the start of the current game. In this case, transition setting processing for chance state ST7 is executed. Specifically, "5" is set in the chance state counter provided in the main RAM 74 as information on the number of consecutive games in the chance state ST7 (step S1502). The chance state counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to identify the chance state ST7 and the remaining number of consecutive games in the chance state ST7. Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the chance winning flag is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a chance start command indicating that chance state ST7 is to be started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1503). By receiving the chance start command, the presentation side MPU 92 causes the presentation corresponding to the chance state ST7 to be started.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the false precursor counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1504). The false precursor counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to identify the false precursor state ST5 and the number of remaining games in the false precursor state ST5. When the value of the false omen counter is 1 or more (step S1504: YES), an ending process for the false omen state ST5 is executed to terminate the false omen state ST5 (step S1505). Specifically, the value of the false precursor counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In other words, the chance state ST7 may be started even in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, and if the chance state ST7 is started in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is interrupted. Instead, it will be terminated even if it is in the middle.

When the transition to the chance state ST7 is made, an affirmative determination is made in step S809 in the first control process (FIG. 28) of the game section that is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of one game, and the chance state is returned. (step S810). FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the chance state processing.

First, in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), it is determined whether a winning number after "17" is set (step S1601). Which of the lottery table for normal mode (Figure 17), lottery table for 1st RT mode (Figure 19), and lottery table for 2nd RT mode (Figure 21) is set for winning numbers after "17"? Even if the replay winning data is usually set at least. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the ART lottery table for replay is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S1602). The ART lottery table for replay is the same for any winning number after "17", and is also the same for any set value from "1" to "6".

On the other hand, even if winning numbers after "17" are not set in the lottery process (Figure 16), any winning number from "4" to "8", "15", or "16" will be selected. If a number has been set (1603: YES), the ART lottery table corresponding to the winning number is read (step S1604). In this case, the ART lottery table is set so that a winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of becoming an ART winner. Further, this ART lottery table is common among the set values "1" to "6". Further, the probability of ART winning set in the ART lottery table corresponding to this winning number is set higher than the probability of ART winning set in the ART winning table for replay. Further, in both the replay ART winning table and the ART winning table corresponding to the winning number, the probability of an ART winning is set to be greater than 0% and less than 100%.

When the process of step S1602 or step S1604 is executed, random number acquisition process is executed (step S1605). The contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is obtained from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. In detail, as already explained, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the process proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). At the timing when an affirmative determination is made, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S1605 with the ART lottery table read out in step S1602 or step S1604, it is determined whether the transition to ART state ST9 has been won (step S1606).

If the transition to the ART state ST9 is successful (step S1606: YES), the ART election flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1607). The ART winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won at the start of the current game, and when the ART winning flag is set to "1", At the end of the game, a process for transitioning to the preparation state ST8 is executed. That is, in the game following the game in which the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won, the gaming state will shift to the preparation state ST8, which is the pre-stage to the ART state ST9.

As mentioned above, in the chance state ST7, if a winning number after "17" is set in the lottery process for the winning combination in each game (FIG. 16), or "4" to "8", "15", "16" If one of the winning numbers is set, a lottery process for transitioning to ART state ST9 is executed. Then, by winning the transition in the transition lottery process, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the ART state ST9 will pay attention to the chance state ST7, and will also expect the transition to the chance state ST7 in the normal gaming state ST1.

Returning to the explanation of the normal processing (FIG. 36), if the value of the chance state counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more and the gaming state is the chance state ST7 (step S1506: YES), the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is It is determined whether "1" is set (step S1507). If the ART winning flag is set to "1" (step S1507: YES), a preparation state setting process is executed (step S1508). In this setting process, both the ART winning flag and the chance state counter in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0". In addition, information in the main side RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1206 is executed in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). Thereafter, a preparation start command indicating that preparation state ST8 is to be started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1509). By receiving the preparation start command, the production side MPU 92 starts the production corresponding to the preparation state ST8.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (step S1507: NO), the value of the chance state counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1510). If the value of the chance state counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1511: YES), the chance state ST7 ends and the game returns to the normal gaming state ST1. In this case, a chance end command indicating that the chance state ST7 ends and returns to the normal gaming state ST1 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1512). By receiving the chance end command, the performance side MPU 92 starts a performance corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and return to the normal game state ST1.

If a negative determination is made in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the main sign winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1513). When the actual precursor winning flag is set to "1", it means that the transition to the actual precursor state ST6 has been won at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process for the main precursor state ST6 is executed. Specifically, this precursor counter setting process is executed (step S1514). The main precursor counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the main precursor state ST6 is present and the number of remaining consecutive games in the present precursor state ST6. In the setting process of the present precursor counter, the number of consecutive games of the present precursor state ST6 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the random number circuit designated by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of consecutive games selected by this lottery is between 5 and 10 games, and the winning probability for a long consecutive number of games is set higher than the winning probability for a short consecutive number of games. Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the present omen winning flag is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a main portent start command indicating that the main portent state ST6 has been started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1515). Information about the number of consecutive games of the present precursor state ST6 to be started this time is set in the present precursor start command. The performance side MPU 92 receives the present omen start command so that the effect corresponding to the present omen state ST6 is started.

Thereafter, on the condition that the value of the false omen counter is 1 or more (step S1516: YES), a termination process of the false omen state ST5 is executed to terminate the false omen state ST5 (step S1517). Specifically, the value of the false precursor counter in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In other words, the present precursor state ST6 may be started even in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, and if the present precursor state ST6 is started in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is interrupted. It will be terminated even if it is in the middle of the process.

When a negative determination is made in step S1513, the value of the main precursor counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1518: YES), and the value of the actual precursor counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1519). Then, if the value of the present precursor counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1520: YES), a preparation state setting process is executed (step S1521: YES). In this setting process, as already explained, both the ART winning flag and the chance state counter in the main side RAM 74 are cleared to "0", and the preparation state process of step S1206 is executed in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). The information in the main side RAM 74 is set so that the Thereafter, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is to be started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1522). By receiving the preparation start command, the production side MPU 92 starts the production corresponding to the preparation state ST8.

When a negative determination is made in step S1518, it is determined whether the false precursor winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1523). If the false omen winning flag is set to "1," it means that the transition to the false omen state ST5 has been won at the start of the current game. In this case, a transition setting process for the false precursor state ST5 is executed. Specifically, a false precursor counter setting process is executed (step S1524). The false precursor counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to identify the false precursor state ST5 and the number of remaining games in the false precursor state ST5. In the setting process of the false omen counter, the number of consecutive games of the false omen state ST5 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the random number circuit designated by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of consecutive games selected by this lottery is between 5 and 10 games, and the probability of winning for a short number of consecutive games is set higher than that for a long number of consecutive games. Note that when an affirmative determination is made in step S1523, the false omen winning flag is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a false omen start command indicating that the false omen state ST5 has been started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1525). Information on the number of consecutive games of the false omen state ST5 to be started this time is set in the false omen start command. By receiving the false omen start command, the production side MPU 92 causes the production corresponding to the false omen state ST5 to be started.

If a negative determination is made in step S1523, the value of the false precursor counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1527), provided that the value of the false precursor counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1526: YES). The main MPU 72 specifies that the gaming state is a false precursor state ST5 when the value of the false precursor counter is 1 or more, and when the value of the false precursor counter after subtracting 1 becomes "0", it is a false precursor. It is specified that state ST5 has ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1526, the value of the advantage keeping counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1528: YES), and the value of the advantage keeping counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1529). As already explained, when the ART state ST9 ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, the advantageous maintenance counter maintains the advantageous section SC2 for the number of advantageous maintenance games even after the transition to the normal gaming state ST1. This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of games in which the advantage is maintained. When the value of the advantage maintenance counter is 1 or more, the main side MPU 72 specifies that it is an advantage maintenance section, and when the value of the advantage maintenance counter after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the advantage maintenance section has ended. identify things.

Next, the normal performance control process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38. Note that the normal production control process is repeated at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the production side MPU 92 when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1, the false omen state ST5, the real omen state ST6, and the chance state ST7. executed.

First, it is determined whether or not the present precursor performance flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1701). The present precursor performance flag is a flag for specifying on the production side MPU 92 that the performance corresponding to the present precursor state ST6 is being executed. If the value of the present omen effect flag is "0" (step S1701: NO), it is determined whether or not the present omen start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1702). If the actual omen start command has been received (step S1702: YES), it is determined whether the false omen production flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1703). The false omen performance flag is a flag used by the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the performance corresponding to the false omen state ST5 is being executed.

If the false omen effect flag is not set to "1" (step S1703: NO), a start setting process for the actual omen effect is executed (step S1704). In the start setting process of the present omen effect, information about the number of consecutive games of the present omen state ST6 set in the present omen start command received this time is read. Then, the determination table for the actual precursor performances corresponding to the information on the number of consecutive games is read out, and the content of the series of actual precursor performances in the current precursor state ST6 is determined by lottery using the determination table for the actual precursor performances. , the main omen performance table corresponding to the determined result is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The execution of the performance is controlled by the performance side MPU 92 according to the main omen effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the main omen effect.

Although the details will be described later, in the main MPU 72, although the gaming state is not in the chance state ST7, a chance performance corresponding to the chance state ST7 may be executed. If the main omen start command is received from the main side MPU 72 under such a situation, the start setting process of the main omen effect in step S1704 is executed, thereby ending the chance effect and starting the main omen effect. . In this case, the chance production flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0".

If the false omen effect flag is set to "1" (step S1703: YES), it means that the real omen state ST6 is started in the middle of the false omen state ST5. In this case, an adjustment process for the omen effect is executed (step S1705). In the adjustment processing of the foreshadowing effect, a real omen effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 in order to execute the actual omen effect having continuity with the contents of the false omen effect at that time. to be memorized. In this case, the present precursor effect table corresponds to the information on the number of consecutive games of the present precursor state ST6 set in the present precursor start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the main omen production table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed with content that is continuous with the content of the false omen production that has been executed up to that point. This foreshadowing effect is executed on the display device 63. In addition, when the main omen performance is started in the middle of the false omen performance, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 display the number of games of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point and the actual omen performance that will be executed from now on. The precursor effect for the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

When the process of step S1704 or step S1705 is executed, the real omen effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the value of the false omen effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S1706).

If "1" is set in the present precursor effect flag (step S1701: YES), it is determined whether a preparation start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1707). The fact that the preparation start command has been received means that the present precursor state ST6 has ended and the state has shifted to the preparation state ST8. In this case, a preparation performance start setting process is executed (step S1708). In the preparation performance start setting process, a preparation performance table that enables execution of the preparation performance corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the preparation performance table, so that the preparation performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the game is in the preparation state ST8. Thereafter, the value of the present precursor effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1709).

If the preparation start command has not been received (step S1707: NO), update setting processing for this omen effect is executed (step S1710). In the update setting process, if the timing for updating the main omen effect is due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referenced in the main omen effect table that is currently being referenced is set for one game. Perform processing that changes depending on the new start. As a result, the content of execution of the main omen effect changes depending on the number of games in which the main omen effect continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S1702, it is determined whether the chance production flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1711). The chance performance flag is a flag used by the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the performance corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. If the value of the chance production flag is "0" (step S1711: NO), it is determined whether a chance start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1712). If the chance start command has been received (step S1712: YES), it is determined whether the false omen performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1713).

If the false omen effect flag is not set to "1" (step S1713: NO), a chance effect start setting process is executed (step S1714). In the chance performance start setting process, a chance performance table that enables execution of the chance performance corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. As already explained, the chance state ST7 continues for five games unless a transition to the ART state ST9 is won midway through. Therefore, data corresponding to a performance that continues for five games is set in the chance effect table. The chance performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the performance by the performance side MPU 92 according to the chance performance table. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the player is in the chance state ST7. Thereafter, the chance effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1715).

On the other hand, when the false omen performance flag is set to "1" (step S1713: YES), the chance standby flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1716). The chance standby flag is a flag used by the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the false omen performance corresponding to the false omen state ST5 is being executed and is waiting for the start of the chance performance. Here, in the main side MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is ended midway and the transition to the chance state ST7 is made. In contrast, even if the transition to chance state ST7 occurs during the false omen performance, the production side MPU 92 does not terminate the false omen production midway, and the main side MPU 72 performs control corresponding to the chance state ST7. Even if it is executed, the false omen continues. As a result, the transition to chance state ST7 is prioritized over the continuation of false omen state ST5 as a gaming state, thereby guaranteeing the player's benefit from the occurrence of chance state ST7, while providing a false omen performance as a performance. By continuing to do so, it is possible to prevent the contents of the performance from giving a sense of discomfort.

If the chance production flag is set to "1" (step S1711: YES), it is determined whether a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1717). The reception of the preparation start command means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won in the chance state ST7, and the transition to the preparation state ST8 has been achieved. In this case, a preparation performance start setting process is executed (step S1718). In the preparation performance start setting process, a preparation performance table that enables execution of the preparation performance corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the preparation performance table, so that the preparation performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the game is in the preparation state ST8.

If the preparation start command has not been received (step S1717: NO), it is determined whether the information to be referred to in the chance production table stored in the production side RAM 94 is information corresponding to the end timing of the chance production. By this, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the chance effect (step S1719). When the number of consecutive games is exhausted in chance state ST7, a chance end command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72, but when the production side MPU 92 grasps the end timing of the chance performance, it determines whether or not it has received the chance end command. not specified. Furthermore, even if a chance end command is received from the main MPU 72, if the information to be referred to in the chance production table is not information corresponding to the end timing of the chance production, it will not be determined that it is the end timing of the chance production. . As a result, if the execution of a chance performance is delayed because a false omen performance is being executed, the details will be described later, but the chance performance will be executed for 5 games, which is the number of consecutive games in chance state ST7. becomes possible.

If it is the end timing of the chance performance (step S1719: YES), a chance performance end setting process is executed (step S1720). In the end setting process of the chance performance, the normal return performance table corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and return to the normal gaming state ST1 and the normal performance table corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 are read from the performance side ROM 93 and the performance is performed. It is stored in the side RAM 94. By controlling the performance execution in the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 correspond to the end of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal gaming state ST1. After the normal return effect is executed, the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the chance state ST7 has ended and the normal gaming state ST1 has returned.

When the process of step S1718 or step S1720 is executed, the value of the chance production flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1721). Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S1719, update setting processing of the chance effect is executed (step S1722). In the update setting process, if the chance production is updated due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referenced in the chance production table that is currently being referenced is changed to the new one game. Execute a process that changes depending on the start. As a result, the execution content of the chance performance changes depending on the number of consecutive games of the chance performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1712, or if the process in step S1716 is executed, a production control process for a false precursor state is executed (step S1723). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the production control process for the false omen state.

If the false omen production flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether a false omen start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S1802). If a false omen start command has been received (step S1802: YES), a false omen performance start setting process is executed (step S1803). In the false omen performance start setting process, information about the number of consecutive games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time is read. Then, the determination table for false omen performances corresponding to the information on the number of consecutive games is read out, and the contents of a series of false omen performances in the current false omen state ST5 are determined by lottery using the determination table for false omen performances. , the false omen performance table corresponding to the determined result is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The execution of the performance is controlled by the performance side MPU 92 according to the false omen performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the false omen performance. Thereafter, the false omen performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1804).

If the false omen effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), the information to be referred to in the false omen effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 is set at the end timing of the false omen effect. By determining whether it is the corresponding information, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the false omen effect (step S1805). If it is the end timing of the false omen performance (step S1805: YES), the state where the start of the chance performance is on standby by determining whether or not the chance standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S1806).

When the chance standby flag is set to "1" (step S1806: YES), a chance production start setting process is executed (step S1807). In the chance performance start setting process, a chance performance table that enables execution of the chance performance corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The chance performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the performance by the performance side MPU 92 according to the chance performance table. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the player is in the chance state ST7.

Even if the chance performance start setting process is triggered by the chance standby flag being set to "1", the chance performance start setting is executed immediately when a chance start command is received from the main MPU 72. Similarly to the process, a chance production table is used in which data corresponding to a chance production that continues for five games, which is the number of consecutive games in the chance state ST7, is set. As already explained, in a situation where a chance production is being executed, unless the information to be referred to in the chance production table is information corresponding to the end timing of the chance production, a chance end command is received from the main MPU 72. Even so, the chance production will not end. As a result, the chance state ST7 occurs while the false omen effect is being executed, and the chance effect is put on standby until the false omen effect ends, and if the chance effect is started after the false omen effect ends, Even if the chance state ST7 continues for 5 games, the chance effect is executed for 5 games, which is the number of consecutive games in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the chance state ST7 continues for 5 games. Become.

Thereafter, the chance standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0", the chance performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the false omen performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1808).

If it is the end timing of the false omen production and the chance standby flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S1805: YES, step S1806: NO), whether a false omen start command has been received from the main side MPU 72. It is determined whether or not (step S1809). As already explained, in the main side MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false omen state ST5, the false omen state ST5 is ended and the chance state ST7 is started. The MPU 92 continues the false omen effect. In this case, for example, after the first false omen state ST5 is determined to continue for 10 games, the chance state ST7 becomes after one game, and furthermore, if the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won in the chance state ST7, the production When the side MPU 92 executes the seventh game of the false omen performance, the gaming state of the main side MPU 72 is neither the false omen state ST5 nor the chance state ST7, but the normal gaming state ST1. Then, when the main side MPU 72 decides to move to the false omen state ST5 under the above situation, the performance side MPU 92 will receive a new false omen start command in the situation where the false omen effect is being executed. .

If the false omen start command has not been received (step S1809: NO), a false omen performance end setting process is executed (step S1810). In the end setting process of the false omen effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false omen state ST5 and return to the normal gaming state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 are read from the effect side ROM 93. and is stored in the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the performance execution in the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 end the false omen state ST5 and return to the normal gaming state ST1. After the corresponding normal return performance is executed, the normal performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the precursory performance has ended and the game has returned to the normal gaming state ST1.

If a false omen start command has been received (step S1809: YES), a false omen performance adjustment process is executed (step S1811). In the process of adjusting the false omen performance, a false omen performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 in order to execute a false omen performance having continuity of performance with respect to the contents of the false omen performance at that time, and the production side Store it in RAM94. In this case, the false omen effect table corresponds to the information on the number of consecutive games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the false omen performance table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed with content that has continuity with the content of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point. A false omen effect is executed on the display device 63. In addition, when a false omen performance is started in the middle of a false omen performance, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 display the number of games of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point and the number of games of the false omen performance that will be executed from now on. The precursor effect for the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

If it is not the end timing of the false omen performance (step S1805: NO), it is determined whether the chance standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1812). If the chance standby flag is set to "1" (step S1812: YES), it is determined whether a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1813). As already explained, even if the production side MPU 92 is in a situation where the control for executing the false omen performance is being executed, a situation may occur in which the gaming state in the main side MPU 72 is the chance state ST7. In such a situation, the main side MPU 72 wins the transition lottery process from the chance state ST7 to the ART state ST9, so that even if a false omen performance is executed, the main side MPU 72 A preparation start command is sent to the production side MPU 92.

If a preparation start command has been received (step S1813: YES), a preparation production start setting process is executed (step S1814). In the preparation performance start setting process, a preparation performance table that enables execution of the preparation performance corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the preparation performance table, so that the preparation performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the game is in the preparation state ST8. In addition, if the start setting process for the preparation performance is executed in a situation where a false omen performance is being executed, the transition to ART state ST9 will be selected in a way that interrupts the series of stories of the false omen performance. The performance will be executed. Thereafter, the false omen performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" and the chance standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1815).

If the chance standby flag is set to "1" and a preparation start command has not been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1812: YES, step S1813: NO), a chance end command is received from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether or not (step S1816). When the number of consecutive games in the chance state ST7 controlled by the main side MPU 72 is exhausted in a situation where a false omen effect is being executed, from the main side MPU 72 in a situation where the chance standby flag is set to "1". Receive a chance end command. If the chance end command has been received (step S1816: YES), the chance standby flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1817).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1812 or if a negative determination is made in step S1816, it is determined whether a false omen start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1818). As already explained, in the main side MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false omen state ST5, the false omen state ST5 is ended and the chance state ST7 is started. The MPU 92 continues the false omen performance. In this case, for example, after the first false omen state ST5 is determined to continue for 10 games, the chance state ST7 becomes after one game, and furthermore, if the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won in the chance state ST7, the production When the side MPU 92 executes the seventh game of the false omen performance, the gaming state of the main side MPU 72 is neither the false omen state ST5 nor the chance state ST7, but the normal gaming state ST1. Then, when the main side MPU 72 decides to move to the false omen state ST5 under the above situation, the performance side MPU 92 will receive a new false omen start command in the situation where the false omen effect is being executed. .

If the false omen effect start command has not been received (step S1818: NO), a false omen effect update setting process is executed (step S1819). In the update setting process, if the false omen effect is updated due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referenced in the false omen effect table that is currently being referenced is set for one game. Perform processing that changes depending on the new start. As a result, the content of execution of the false omen effect changes depending on the number of consecutive games of the false omen effect.

If a false omen effect command has been received (step S1818: YES), a false omen effect adjustment process is executed (step S1820). In the process of adjusting the false omen performance, a false omen performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 in order to execute a false omen performance that has continuity of performance with respect to the contents of the false omen performance at that time, and the production side Store it in RAM94. In this case, the false omen effect table corresponds to the information on the number of consecutive games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the false omen performance table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed with content that has continuity with the content of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point. A false omen effect is executed on the display device 63. In addition, when a false omen performance is started in the middle of a false omen performance, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 display the number of games of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point and the number of games of the false omen performance that will be executed from now on. The precursor effect for the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

Next, how the false omen performance and chance performance are executed will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40. 40(a) shows the period of stay in the false precursor state ST5, FIG. 40(b) shows the period of stay in the chance state ST7, and FIG. 40(c) shows the period of stay in the preparation state ST8. FIG. 40(d) shows the period in which the false omen effect is being executed, FIG. 40(e) shows the period in which the chance effect is being executed, and FIG. Indicates the period during which the performance indicating that the winner has been won is being executed.

First, a case will be described in which a transition is made to a chance state ST7 in the middle of the false omen state ST5, but the chance state ST7 ends before the end of the false omen performance.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), at timing t1, the false omen state ST5 is started under the control of the main side MPU 72, and as shown in FIG. 40(d), the false omen effect is started under the control of the effect side MPU 92. will be started. Thereafter, at timing t2, as shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the gaming state shifts from the false omen state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72. However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance presentation will not start as shown in FIG. 40(e), and the false omen presentation will continue as shown in FIG. 40(d). be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 40(d), at timing t3, when the false omen performance is being executed, the number of consecutive games in chance state ST7 is exhausted, and as shown in FIG. 40(b), The chance state ST7 ends under control by the main MPU 72. Even in this case, since the number of consecutive games of the false omen effect set at the timing when the transition to the false omen state ST5 occurred at the timing t1 has not been exhausted, the false omen effect is not displayed as shown in FIG. 40(d). The omen performance continues. Thereafter, at timing t4, the number of consecutive games of the false omen effect is exhausted, and the false omen effect is ended as shown in FIG. 40(d).

Next, a case will be described in which the state transitions to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false omen state ST5 and the transition to the ART state ST9 is won while the false omen effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), at timing t5, the false omen state ST5 is started under the control of the main side MPU 72, and as shown in FIG. 40(d), the false omen effect is started under the control of the effect side MPU 92. will be started. Thereafter, at timing t6, as shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the gaming state shifts from the false omen state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72. However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance presentation will not start as shown in FIG. 40(e), and the false omen presentation will continue as shown in FIG. 40(d). be done.

Thereafter, at timing t7, a lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 is executed in the chance state ST7 under the control of the main side MPU 72, and a transition winning occurs in the transition lottery process. Therefore, at the timing t7, the gaming state shifts from the chance state ST7 to the preparation state ST8 under the control of the main side MPU 72, as shown in FIGS. 40(b) and 40(c). Further, at the timing of t7, the false omen performance is ended and the performance indicating that the ART state ST9 has been won is started, as shown in FIGS. 40(d) and 40(f). Then, the performance is executed until timing t8.

As described above, by suddenly performing a performance indicating that the ART state ST9 has been won during the false omen performance, it is possible to give surprise to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, a case will be described in which the chance state ST7 is entered in the middle of the false omen state ST5 and the chance performance continues to be started even at the timing when the false omen performance ends because the chance state ST7 is present.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), at timing t9, the false omen state ST5 is started under the control of the main side MPU 72, and as shown in FIG. 40(d), the false omen effect is started under the control of the effect side MPU 92. Begins. Thereafter, at timing t10, as shown in FIGS. 40(a) and 40(b), the gaming state shifts from the false omen state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72. However, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance presentation will not start as shown in FIG. 40(e), and the false omen presentation will continue as shown in FIG. 40(d). be done.

Thereafter, at timing t11, when the chance state ST7 is maintained under the control of the main MPU 72, the false omen performance is ended as shown in FIG. 40(d), and as shown in FIG. 40(e). The chance performance begins like this. In this case, at the timing of t11, the predetermined number of games have already been played since the transition to chance state ST7, so the remaining number of consecutive games in chance state ST7 is less than 5 games, which is the end standard number of games in chance state ST7. The number of games is also small. However, the number of consecutive games of the chance performance that starts at the timing t11 is set to 5 games, which is the end standard number of games of the chance state ST7.

Thereafter, at timing t12, the chance state ST7 ends as shown in FIG. 40(b). However, at the timing t12, there is still a number of games to continue the chance effect, so the chance effect is continued as shown in FIG. 40(e). Therefore, after the timing t12, even though the gaming state is not the chance state ST7, the chance effect is executed. Thereafter, at timing t13, the chance performance is ended as shown in FIG. 40(e).

Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 before and after the timing t11 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 41(a) and 41(b). FIG. 41(a) shows an image corresponding to a false omen effect being displayed on the image display device 63 at a timing before the timing t11, and FIG. It shows how the display device 63 starts displaying an image corresponding to a chance effect.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), in the false omen effect, a first character image G4 and a second character image G5 are displayed on the image display device 63, and these first character image G4 and second character image G5 are A video is displayed that appears to be a confrontation between the two. Note that this kind of video display that looks like a confrontation is also performed in this premonitory effect. In addition, if the foreshadowing effect ends without winning the transition to ART state ST9, a video is displayed in which the first character image G4 is finally defeated by the second character image G5, and the transition to ART state ST9 is performed. When the transition winning occurs and the portent effect ends, a moving image is displayed in which the first character image G4 finally wins over the second character image G5.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), in the chance performance, a suggestion image G6 indicating that the chance state ST7 is present is displayed on the image display device 63, and a game number image G7 indicating the remaining number of consecutive games of the chance performance. is displayed. In this case, if the chance production is started at the timing when the state shifts to chance state ST7 under the control of the main side MPU 72, and if the false omen production ends in the situation where the chance state ST7 is controlled by the main side MPU 72, In any case where the chance performance is started following the precursor performance, an image showing 5 games, which is the end standard number of games in the chance state ST7, is displayed as the number of games image G7. As a result, since the games in the chance state ST7 have already been played in the situation where the false omen performance is being executed, the number of remaining consecutive games in the chance state ST7 at the timing when the chance performance is started following the false omen performance. Even if the number of games is less than the end standard number of games, it is possible to make the player expect to be successful in transitioning to the ART state ST9 over the end standard number of games.

In addition, in chance state ST7, an opportunity is given to execute a lottery process to move to ART state ST9 in each game, and even if the chance state ST7 is in the middle of chance state ST7, if it is won to move to ART state ST9, A transition to the preparation state ST8 occurs. Therefore, when a chance performance is executed following a false omen performance, if the number of consecutive games of the chance performance is greater than the remaining number of consecutive games in the chance state ST7, even before the chance state ST7 ends. For example, transition to the preparation state ST8 may occur while the chance performance is being executed, and in a situation where the chance performance is being executed after the chance state ST7 has ended, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur in the chance state ST7. It becomes possible to make the player recognize that the transfer win has not been won.

<About processing related to bonus status>
Next, processing related to the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) will be explained. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the bonus process is executed in step S1201 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). The corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all stopped in one game, so the bonus process is also executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all stopped in one game. executed.

When the BB winning data corresponding to the BB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74 is established (step S1901: YES), the BB flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1902). The BB flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the state is in the BB state ST3.

If the BB winning achieved this time is the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning (step S1903: YES), the specific bonus flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1904). The 3rd BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 3rd BB winning is any of the normal mode lottery table (Figure 17), the 1st RT mode lottery table (Figure 19), and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (Figure 21). The index value IV is set to 7, and the 4th BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 4th BB winning is set to the index value IV=8 in any of these lottery tables. These index values IV=7 and 8 are set as combinations with the same probability of winning between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the specific bonus flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not a bonus winning with no difference in winning probability has been achieved. The details will be described later, but if a bonus winning with a difference in winning probability is achieved, the setting to shift the gaming section from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state will not be made. In this case, when a bonus winning is established in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability, a setting is made to shift the gaming section from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state.

On the other hand, if the RB winning data corresponding to the RB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74 is established (step S1905: YES), the RB flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906). The RB flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the RB state is ST4.

Furthermore, if the RB winning achieved this time is the first RB winning (step S1907: YES), the specific bonus flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1908). The 1st RB winning data that enables the establishment of the 1st RB winning is any of the normal mode lottery table (Figure 17), the 1st RT mode lottery table (Figure 19), and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (Figure 21). The index value IV is also set to 9. The index value IV=9 is set as a winning combination with the same probability of winning among the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, in order to specify on the main side MPU 72 that the current RB winning corresponds to the formation of a bonus winning where there is no setting difference in the winning probability, "1" is set in the specific bonus flag in step S1908. set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, if the process in step S1904 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1907, or if the process in step S1908 is executed, you win the bonus combination corresponding to the current bonus win. It is determined whether the gaming state at the time of this is the main precursor state ST6 (step S1909). The main precursor state ST6 is a gaming state in which the transition to the preparation state ST8 is determined when the number of consecutive games of the main precursor state ST6 is exhausted. Therefore, if it is in the main precursor state ST6 (step S1909: YES), the ART winning process is executed in order to shift to the preparation state ST8 after the current bonus state ends (step S1910). In the ART winning process, the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The ART winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that it is necessary to shift to the preparation state ST8 after the bonus state ends. In addition, in the ART winning process, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. By receiving the ART winning command, the production side MPU 92 causes a production indicating that the ART state ST9 will be entered after the current bonus state ends to be executed at the start of the current bonus state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1909 or if the process in step S1910 is executed, the total payout counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1911). The total payout counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the total number of game media given to the player in the bonus state. The main MPU 72 determines whether or not the conditions for ending the bonus state are satisfied based on the value of the total payout counter.

Thereafter, a bonus start command indicating that a bonus state is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1912). Information indicating whether the bonus state to be started this time is BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is set in the bonus start command. By receiving the bonus start command, the performance side MPU 92 starts the performance corresponding to the type of bonus state targeted for start this time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the main ending effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1913). The main side ending effect flag is a flag used by the main side MPU 72 to specify that an ending effect is being executed, which is started when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, although the details will be described later. be. If a negative determination is made in step S1913, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S1914).

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the start of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus process, the process waits in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this state where the start of a new game is on standby, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform a production corresponding to the start of the bonus state, thereby transitioning to the bonus state. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that this has occurred, and it also becomes possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction by emphasizing the transition to the bonus state. The standby state in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

If the BB flag or RB flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1915: YES), bonus state processing is executed (step S1916). The progress of the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is controlled in the bonus state process.

Next, the bonus process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 43. Incidentally, the bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S518 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). The process of step S518 is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

If this is the start game of the bonus state, which is the first game to be executed after transitioning to the bonus state (step S2001: YES), processes for the start game of the bonus state shown in steps S2002 to S2020 are executed. Specifically, by first determining whether or not the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1," it is determined whether or not the current bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. (Step S2002). If the advantageous section flag is set to "1" (step S2002: YES), a process for awarding the player with profits related to ART state ST9 from step S2006 onwards is executed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of starting the bonus state in the situation of advantageous section SC2.

As already explained, when the false omen state ST5 is reached, a false omen effect is executed, but the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the false omen state ST5 ends. However, in the case of false precursor state ST5, advantageous section SC2 is maintained. In this case, if the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2 as described above, the profit related to the ART state ST9 can be awarded to the player. This allows the false precursor state ST5 to function not only as a gaming state for making the player expect the real precursor state ST6, but also as a gaming state that is advantageous for the player by starting a bonus state. becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the performance of the precursor effect.

Even if the advantageous section flag is not set to "1" (step S2002: NO), if the specific bonus flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), the main side The advantageous section flag in the RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2004), and the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state (step S2005). The case where the specific bonus flag is set to "1" is the case where, as already explained, the current bonus state is triggered by a bonus combination in which there is no setting difference in winning probability. In other words, if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination with no difference in winning probability exists, even if the game section before entering the bonus state was the normal section SC1, the game in which the bonus state started In this case, the advantageous section SC2 will be set. Then, by setting the bonus state to the advantageous section SC2 in the game in which the bonus state has been started, the processing for granting the player the profit related to the ART state ST9 from step S2006 onwards is executed. Therefore, a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination for which there is no setting difference in the winning probability can be set as a more advantageous bonus state than a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination for which there is a setting difference in the winning probability. It becomes possible.

Here, the bonus winning combinations for which there is no difference in winning probability are the winning winnings for which the 3rd BB winning data is set (index value IV = 7) and the winning winnings for which the 4th BB winning data is set (index value IV = 8). However, if the bonus internal state ST2 is such that these 3rd BB winning data or 4th BB winning data are set in the advantageous section SC2, an opportunity is given to shift from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1. It will be done. Since the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly terminated when the number of continuous games reaches the upper limit number of games, the number of games played in situations other than ART state ST9 should not be counted as the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 as much as possible. preferable. In this case, if the bonus state is set in the starting game, if the situation is such that it will definitely be set in the advantageous section SC2, the system will be temporarily moved to the normal section SC1 before the bonus state starts. For example, when a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which there is no setting difference in winning probability is started in the false omen state ST5, a situation where the fake omen state ST5 is in the advantageous section SC2. It is possible to once clear the number of games played in , and then move to a new advantageous section SC2.

A processing configuration for producing this effect will be explained. In the second control process of the game section (FIG. 33), if the bonus internal state ST2 is set with the 3rd BB winning data or the 4th BB winning data (step S1316: YES), the gaming state where the winning data is set is set. It is determined whether or not is in the main precursor state ST6, the preparation state ST8, or the ART state ST9 (step S1317). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1317, the initialization process for advantageous section SC2 is not executed. When moving to the normal section SC1, the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed and the right to execute the ART state ST9 is also lost. In order to prevent the loss of the right, the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is not executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1317, it is determined whether information on any of the winning numbers "1" to "3" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S1318). These winning numbers are the winning numbers that will result in the first bell winning if the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the correct stopping order. In addition, in the bonus internal state ST2, even if the winning number information is set in the advantageous section SC2, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1318, it is determined whether or not the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the current game is a stopping order for dealing with falling (step S1319). The stop order for dealing with a fall is a stop order in which the first bell winning is not achieved, and is set as a different stop order for each of the winning numbers "1" to "3". Further, the stop order for dealing with falling is a stop order in which the stop order of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the first stop, second stop, and third stop is determined. By setting the stop order to prevent a fall in this way, if the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by the player coincidentally coincides with the stop order to prevent a fall, the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed. It becomes possible to make it so that Note that the stop order for responding to falls is not limited to the stop order of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the first stop, second stop, and third stop, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the first stop, It is also possible to have a configuration determined only by the types of 32M and 32R. Moreover, although the effect that suggests to the player that the advantageous section SC2 is temporarily ending due to the stopping order corresponding to a fall is not executed, it may be configured such that the effect is executed.

If the stop order is for fall prevention (step S1319: YES), the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed on the condition that the value of the unreported flag in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S1320: YES). At the same time (step S1321), the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the off state (step S1322). As a result, the game section will temporarily shift to the normal section SC1. In addition, even if you once move to the normal section SC1 in this way, if the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning is achieved and you move to the BB state ST3, the gaming section will definitely be advantageous in the first game of the BB state ST3. At the same time as the transition to section SC2, a benefit resulting from being in advantageous section SC2 is also given.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the player is informed of the stopping order in response to a fall. In this case, it becomes possible to actively cause the transition to the normal section SC1 in the above situation.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus processing at the start of the game (FIG. 43), if an affirmative determination is made in step S2002 or if the processing in step S2005 is executed, the current bonus state is in the normal gaming state ST1 and in the advantageous maintenance section. It is determined whether or not the bonus winning that triggered the start of is established (step S2006). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2007). In other words, if a bonus win is achieved in the advantage maintenance section in the normal gaming state ST1, the bonus state corresponding to the bonus win ends on the condition that the starting game of the bonus state is executed in the advantageous section SC2. After that, the state shifts to the preparation state ST8. As a result, the player expects a bonus win to be achieved in the advantageous maintenance section. Thereafter, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2008). By receiving the ART winning command, the production side MPU 92 causes a production indicating that the ART state ST9 will be entered after the current bonus state ends to be executed in the starting game of the bonus state.

If a negative determination is made in step S2006 or if the process in step S2008 is executed, the condition is that the gaming state at the time when the bonus combination that triggered the current bonus state was won is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9. (Step S2009: YES), or on the condition that the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (Step S2010: YES), to add on the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. Execute processing. As a process for the above-mentioned addition, first, the addition table at the start of the bonus is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S2011). The top-up table at the start of the bonus is the same regardless of the type of bonus state, but at least one of the probability of winning a top-up and the expected number of games for top-up winnings differs depending on the type of bonus state. It may also be a configuration. Additionally, the top-up table at the start of the bonus is the same between the setting values "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of winning the top-up and the expected number of games for top-up winnings differs depending on the set value. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2012). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the additional lottery process at the start of the bonus, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2012 with the bonus table at the start of the bonus read out in step S2011, it is determined whether or not the bonus win has been achieved (step S2013). Specifically, in the bonus table at the start of the bonus, a lottery result indicating that the number of bonus games is "0" is set, and there are multiple types of lottery results for the number of bonus games that are 1 or more games. It is set. In step S2013, it is determined whether any of the lottery results for the number of additional games of one or more games has been selected.

If the winning is achieved (step S2013: YES), an additional setting process is executed (step S2014). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main side RAM 74. Thereafter, an add-on command during the bonus indicating that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the performance side MPU 92 (step S2015). Information about the number of additional games that have occurred this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the add-on command during the bonus, the effect side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the currently selected number of add-on games has been awarded.

On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time when the bonus combination that triggered the current bonus state was won is neither the preparation state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1". (Steps S2009 and S2010: NO), a process for determining whether to transition to ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for determining whether to shift to the ART state ST9, the ART direct hit table is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S2016). The ART direct hit table is common regardless of the type of bonus state this time, but it may be configured such that the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 differs depending on the type of bonus state. In addition, although the ART direct hit table is common between the setting values "1" to "6", the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 may be different depending on the setting value. good.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2017). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is obtained from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. In detail, as already explained, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the process proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). At the timing when an affirmative determination is made, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2017 with the ART direct hit table read out in step S2016, it is determined whether the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won (step S2018).

If the transition to the ART state ST9 is won (step S2018: YES), the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2019). Thereafter, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2020). By receiving the ART winning command, the performance side MPU 92 causes a performance indicating that the ART state ST9 will be entered after the current bonus state ends to be executed in the starting game of the bonus state.

If a negative determination is made in step S2001, if a negative determination is made in step S2003, if a negative determination is made in step S2013, if the process of step S2015 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2018, or When the process of step S2020 is executed, the process at the start of the game during the bonus is executed (step S2021). In other words, in a game where the bonus state has started, even if the process of adding up the number of consecutive games in ART state ST9, the lottery process for transitioning to ART status ST9, or the process of transitioning to ART status ST9 is executed, the bonus The process at the start of the game is executed. Then, in the process at the start of the game during the bonus, an additional lottery process for the number of remaining consecutive games in the ART state ST9 or a lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is executed.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game during a bonus. In the process at the start of the game during the bonus, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", that is, whether the game section is the advantageous section SC2 (step S2101). If it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S2101: YES), it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger role has been won in the current game (step S2102). Specifically, it is determined that the lottery trigger combination has been won if the combination that allows the first watermelon prize to be won or the cherry prize to be achieved is won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the gaming state at the timing of winning the bonus combination that triggered the current bonus state is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2103: YES), or On the condition that the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2104: YES), processing for adding the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for the above-mentioned addition, first, the addition table in the bonus is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S2105). The top-up table in the bonus is the same regardless of the type of the current bonus state, but at least one of the probability of winning the top-up and the expected number of top-up games differs depending on the type of bonus state. You can also use it as In addition, the bonus table during the bonus is the same regardless of the type of lottery trigger that was won this time, but the probability of winning and the expected bonus game depending on the type of lottery trigger that was won this time. A configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the numbers is different. In addition, the bonus table in the bonus is common between the setting values "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of winning the bonus and the expected number of games to win the bonus differs depending on the setting value. A configuration may also be used.

Here, the top-up table during the bonus is set to have a lower probability of winning the top-up than the top-up table at the start of the bonus read out from the main side ROM 73 in step S2011 in the bonus processing at the start of the game (FIG. 43). At the same time, the expected number of additional games is low. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the number of remaining consecutive games in the ART state ST9 in the game in which the bonus state has started, compared to the second and subsequent games in the bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of an additional win and the expected number of additional games are the same or approximately the same between the additional table during the bonus and the additional table at the start of the bonus.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2106). The contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the additional lottery process during the bonus, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2106 with the bonus table in the bonus read out in step S2105, it is determined whether or not there is a bonus win (step S2107). Specifically, on the bonus table during the bonus, a lottery result indicating that the number of bonus games is "0" is set, and multiple types of lottery results for the number of bonus games that are 1 or more are set. has been done. In step S2107, it is determined whether any of the lottery results for the number of additional games of one or more games has been selected.

If the winning is achieved (step S2107: YES), an additional setting process is executed (step S2108). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main side RAM 74. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. Thereafter, an add-on command during the bonus indicating that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2109). Information about the number of additional games that occurred this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the add-on command during the bonus, the effect side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the currently selected number of add-on games has been awarded.

On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time when the bonus combination that triggered the current bonus state was won is neither the preparation state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1". (Steps S2103 and S2104: NO), a process for determining whether to transition to ART state ST9 is executed. As a process for determining whether or not to transition to the ART state ST9, first, the mid-bonus transition table is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S2110). The mid-bonus transition table is common regardless of the type of current bonus state, but it may be configured such that the probability of winning transition to ART state ST9 differs depending on the type of bonus state. Additionally, the mid-bonus transition table is the same regardless of the type of lottery trigger that was won this time, but the probability of winning a transition to ART state ST9 depends on the type of lottery trigger that was won this time. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the two are different. In addition, although the mid-bonus transition table is common between setting values "1" to "6", the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 may differ depending on the setting value. good.

Here, the transition table during the bonus has a lower probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 than the ART direct hit table read from the main ROM 73 in step S2016 in the bonus processing at the start of the game (FIG. 43). It is set. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation level of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the game in which the bonus state has started, compared to the second and subsequent games in the bonus state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may be configured to be the same or substantially the same between the mid-bonus transition table and the ART direct hit table.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2111). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is obtained from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. In detail, as already explained, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the process proceeds to step S304 of the normal process (FIG. 12). At the timing when an affirmative determination is made, the random number written in the 16th latch register 103p is acquired by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2111 with the mid-bonus transition table read out in step S2110, it is determined whether the transition to ART state ST9 has been won (step S2112).

If the transition to the ART state ST9 is successful (step S2112: YES), the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2113). Thereafter, an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2114). By receiving the ART winning command, the production side MPU 92 causes a production indicating that the ART state ST9 will be entered after the current bonus state ends to be executed in the current game.

Next, the bonus state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. Note that the bonus state process is executed in step S1916 in the bonus process (FIG. 42). Since the bonus processing is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game, the bonus state processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game. Ru.

If game media are awarded in the current game (step S2201: YES), a value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the total payout counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S2202). Then, it is determined whether the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state (step S2203). Specifically, when the current bonus state is BB state ST3, it is determined whether the number is equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (for example, "350"), and when the current bonus state is RB state ST4, It is determined whether or not the number is equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (for example, "150").

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the condition is that the gaming state at the time when the bonus combination that triggered the current bonus state was won is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2204: YES). , or on the condition that the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2205: YES), the preparation state setting process is executed (step S2206). In this setting process, the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, information in the main side RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1206 is executed in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). As a result, the gaming state after the end of the current bonus state becomes the preparation state ST8.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, or if the process in step S2206 is executed, a bonus end command indicating that the bonus state ends is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2207). Information indicating whether the gaming state after the end of the bonus state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the preparation state ST8 is set in the bonus end command. By receiving the bonus end command, the production side MPU 92 starts a production indicating that the bonus state ends, and after the production ends, a production corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the bonus state is started. Allow it to start.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the main ending effect flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2208). The main side ending effect flag is a flag used by the main side MPU 72 to specify that an ending effect is being executed, which is started when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, although the details will be described later. be. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2209).

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the end of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus state process, the process waits in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this state where the start of a new game is on standby, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a performance corresponding to the end of the bonus state, thereby indicating that the bonus state has ended. It becomes possible to make the player clearly aware of the The standby state in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

<About ART state ST9>
Next, the ART state ST9 will be explained. First, the preparation state processing executed in the preparation state ST8 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. Note that the preparation state process is executed in step S1206 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all stopped in one game, the preparation state processing is also executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all stopped in one game. executed.

First, it is determined whether a winning number of "4" to "8", "15", or "16" has been set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16) (step S2301). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, the immediate winning table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S2302). In this case, the direct bet table is set so that a winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of being a direct top win and a higher expected number of games. Note that the direct top table is common between the setting values "1" to "6", but depending on the setting value, at least one of the probability of a direct top win and the expected number of games to win may differ. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2303). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the direct lottery process, the random number written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is selected from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. get. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2303 with the direct top bet table read out in step S2302, it is determined whether a direct top win has been achieved (step S2304). Specifically, on the direct top-up table, a lottery result indicating that the number of top-up games is "0" game is set, and multiple types of lottery results for the number of top-up games that are one or more games are set. There is. In step S2304, it is determined whether any of the lottery results for the number of additional games of one or more games has been selected.

If it is a direct top-up win (step S2304: YES), a top-up setting process is executed (step S2305). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main side RAM 74. Thereafter, in the preparation state ST8, a preparation add-on command indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2306). Information about the number of additional games that have occurred this time is set in the additional command. By receiving the add-on command being prepared, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect indicating that the currently selected number of add-on games has been given.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, if a negative determination is made in step S2304, or if the process in step S2306 is executed, it is determined whether or not the second RT replay winning has been achieved in the current game (step S2307 ). If the second RT replay winning is established (step S2307: YES), this means that an opportunity to shift from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 has occurred, so the ART start process is executed (step S2308). In the ART start process, information in the main side RAM 74 is set so that the ART state process in step S1207 is executed in the game end response process (FIG. 32). As a result, the gaming state becomes the ART state ST9.

In addition, in the ART start process, if the gaming state before the preparation state ST8 is started is the bonus state and the gaming state immediately before the bonus state is the ART state ST9, it means that the state has returned to the ART state ST9. Therefore, settings are made to return to the gaming situation in the ART state ST9 immediately before transitioning to the bonus state. However, if an addition to the number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 occurs in the bonus state, the state returns to ART state ST9 from the state where the number of additional games has been added. In addition, in the ART start process, if the current preparation state ST8 is triggered by the transition to the ART state ST9 in the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, main precursor state ST6, or chance state ST7, , information of 50 games, which is the starting number of games in the ART state ST9, is added to the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 74. In this case, the gaming state before the preparation state ST8 is a bonus state, and in the bonus state, not only the winning to move to the ART state ST9 but also the additional winning for the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 has occurred. , the ART state ST9 is started in a state in which the number of consecutive games awarded is added to the additional winning. In addition, if an additional win for the number of remaining continuation games in ART state ST9 occurs in preparation state ST8, the number of continuation games awarded is added to the additional win and the number of continuation games remaining in ART state ST9 is added. will be started.

Thereafter, an ART start command indicating that transition to ART state ST9 has occurred is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2309). The ART start command is set with information indicating whether the current transition to ART state ST9 corresponds to returning to ART state ST9, and if it does not correspond to returning to ART state ST9, the ART state is changed. Information indicating that 50 games have been assigned as the starting number of games for ST9 is set. By receiving the ART start command, the production side MPU 92 causes a production indicating that ART state ST9 has been started to be executed, and after the production ends, a production corresponding to ART state ST9 is executed. do it like this. Furthermore, when the ART state ST9 is to be returned, the performance side MPU 92 restarts the performance execution state at the timing at which the previous ART state ST9 ended midway.

FIG. 47(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74 used by the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST9. As shown in FIG. 47(a), the main side RAM 74 is provided with an ART game number counter 121 and a B loop continuation counter 122. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. The B-loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games in which a B-loop (to be described later) continues, in which the number of continuation games in the ART state ST9 is added to each game.

FIG. 47(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the performance side RAM 94 used by the performance side MPU 92 in the ART state ST9. As shown in FIG. 47(b), the performance side RAM 94 is provided with an ART subtraction target counter 125, a display counter 126, a stock game number counter 127, and a special additional performance stock area 128.

The ART subtraction target counter 125 is a counter that is subtracted by 1 by the production side MPU 92 every time one game is executed in the ART state ST9. When the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 becomes "0", an effect indicating whether or not the ART state ST9 ends is executed.

The display counter 126, like the ART subtraction target counter 125, is a counter that is decremented by 1 by the production side MPU 92 every time one game is executed in the ART state ST9. In the ART state ST9, the value set in the display counter 126 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

The stock game number counter 127 is a counter to which the difference between the actual number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9 and the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 is set. In other words, the stock game number counter 127 is a counter for specifying, on the performance side MPU 92, the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9, which has not been reported to the player but has actually been acquired.

The special additional effect stock area 128 contains information indicating that a special additional effect should be executed, which is an effect in which the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is added over multiple games, and the type of the special additional effect. This is an area for storing information.

Next, the additional processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. Note that the add-on process is executed in step S519 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16). The process of step S519 is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether the state is in the ART state ST9 (step S2401). If the state is not ART state ST9, processing from step S2402 onwards is not executed. As a result, the processing from step S2402 onwards will not be executed in gaming states other than the ART state ST9.

Here, for example, some BB winning data or RB winning data may be set during the ART state ST9, but in the bonus internal state ST2 where these bonus winning data are set, the processes from step S2402 onwards are executed. Not done. Furthermore, even if the bonus internal state ST2 is reached in the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section SC2 will remain in the advantageous section SC2 unless the conditions for transition to the normal section SC1 as described above are satisfied, and the advantageous section SC2 will remain in the advantageous section SC2 even in the subsequent bonus state. maintained. Further, if the transition is made to the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 during the ART state ST9, the processing from step S2402 onward is not executed, regardless of whether the transition is via the bonus internal state ST2. In this case, after the bonus state ends, the state returns to the ART state ST9 via the preparation state ST8, but if the state returns to the ART state ST9, the state of the ART state ST9 is interrupted midway through the ART state ST9. The situation will be the same as before. For example, if ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of A loop, which will be described later, the A loop will be restarted after returning to ART state ST9, and if ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of B loop, which will be described later, ART state ST9 will be restarted. After returning to state ST9, loop B is restarted. This also applies to the performance in the performance side MPU 92.

If the ART state is ST9 (step S2401: YES) and the processes of steps S2402 to S2405 are executed, the processes of step S2406 and subsequent steps are executed. In the processes after step S2406, as processes for determining whether or not to add on the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9, there is a direct top-up occurrence lottery process, an A-loop occurrence lottery process, and a B-loop occurrence lottery process. and execute. Direct top-up is a top-up mode in which a top-up occurs only in a game that is a top-top win in the lottery process for a top-up, and the number of top-up games is notified to the player. On the other hand, the A loop and the B loop are in an add-on state in which a fixed number of add-on games (specifically, 50 games) are given for each game while the winnings continue in the continuous lottery process. However, even if the number of additional games is awarded in loops A and B, the number of additional games will not be immediately notified to the player, and the number of additional games will be notified to the player only when the notification conditions are met. be done. Further, the A loop and the B loop have different conditions for transition to the add-on state, and also differ in the manner in which the number of add-on games is notified to the player.

In step S2406, it is determined whether any winning number from "4" to "8", "15", or "16" has been set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, a lottery process for the occurrence of a direct top-up is executed. Specifically, the immediate winning table corresponding to the winning number set in the current lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S2407). In this case, the direct bet table is set so that a winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of being a direct top win and a higher expected number of games. Note that the direct top table is common between the setting values "1" to "6", but depending on the setting value, at least one of the probability of a direct top win and the expected number of games to win may differ. It is also possible to have a configuration in which Further, the direct top table to be read in step S2407 is the same as the direct top table to be read in step S2302 in the preparation state process (FIG. 46).

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2408). The contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the direct lottery process, the random number written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is selected from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. get. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, normal processing (Fig. ) Obtain the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2408 with the direct top bet table read out in step S2407, it is determined whether or not a direct top win has been achieved (step S2409). Specifically, in the direct top-up table, a lottery result indicating that the number of top-up games is "0" game is set, and multiple types of lottery results for the number of top-up games that are one or more games are set. There is. In step S2409, it is determined whether any of the lottery results for the number of additional games of one or more games has been selected. The number of games selected in this case is set to 10 games, 20 games, 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games.

If it is a direct top-up win (step S2409: YES), a top-up setting process is executed (step S2410). In the add-on setting process, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main side RAM 74. Thereafter, a direct addition command indicating that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 has been added is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2411). Information on the number of additional games that have occurred this time is set in the immediate top-up command, and information on the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set. By receiving the direct top-up command, the performance-side MPU 92 causes a performance indicating that the currently selected number of top-up games has been given to be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S2409, or when the process in step S2411 is executed, by determining whether "1" is set in either the A loop flag or the B loop flag in the main side RAM 74. , it is determined whether the current state is in loop A or loop B (step S2412). If a negative determination is made in step S2412, an A-loop occurrence lottery process is executed. Specifically, first, the A-loop lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2413). The A-loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the current A-loop occurrence lottery process, and is common between the set values of "1" to "6". ing.

FIG. 49(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the A-loop lottery table. The A-loop lottery table contains the winning results, the selection results of the first continuous lottery table, the selection results of the second continuous lottery table, the selection results of the third continuous lottery table, and the selection results of the fourth continuous lottery table. A selection result exists. If any one of the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is selected in the A-loop occurrence lottery process, the A-loop occurrence is won. Further, in the A-loop lottery table, the selection rates of the first to fourth continuous lottery tables are the same, but the selection rate is not limited to this, and the selection rates may be different from each other. Note that the probability of winning the A loop may be different depending on the type of winning number that triggered the execution of the A loop lottery process. For example, the A-loop lottery table may be configured such that a winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of winning an A-loop. Furthermore, although the A-loop lottery table is common between the set values of "1" to "6", it may be configured such that the probability of winning the A-loop is different depending on the set value.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), the first to fourth continuation lottery tables are set with data that determines the continuation rate of the A loop according to the number of games in which the A loop continues. In this case, the setting manner of the continuation rate is different depending on the type of the first to fourth continuation lottery tables. Specifically, the continuation rate for the first game is set at 90% at the first continuation lottery table, 50% at the second continuation lottery table, and 30% at the third continuation lottery table. 10% is set in the fourth continuous lottery table. As the continuation rate for the second game, the first continuation lottery table is set at 10%, the second continuation lottery table is set at 20%, the third continuation lottery table is set at 30%, and the fourth continuation lottery table is set at 30%. The lottery table is set at 90%. As the continuation rate for the third game, the first continuation lottery table is set at 10%, the second continuation lottery table is set at 20%, the third continuation lottery table is set at 30%, and the fourth continuation lottery table is set at 30%. The lottery table is set at 30%. As for the continuation rate for the 4th to 10th games, the first continuation lottery table is set at 10%, the second continuation lottery table is set at 20%, and the third continuation lottery table is set at 30%. 10% is set in the fourth continuous lottery table. Then, when the A loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate of the 1st game is used again. In other words, the continuous lottery table to be used is used in a loop in each cycle with 10 games as one cycle.

Returning to the explanation of the add-on processing (FIG. 48), after reading the A-loop lottery table in step S2413, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2414). The contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the A-loop generation lottery process, a random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to a corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2414 with the A-loop lottery table read out in step S2413, it is determined whether or not the A-loop has been won (step S2415).

If the A-loop occurrence is determined (step S2415: YES), the A-loop flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2416). As a result, an additional amount due to the A loop will occur from the next game. Further, the continuous lottery table selected using the A-loop lottery table in step S2415 is stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S2417).

After that, addition processing of the ART game number counter 121 is executed (step S2418). In this addition process, "10" is added to the ART game number counter 121. As a result, if an A-loop occurs in a game where the number of remaining continuation games in ART state ST9 is "0", it is possible to continue ART state ST9 and generate an additional bonus due to A-loop. Become. Furthermore, 10 games is the number of games that can be selected even in the case of a direct win (step S2409: YES). As a result, if a 10-game add-on occurs due to an A-loop occurrence win, the player will not be able to distinguish whether it is due to a direct add-on or an A-loop occurrence win. becomes possible.

Thereafter, an A loop winning command indicating that the A loop has been won is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2419). The A-loop winning command includes not only information indicating that the A-loop was won, but also information indicating that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 has been added by "10" and the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. Information on the number of consecutive games is also set. By receiving the A-loop winning command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes an expectation presentation for making the player expect a special addition to the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2406, by determining whether "1" is set in either the A loop flag or the B loop flag in the main side RAM 74, the current state is in the A loop and B loop flag is set. It is determined whether it is in a loop (step S2420). If a negative determination is made in step S2420, it is determined whether the value of the cycle counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the cycle reference value (step S2421). The cycle counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the timing at which the B-loop occurrence lottery process is executed, and a new game is started in the ART state ST9 and neither the A-loop nor the B-loop. 1 is added when the occurrence lottery process of loop B is executed, and is cleared to "0". "100" is set as the cycle reference value. Therefore, when 100 or more games are played in the ART state ST9 and neither the A loop nor the B loop, the B loop occurrence lottery process will be executed.

Here, even if the value of the cycle counter becomes equal to or greater than the cycle reference value, when the occurrence lottery process of the direct top-up or the occurrence lottery process of the A loop is executed, the occurrence lottery process of the B loop is not executed. This makes it possible to suppress the number of lottery processes that occur repeatedly at the start of one game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 72.

If the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the cycle reference value (step S2421: YES), the B-loop occurrence lottery process from step S2423 onwards is executed. Also, even if the value of the cycle counter is not equal to or greater than the cycle reference value, even if the winning number "41" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S2422: YES). , executes the B-loop occurrence lottery process from step S2423 onwards. The winning number "41" corresponds to the index value IV=17 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 21), and only normal replay winning data is set for this combination.

In the B-loop occurrence lottery process, the B-loop lottery table is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S2423). The B-loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the B-loop occurrence lottery process, and is common between the set values of "1" to "6". ing.

FIG. 49(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the B loop lottery table. The B-loop lottery table contains the winning results, the selection results of the 5th continuous lottery table, the selection results of the 6th continuous lottery table, the selection results of the 7th continuous lottery table, and the selection results of the 8th continuous lottery table. A selection result exists. If any of the fifth to eighth continuous lottery tables is selected in the B-loop occurrence lottery process, the B-loop occurrence is won. In this case, the probability of winning the occurrence of loop B is set lower than the probability of winning the occurrence of loop A, but the probability of winning the occurrence of loop B is equal to or approximately the same as the probability of winning the occurrence of loop A. The configuration may be the same, or the configuration may be such that the probability of winning the B loop is set higher than the probability of winning the A loop. Further, in the B loop lottery table, the selection rates of the fifth to eighth consecutive lottery tables are the same, but the selection rate is not limited to this, and the selection rates may be different from each other.

Note that the probability of winning a B loop is different depending on whether the value of the cycle counter is equal to or greater than the cycle reference value or when the winning number "41" is set in the lottery process (Figure 16). A configuration may also be used. For example, the former may have a higher probability of winning the B loop than the latter, or the former may have a lower probability of winning the B loop than the latter. Furthermore, although the B loop lottery table is common between the set values "1" to "6", it may be configured such that the probability of winning the B loop is different depending on the set values.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables are set with data that determines the continuation rate of the B loop according to the number of games in which the B loop continues. In this case, the manner in which the continuation rate is set differs depending on the type of the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables. Specifically, the continuation rate for the first game is set to 10% in the fifth continuation lottery table, 100% in the sixth continuation lottery table, and 25% in the seventh continuation lottery table. 60% is set in the 8th continuous lottery table. The continuation rate for the second game is set at 90% in the 5th continuation lottery table, 50% in the 6th continuation lottery table, 80% in the 7th continuation lottery table, and 80% in the 8th continuation lottery table. The lottery table is set at 60%. The continuation rate for the 3rd game is set at 90% in the 5th continuation lottery table, 100% in the 6th continuation lottery table, 80% in the 7th continuation lottery table, and 80% in the 8th continuation lottery table. The lottery table is set at 60%. The continuation rate for the 4th to 10th games is set at 90% at the 5th continuation lottery table, 50% at the 6th continuation lottery table, and 80% at the 7th continuation lottery table. In the 8th continuous lottery table, 60% is set. Then, when the B loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate of the 1st game is used again. In other words, the continuous lottery table to be used is used in a loop in each cycle with 10 games as one cycle.

Returning to the explanation of the add-on processing (FIG. 48), after reading the B loop lottery table in step S2423, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2424). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the B-loop generation lottery process, a random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to a corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2424 with the B loop lottery table read out in step S2423, it is determined whether or not the B loop has been won (step S2425).

When the occurrence of B loop is determined (step S2425: YES), the B loop flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2426). As a result, an additional amount due to the B loop will occur from the next game. Further, the continuous lottery table selected using the B loop lottery table in step S2425 is stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S2427).

Thereafter, the addition process of the ART game number counter 121 is executed (step S2428). In this addition process, "10" is added to the ART game number counter 121. As a result, if a B loop occurs in a game where the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 is "0", it is possible to continue ART state ST9 and generate an additional bonus due to B loop. Become.

In step S2428, a direct top-up command corresponding to the top-up of 10 games is sent instead of a command indicating that the B loop has been won. In addition, information on the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter is also set in the direct top-up command. By receiving the direct top-up command, the presentation-side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the number of top-up games of 10 games has been given. On the other hand, the effect corresponding to winning the B loop is not executed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is internally increased in a situation that the player is not aware of. Incidentally, 10 games is the number of games that can be selected even in the case of a direct win (step S2409: YES). As a result, if a 10-game add-on occurs due to a B-loop occurrence win, the player will not be able to distinguish whether it is due to a direct add-on or a B-loop occurrence win. becomes possible.

Next, the A-loop processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50. The A-loop process is executed in step S2403 when the A-loop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the addition process (step S2402: YES). As already explained, since the add-on processing is executed after the determination of the validity of the combination is completed at the start of the game, the processing for the A loop is also executed after the determination of the validity of the combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, "50" is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the main side RAM 74 (step S2501). That is, in the A loop, every time one game is executed, 50 games are added to the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. Thereafter, an A-loop addition command indicating that an addition due to the A-loop has occurred is transmitted to the production-side MPU 92 (step S2502). Although the production side MPU 92 executes the process of adding up the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 by receiving the A-loop addition command, it does not execute the production corresponding to the reception of the A-loop addition command. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is added internally in a situation that the player is not aware of.

Thereafter, the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is grasped from the continuation lottery table to be used among the first to fourth continuation lottery tables stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S2503). Specifically, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a continuation rate pointer, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" in a situation where the A loop is started. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set for the first game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time. Further, each time one game is completed in the A loop, the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by one. Then, if the value of the continuation rate pointer is "2", the continuation rate set for the second game in the 1st to 4th continuation lottery table is the continuation rate to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is If it is "3", the continuation rate set for the third game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables is the continuation rate to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is "4" to "10". In either case, the continuation rate set after the fourth game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time. Further, if the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to the initial value "1". As a result, the continuous lottery table that is the target of use among the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is repeatedly used in a 10-game cycle.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2504). The contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the A-loop continuous lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2504 with the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate grasped in step S2503, it is determined whether a continuous winning has occurred (step S2505).

If it is a continuation win (step S2505: YES), 1 is added to the value of the continuation rate pointer (step S2506). If the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10" (step S2507: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value "1" (step S2508). As a result, the continuous lottery table that is the target of use among the first to fourth continuous lottery tables is repeatedly used in a 10-game period.

On the other hand, if the winning is not continued (step S2505: NO), the A loop flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2509). This ends the A loop. Thereafter, an A-loop end command indicating that the A-loop has ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2510). The production side MPU 92 receives the A-loop end command and executes processing corresponding to the end of the A-loop.

As described above, in the A-loop, each time one game is executed, the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is added by 50 games, and the continuous lottery process of the A-loop is executed. The continuation rate of this A continuation lottery process is determined as a scenario according to the number of consecutive games in the A loop in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables. Then, the A loop will be continued while the continuous lottery process of the A loop results in a continuous winning. This makes it possible to greatly increase the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 by forming the A loop.

Next, the B-loop processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51. The B-loop process is executed in step S2405 when the B-loop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the addition process (step S2404: YES). As already explained, since the add-on process is executed after the determination of the validity of the combination is completed at the start of the game, the process for the B loop is also executed after the determination of the validity of the combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, "50" is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the main side RAM 74 (step S2601). That is, in loop B, every time a game is executed, 50 games are added to the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9. This added number of games is the same as the number of games added to the number of continuous games in ART state ST9 every time a game is executed in the A loop. This makes it possible to make the advantageous degree the same for the number of games added to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the A loop and the B loop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games added to the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 for each game may be different between loops A and B, but may be configured to be substantially the same. The A loop may have a larger number of games than the B loop, or the B loop may have a larger number of games than the A loop.

Thereafter, the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S2602). As already explained, the B-loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games in which the B-loop continues.

Thereafter, a B loop addition command indicating that an addition due to the B loop has occurred is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2603). Although the production-side MPU 92 executes the process of adding up the value of the stock game number counter 127 of the production-side RAM 94 by receiving the B-loop addition command, it does not execute the production corresponding to the reception of the B-loop addition command. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is added internally in a situation that the player is not aware of.

Thereafter, the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is grasped from the continuation lottery table to be used among the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S2604). Specifically, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a continuation rate pointer, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" in a situation where the B loop is started. Note that the continuation rate pointer is also used in the A loop, but since the A loop and the B loop do not occur at the same time, there is no problem even if the continuation rate pointer is shared in the A loop and the B loop.

When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set for the first game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time. Further, each time one game is played in loop B, the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by one. Then, when the value of the continuation rate pointer is "2", the continuation rate set for the second game in the 5th to 8th continuation lottery table is the continuation rate to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is If it is "3", the continuation rate set for the third game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables is the continuation rate to be used this time, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is "4" to "10". In either case, the continuation rate set for the fourth game or later in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time. Further, if the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to the initial value "1". As a result, the continuous lottery table that is the target of use among the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2605). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the continuous lottery process of the B loop, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2605 with the continuous winning value corresponding to the continuation rate grasped in step S2604, it is determined whether a continuous winning has occurred (step S2606).

If it is a continuation win (step S2606: YES), 1 is added to the value of the continuation rate pointer (step S2607). If the value of the continuation rate pointer after adding 1 exceeds "10" (step S2608: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value "1" (step S2609). As a result, the continuous lottery table that is the target of use among the 5th to 8th continuous lottery tables is repeatedly used in 10 game cycles.

On the other hand, if the winning is not continued (step S2606: NO), the B loop flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2610). This ends the B loop.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 in the main side RAM 74 is 21 or more (step S2611). In other words, it is determined whether the B loop has continued for 21 games or more.

Here, in loop B, 50 games are added to the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 for each game, as already explained. Therefore, a situation in which the B loop continues for 21 games or more means that an additional number of consecutive games of 1050 games or more has occurred in the B loop. In the B-loop, even if an increase in the number of consecutive games occurs, the effect notifying that the increase has occurred is not performed each time, but in a situation where the B-loop continues for 21 or more games, the B-loop When the game ends, an effect is performed that notifies you of the additional number of games to continue.

In this case, by setting the condition that the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 or more as a condition for the performance to be performed, it becomes possible to notify the addition of 1000 games or more at once. . In other words, if 1000 games are added, it is enough for B loop to continue for 20 games, but the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 will be used up over the 20 games that B loop continues. Therefore, if the B loop is started in a situation where the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 is 10 games, the additional number of games in the B loop must be played from the 11th game of the B loop. occurs. In this case, since a part of the 1000 games has already been played before the 1000 game addition notification is executed, it becomes impossible to perform the effect of notifying the 1000 game addition. On the other hand, the condition for executing the performance that notifies the additions in the B loop at once is that the B loop continues for 21 games or more, so the number of games exceeding 20 games is Since the number of additional games that occur is greater than the number of games played in loop B, it is possible to guarantee notification of additional games of 1000 or more games.

When the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 is 21 or more, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main side RAM 74 is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2. (Specifically, 1500 games) is determined (step S2612). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2612, the processing in steps S2613 and S2614 is not executed, so that the effect of notifying the addition of 1000 games or more at once is not executed.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly terminated, and accordingly, even if the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 remains, the ART state remains ST9 is forcibly terminated. In this case, even though the number of games exceeds the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2, if an additional number of games remaining in the ART state ST9 is announced, including the number of games that exceed the maximum number of games, the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is announced. If the number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 reaches the maximum number of games, there is a risk of giving the player a strong impression that the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 has been forcibly invalidated. This impression becomes stronger as the number of remaining consecutive games increases. On the other hand, the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main side RAM 74 determines the upper limit of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, 1500 games). If the number exceeds 1,000 games, an effect that notifies the players of 1,000 games or more at once is not executed, thereby making it possible to prevent the player from feeling disadvantaged as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S2612, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2613). Further, a special freeze command indicating that a special freeze effect should be executed is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2614). The special freeze command includes information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop.

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 30 seconds) for the special freeze effect is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the B-loop process, the process waits in step S307 in the normal process (FIG. 12). As a result, even in a situation where a new game has started, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is on standby. In this state where the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited, the production side MPU 92 executes a special freeze production using the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in response to receiving the special freeze command. to be done. In the special freeze effect, an effect that notifies you of the additions of more than 1000 games at once is executed. In addition, since the special freeze command includes information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop, the production side MPU 92 calculates ("Number of games continued in the B loop" - ""Number of games continued in the B loop"). The value obtained by dividing the number of games played by the number of games (50 games) that will be added to the number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 for each game in loop B by the number of games played in ART state ST9 (50 games), rounded up to the nearest whole number'') x 1 in loop B For each game, the number of games (50 games) to be added to the number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 is derived, and the result of the derivation is notified. As a result, even if the number of games played in loop B is taken into account, it is possible to collectively notify the addition of more than 1000 games that have not been played.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2612, or if the process in step S2614 is executed, the B loop continuation counter 122 in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2615).

As described above, in the B loop, each time one game is executed, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is added by 50 games, and the continuous lottery process of the B loop is executed. The continuation rate of this continuation lottery process is determined as a scenario according to the number of consecutive games in the B loop in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables. Then, the B loop will be continued while the continuous lottery process of the B loop results in a continuous winning. Thereby, by entering the B loop, it becomes possible to significantly increase the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. Further, the number of games added in the B loop is notified to the player on the condition that the situation is such that an addition of 1000 games or more can be reported. This makes it possible to proactively provide impactful additional notifications that include more than 1,000 games.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 52. Note that the ART state process is executed in step S1207 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32). Since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game, the ART state process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game. executed.

First, the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2701). Then, on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S2702: YES), the ART termination process from step S2703 onwards is executed.

In the ART termination process, the ART state ST9 termination process is first executed (step S2703). In the termination process, data setting is performed to shift the gaming state from the ART state ST9 to the normal gaming state ST1. As a result, for example, in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 32), the normal process of step S1205 is executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is less than or equal to the number of continuable games (step S2704). The number of games that can be continued is set to 1200 games. In other words, it is determined whether or not the end timing of the ART state ST9 has come in a situation where the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is 1200 games or less, which is the number of consecutive games. The number of games that can be continued is set to be smaller than the upper limit of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2, and is also set to be smaller than the number of continuous games at which the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 starts. ing.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, the advantage maintenance lottery table is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S2705). The winning value corresponding to the advantageous maintenance winning is set in the advantageous maintenance lottery table. The advantage maintenance lottery table is the same regardless of the number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 that ends this time or the number of game media acquired in ART state ST9, but A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types are set so that selection targets differ depending on the number of media. For example, if the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is less than a predetermined number of games, an advantage maintenance lottery table with a higher probability of winning an advantage maintenance win may be selected compared to a case where the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is greater than a predetermined number of games. If the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9 is less than a predetermined number, an advantage maintenance lottery table with a higher probability of winning an advantage maintenance win may be selected compared to a case where the number is greater than a predetermined number. In this case, the smaller the profit obtained in the ART state ST9, the higher the probability that the advantageous section SC2 will be maintained after the end of the ART state ST9.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S2706). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the generation lottery process of the advantage maintenance section, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S2706 with the advantage maintenance lottery table read out in step S2705, it is determined whether or not an advantage maintenance win has been achieved (step S2707).

If the advantage maintenance win is achieved (step S2707: YES), a value (specifically, "10") corresponding to the number of advantage maintenance games is set in the advantage maintenance counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S2708). As a result, even after the ART state ST9 ends, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 until the number of advantageous maintenance games is played. Thereafter, an advantage maintenance command indicating that the process has moved to the advantage maintenance section is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2709). By receiving the advantage maintenance command, the production side MPU 92 causes the production corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9 to be executed, and also causes the production corresponding to the advantage maintenance section to be executed after the completion of the production. Make it.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, or if a negative determination is made in step S2707, an ART end command indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2710). Upon receiving the ART end command, the production side MPU 92 executes the production corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9, and also executes the production corresponding to the normal game state ST1 which is not in the advantageous maintenance section after the completion of the production. to be executed.

<About the performance in ART state ST9>
Next, the effect in the ART state ST9 will be explained. First, an outline of the effects that occur in the ART state ST9 will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53(a) shows the execution period of the A loop, FIG. 53(b) shows the execution period of the B loop, FIG. 53(c) shows the timing of occurrence of the direct override, and FIG. 53(d) shows the immediate override. 53(e) shows the execution period of the special additional effect, FIG. 53(f) shows the execution period of the special freeze effect, and FIG. 53(g) shows the execution period of the stock release effect. 53(h) shows the execution period of the ending effect.

At timing t1 in ART state ST9, as shown in FIG. 53(c), the number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 is directly increased in the main MPU 72. In this case, as shown in FIG. 53(d), the direct top performance is performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 from the timing t1 to the timing t2. In the direct top-up effect, a effect corresponding to the occurrence of the direct top-up of the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is executed, and at the same time, the image display device 63 displays an image showing the determined number of direct top-up games on the main side MPU 72. is displayed.

At timing t3 in the ART state ST9, the A loop is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 53(a). At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 53(e), although the special add-on effect is not executed, an expectation effect that makes the player expect the special add-on effect to occur is started on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Ru. The expected performance can be executed even in a situation where the special additional performance is not executed. When the expected performance is executed, the player expects that a special additional performance will occur afterwards. Thereafter, the expected performance ends at timing t4. In this case, even if the A loop is being continued in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 53(a), the A loop has occurred by the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. A special add-on performance corresponding to the number of add-on games is started. The special additional performance continues over a plurality of games, and the number of additional games corresponding to the execution of the current special additional performance is distributed and reported in each of the plurality of games. For example, if it is a special add-on effect that corresponds to an add-on of 100 games and continues over two games, an add-on of 50 games will be announced in each game.

Even in a situation where a special additional effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 53(e), at timing t5, as shown in FIG. Due to the occurrence of the direct top placement, the top lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the direct top effect from timing t5 to timing t6, as shown in FIG. 53(d).

As shown in FIG. 53(a), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends at timing t7. In this case, in a situation where the A-loop is being executed, it is decided to execute the special add-on effect a plurality of times according to the number of add-on games generated by the A-loop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(e), the special additional effect may continue to be executed even after the A loop ends. The special additional performance ends at timing t8.

At timing t9 in ART state ST9, loop B is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 53(b). At the timing of t9, the effect corresponding to the occurrence of the B loop is not executed. Even if the B loop is being executed as shown in FIG. 53(b), at timing t10, the main MPU 72 determines the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 53(c). When the direct top placement occurs, the top lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the direct top placement performance from timing t10 to timing t11, as shown in FIG. 53(d).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the B loop ends in the main MPU 72 at timing t12. In this case, the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 or more. Therefore, although one game has started in the main MPU 72, it is in a state of waiting for the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to start, and as shown in FIG. A special freeze effect is performed on the lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the special freeze performance, an additional number of games of 1000 or more is announced as an additional number of games to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

Thereafter, at timing t14, the number of continuous games on the performance side to be subtracted, which is measured by the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the performance side RAM 94, becomes "0". In this case, if the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 is set to a value of 1 or more, it means that there is a remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that is not subject to subtraction. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(g), the stock release effect corresponding to the continuation of the ART state ST9 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 from timing t14 to timing t15. Ru.

At timing t16 in ART state ST9, in a situation where the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 corresponds to the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of games in advantageous section SC2, the number of continuous games in advantageous section SC2 ends. This is the number of games that triggers the start of the production. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53(h), the ending effect is started on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 at the timing t16. Then, the ending effect continues until the timing t17 when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

Hereinafter, processing contents in the performance side MPU 92 to enable execution of various performances as described above will be explained. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the non-normal performance control process executed by the performance side MPU 92. Note that the performance control process for non-normal use is performed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the performance side MPU 92 when the gaming state is the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9. ) is executed repeatedly.

When the ending effect command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2801: YES), the effect side ending effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2802). Then, when the ending effect flag on the effect side is set to "1" (step S2803: YES), the process for ending effect is executed (step S2804). The ending effect processing will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2803, it is determined whether an additional command being prepared has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2805). As already explained, the preparation command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when a direct top prize is won in the direct top lottery process in the preparation state ST8. If the add-on command being prepared is received (step S2805: YES), the current number of add-on games set in the add-on command being prepared is stored in the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the production side RAM 94, respectively. (step S2806). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the current number of additional games becomes a subtraction target after transitioning to ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the current number of additional games is added. After the resulting number of continued games moves to the ART state ST9, it is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

Thereafter, the additional effect setting process being prepared is executed (step S2807). In the additional performance setting process during preparation, an additional table is read from the performance side ROM 93 that enables execution of a performance indicating that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 has been increased in the preparation state ST8. The added table corresponds to the number of added games this time. The execution of the performance is controlled by the performance MPU 92 according to the above table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the direct top performance, and an image indicating the current number of top games is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 63.

As already explained, even in the bonus state, the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 may be increased. In this case, the main MPU 72 transmits an add-on command during the bonus. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the bonus command from the main MPU 72, in other performance processing (step S2820), it stores the current number of bonus games set in the bonus command in the performance-side RAM 94. It is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126. Further, an add-on table is read out which makes it possible to execute an effect indicating that an add-on to the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 has occurred in the bonus state. The said top-up table corresponds to the number of top-up games this time. The execution of the performance is controlled by the performance MPU 92 according to the above table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the direct top performance, and an image indicating the current number of top games is displayed. It is displayed on the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S2805, or if the process in step S2807 is executed, it is determined whether an ART start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2808). As already explained, the ART start command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the ART state ST9 is started. If an ART start command has been received (step S2808: YES), it is determined whether the current transition to ART state ST9 corresponds to a return to ART state ST9, based on the information set in the ART start command. (Step S2809).

If the return to ART state ST9 does not apply (step S2809: NO), the number of games to start (specifically, 50 games) corresponding to the new start of ART state ST9 set in the ART start command is stored in the production side RAM 94. is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S2810). In this case, if the number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 has not been increased in the bonus state and preparation state ST8 before ART state ST9 starts, the respective values of ART subtraction target counter 125 and display counter 126 is "50" corresponding to the number of games to start. On the other hand, if the number of remaining continuation games in ART state ST9 is added in the bonus state and preparation state ST8 before ART state ST9 starts, the number of games generated due to the addition is equal to the number of starting games. The added value is set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2809, or if the process in step S2810 is executed, an ART start effect setting process is executed (step S2811). In the ART start effect setting process, if this time is not a return to ART state ST9 but a new start of ART state ST9, an ART start effect table corresponding to the start of ART state ST9 and an ART corresponding to ART state ST9 are set. The medium performance table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. First, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART start performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the performance corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9. At the same time, after that, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the performance corresponding to the ART state ST9. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, in the ART start effect setting process, if this time is to return to the ART state ST9, data is set to return to the execution content of the effect immediately before the ART state ST9 was interrupted. Data for specifying the execution content of the destination performance is stored in the performance side RAM 94 when the ART state ST9 is interrupted. Then, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the performance table stored in the performance side RAM 94 according to the data setting for the return, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 The performance corresponding to ART state ST9 is restarted. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

If a negative determination is made in step S2808, or if the process in step S2811 is executed, a process for direct top effect is executed in step S2812, a process for A loop effect is executed in step S2813, and a process for A loop effect is executed in step S2814. B-loop effect processing is executed. These processes will be explained in detail later.

After that, when a game start command indicating a new start of one game is received from the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST9 (step S2815 and step S2816: YES), the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the production side RAM 94 is At the same time, the value of the display counter 126 of the performance side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1 (step S2817). If the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S2818: YES), the stock release process is executed (step S2819). The stock release process will be explained in detail later.

In addition, in the non-normal performance control process, other performance processes are executed in addition to the various processes described above (step S2820). In other performance processing, processing for controlling the execution of performance in the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, or preparation state ST8 is executed.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the direct top performance processing of step S2812 in the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 54).

First, it is determined whether a direct load command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2901). As already explained, the direct top placement command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when a direct top placement is won in the direct top placement lottery process in the ART state ST9 or when the B loop is set. In the direct top-up command, information on the number of top-up games that have occurred this time is set, as well as information on the number of consecutive games in the current advantageous section SC2.

If a direct top pick command is received (step S2901: YES), the number of consecutive games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the direct top pick command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the stock game number counter 127 It is determined whether the sum of the value of and the number of top-up games that occurred this time set in the direct top-up command exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically "1500") in the advantageous section SC2 ( Step S2902). In other words, even if the number of additional games that occurred this time is added to the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9, at least a part of the added number of additional games will be invalidated due to the relationship with the upper limit number of games in advantageous section SC2. Determine whether or not it will happen. As mentioned above, by referring not only to the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also to the value of the stock game number counter 127 and determining whether or not the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 has been exceeded, The remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 that is not subject to notification to the player (i.e., the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) is added to the notification and consumption of the remaining number of games that have occurred this time. It becomes possible to give priority to the number of games.

If a negative determination is made in step S2902, the number of additional games that have occurred this time is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S2903). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the current number of additional games is subject to subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, it is a continuation game resulting from the addition of the current number of additional games. The number is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, the sum of the number of consecutive games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the additional command received this time, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127. It is determined whether or not the number of games exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") in the advantageous section SC2 (step S2904). In other words, without adding up the number of additional games that have occurred this time, whether or not the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 will be exceeded by consuming the remaining number of consecutive games in the already granted ART state ST9. judge.

If a negative determination is made in step S2904, the sum of the number of consecutive games in the current advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127 is subtracted from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. The resulting number of games is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 as the number of additional games that have occurred this time (step S2905). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of additional games after this adjustment is subject to subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of additional games after this adjustment is added. The number of continued games as a result is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. By adding the number of additional games after this adjustment to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126, it becomes possible to add the number of games within the range of the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2.

When the process of step S2903 or step S2905 is executed, it is determined whether or not the special additional effect is currently being executed (step S2906). The special additional performance is a type of performance for notifying the player of the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. The special additional performance is, for example, a performance performed when the A loop occurs, and as already explained, a performance is performed as if the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is added over a plurality of games.

If the special add-on effect is not being executed (step S2906: NO), normal direct add-on effect setting processing is executed (step S2907). In the direct top-up effect setting process, a normal top-up table is created from the ROM 93 on the side of the effect, which makes it possible to execute the effect indicating that the addition of the number of games added this time to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 has occurred. It is read out and stored in the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the performance execution in the performance side MPU 92 according to the normal direct top table, the top lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the direct top effect, and the current number of top games is displayed. The image shown is displayed on the image display device 63.

If the special add-on effect is being executed (step S2906: YES), a direct-on-top effect setting process during the special add-on effect is executed (step S2908). In the direct top-up effect setting process, while continuing the special top-up effect currently being executed, an effect indicating that the number of games added this time has occurred to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 is executed. The direct top table during the special top-up performance that is made possible is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the direct top performance table during the special top performance, the top lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform the direct top performance in a situation where the special top performance is being performed. At the same time as the effect is executed, an image indicating the number of additional games for this time is displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, even in a situation where a special add-on effect is being performed, a direct add-on effect will be executed, so in a situation where a special add-on effect is being executed, the number of add-on games due to the execution of the special add-on effect will be reduced. It becomes possible for the player to expect not only the occurrence of the number of additional games but also the occurrence of the number of additional games based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination in each game.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the number of additional games that have occurred this time is not added to any of the ART subtraction target counter 125, the display counter 126, and the stock game number counter 127, and a direct additional effect is also executed. do not. This makes it possible to prevent the direct top-up performance from being executed if it is already determined that the number of games will exceed the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, the A-loop effect processing executed in step S2813 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56.

First, it is determined whether or not the expected performance by loop A is being executed (step S3001). The expected performance based on the A-loop is a performance that is executed before the special additional performance is executed, and continues for three games as the execution period of the expected performance. In the expected performance based on the A-loop, a performance is executed that allows the player to expect a special additional performance to occur in each game included in the execution period of this expected performance. By executing the expected performance using the A-loop in this way, it becomes possible to increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special additional performance.

Incidentally, even in a situation where the A-loop has not occurred and the special additional effect is not executed, the false expectation effect can be executed. When the expected performance by A-loop is started, an additional 10 games will be added based on the occurrence and winning of A-loop, and the false expected performance will be an additional 10 games, which is the same as the number of additional games. It is started following the execution of the direct top performance. Then, like the expected performance of loop A, this false expectation performance is continued for three games as the execution period of the expected performance, and in each game included in the execution period of this expected performance, it is also executed in the expected performance of loop A. The effect to be obtained is executed. By executing the false expected performance in this manner, when the expected performance is executed in the ART state ST9, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a special additional performance will be executed afterwards.

If the expected performance by loop A is not being executed (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether an A loop winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3002). As already explained, the A-loop winning command is transmitted from the main-side MPU 72 when the main-side MPU 72 shifts to the A-loop. If the A-loop winning command has been received (step S3002: YES), the number of consecutive games in the current advantageous section SC2 set in the A-loop winning command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the number of stock games. The sum of the value of the counter 127 and "10", which is the information on the number of additional games set in the A-loop winning command, exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, "1500") in the advantageous section SC2. It is determined whether there is one (step S3003).

In other words, even if the number of additional games at the time of A loop winning that occurred this time is added to the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9, at least the number of additional games added in relation to the upper limit number of games in advantageous section SC2 Determine whether or not a part will be invalidated. As mentioned above, by referring not only to the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also to the value of the stock game number counter 127 and determining whether or not the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 has been exceeded, The newly generated A-loop notifies the player of the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 (i.e., the number of games stored in the stock game counter 127) that is not subject to notification to the player. It is possible to give priority to the number of additional games at the start of the game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3003, even if the main side MPU 72 is executing the A loop, the expected performance by the A loop is not executed, and the special additional performance is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent an effect that will notify you of a further increase in the number of consecutive games to be executed, even though it has already been determined that the maximum number of games in the advantageous section SC2 will be exceeded. Become.

If a negative determination is made in step S3003, a start setting process for the expected performance is executed (step S3004). In the start setting process, the performance table is read out from the production side ROM 93, and the immediate table for winning the A loop is read out from the production side ROM 93, which makes it possible to execute a production indicating that 10 games, which is the number of supplementary games when the A loop is won, has occurred. Store it in RAM94. Further, the execution pattern of the expected performance to be executed this time is determined by lottery over the execution period of the expected performance, and the expected performance table corresponding to the execution pattern determined by the lottery is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. . In this case, in the expected performance based on the A loop, a performance with a higher degree of expectation for execution of the special additional performance is more likely to be selected than a false expected performance. After the execution of the performance is controlled by the performance MPU 92 according to the direct above table, the execution of the performance is controlled by the performance MPU 92 according to the expected performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are controlled. First, a direct top-up effect for 10 games is executed, and an image indicating the number of top-up games for the current 10 games is displayed on the image display device 63, and then the expected effect is executed for the execution period of the expected effect. .

Thereafter, "3" corresponding to the execution period of the expected performance is set in the expected performance counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S3005). The expected performance counter is a counter for the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the expected performance is being executed and the number of games remaining in the execution period of the expected performance. The value set in the expected performance counter is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started.

Thereafter, "10" is added to each value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3006). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the current number of additional games is subject to subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the current number of additional games is added. The number is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

Thereafter, the A loop effect flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3007). The A-loop performance flag is a flag used by the performance-side MPU 92 to specify that the main side MPU 72 is in the A-loop and is in a situation where the performance corresponding to the A-loop should be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3002, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3003, or if the process in step S3007 is executed, check whether the A loop effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1". Determination is made (step S3008). If the A-loop production flag is set to "1" (step S3008: YES), the stock game number counter 127 is set on the condition that the A-loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3009: YES). An addition process is executed to (step S3010). In the A-loop, as already explained, each time one game is executed, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9, so in the addition process of step S3010, the number of stock games counter 127 is set to " 50" is added. If a negative determination is made in step S3009, or if the process in step S3010 is executed, special additional effect processing is executed (step S3011). The special additional effect processing will be explained in detail later.

If the expected performance by loop A is being executed (step S3001: YES), it is determined whether an opportunity to update the expected performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3012). Specifically, it is determined whether one game has been newly started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3012, the value of the expected performance counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3013), and it is determined whether the value of the expected performance counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" (step S3014). . If the value of the expected performance counter is not "0" (step S3014: NO), an expected performance update setting process is executed (step S3015). In the update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referred to in the expected performance table currently being referred to in accordance with the new start of one game. As a result, the content of execution of the expected performance changes depending on the number of consecutive games of the expected performance.

On the other hand, if the value of the expected performance counter is "0" (step S3014: YES), special additional performance selection processing is executed (step S3016). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the special additional effect selection process.

First, if the sum of the current number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum number of special additional games exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically "1500"). It is determined whether there is one (step S3101). The current number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 that was grasped from the A-loop winning command when the A-loop winning command was received, plus the number of games played since receiving the A-loop winning command. It is derived by adding . Furthermore, in the special addition effect, an effect is executed to make the player recognize that the number of games already stored in the stock game number counter 127 has been added to the number of continuous games in the ART state ST9.

FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of special additional effects. As shown in FIG. 58, as a special add-on effect, a first special add-on effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize the add-on of 50 games by performing an effect as if the add-on of 25 games has occurred in each of the two games; A second special add-on effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize the add-on of 100 games by performing an effect as if the add-on of 25 games has occurred in each of the four games, and an effect that makes it appear that the add-on of 50 games has occurred. A third special add-on effect that makes the player aware of the 100-game add-on by being performed in each of the 2 games, and a 150-game add-on effect that is performed in each of the 3 games to make it appear that the 50-game add-on has occurred. A fourth special add-on effect that allows the player to recognize the add-on, and a fourth special add-on effect that allows the player to recognize the add-on of the 200 games by performing an effect in each of the four games that makes it appear as if the add-on of the 50 games has occurred. 5 special add-on effect, 6th special add-on effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize the 200 game add-on by performing an effect as if the 100-game add-on has occurred in each of the two games, and the 6th special add-on effect that makes the player recognize the 200-game add-on. A 7th special add-on effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize the addition of 300 games by performing an effect that appears to have occurred in each of the three games, and a seventh special effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize that the addition of 200 games has occurred is performed in each of the three games. An eighth special add-on effect is set that allows the player to recognize the add-on of 600 games by performing it. In this case, as explained above, in the A loop, 50 games are added each time one game is executed, so the additional game that will be announced in the end regardless of the 1st to 8th special additional effects. The number of games is 50×n (n is an integer of 1 or more). Since the first to eighth special add-on effects are set as described above, the minimum number of special add-on games is 50 games when the first special add-on effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special additional performance selection process (FIG. 57), in step S3101, the number of games that have already been played in the current advantageous section SC2 and the number of games that have already been notified to the player as the remaining number of continuation games in the ART state ST9 are determined. It is determined whether the number of games obtained by subtracting the sum of the sum from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the minimum number of special additional games. If the number of special add-on games is not greater than the minimum number of special add-on games, the special add-on effect is not executed. As a result, even though a special add-on effect occurs and the number of add-on games is notified, a part of the notified number of add-on games is invalidated due to the relationship with the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. It becomes possible to prevent the event from occurring.

If a negative determination is made in step S3101, a special bonus lottery table corresponding to the situation is read from the production side ROM 93 (step S3102). Here, the number and type of special add-on effects that can be executed differ depending on the value stored in the stock game number counter 127. In addition, the number of games that have already been played in the current ART state ST9 and the ART subtraction target counter 125 are subtracted from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, so that the number of games does not exceed the remaining upper limit number of games. It is necessary to set the number and type of special additional effects. Therefore, a special bonus lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit number of games is read out from the production side ROM 93.

In the special add-on lottery table, there are not only lottery results for selecting only one unit of special add-on performance, but also lottery results for selecting multiple units of special add-on performance. For example, when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "800" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 800 games or more, the special bonus lottery table that is referred to includes the following: 2nd special bonus presentation → 5th special bonus presentation → There is a lottery result that determines the type and execution order of the special additional performance such as 6th special additional performance → 7th special additional performance, and the type of special additional performance such as 5th special additional performance → 8th special additional performance There is also a lottery result that determines the execution order. Additionally, when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "300" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 300 games or more, the special additional lottery table that is referred to has the following information: 3rd special additional performance → 6th special additional performance There is a lottery result that determines the type and execution order of the special additional performance, and there is also a lottery result that only includes the 7th special additional performance.

Here, when a plurality of types of special add-on effects are selected, the type of special add-on effect that has the largest total number of add-on games to be notified will be executed later. As a result, if 1 unit of special additional performance is executed following the end of 1 unit of special additional performance, the 1 unit of special additional performance on the rear side will have more effects than the 1 unit of special additional effect on the front side. The number of add-on games will be notified, making it possible to suitably heighten the player's expectations. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a type of special add-on effect in which the total number of add-on games to be notified is a smaller number of games is executed later in the order of execution, and the total number of add-on games to be notified is A configuration may be adopted in which the execution order is set regardless of the number of games.

After reading the special add-on lottery table, a special add-on performance lottery process is executed (step S3103). In the lottery process, the current numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the special bonus lottery table read out in step S3102. The type of special additional performance to be executed this time is specified, and if there are a plurality of types of special additional effects to be executed this time, the execution order is specified.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, it means that there is no room to execute the special additional effect in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, the A loop effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" so as to disable the execution of the special additional effect (step S3104).

Returning to the explanation of the A-loop effect processing (FIG. 56), after the special additional effect selection process is executed in step S3016, it is determined whether the value of the A-loop effect flag in the effect-side RAM 94 is "0" or not. Determination is made (step S3017). If the value of the A loop effect flag is "0" (step S3017: YES), the execution of the special additional effect is not possible due to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, so the processing from step S3018 onward is performed. Not executed.

If the A loop effect flag is set to "1" (step S3017: NO), a special additional effect setting process is executed (step S3018). In the setting process, the type of special additional effect that is the first execution target selected in the special additional effect selection process is grasped, and a special additional effect table that enables the execution of the identified special additional effect is stored in the effect side ROM 93. , and stored in the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the stored special additional performance table, the special additional performance that is to be executed this time is displayed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. This is executed for the number of consecutive games corresponding to the performance.

Thereafter, the value of the number of consecutive games corresponding to the special additional performance that is currently being executed is set in the special additional performance counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S3019). For example, if the special additional performance to be executed this time is the first special additional performance, "2" is set, and if it is the fifth special additional performance, "4" is set. The special additional performance counter is a counter for the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the special additional performance is being executed and the number of games remaining in the execution period of the special additional performance. The value set in the special additional performance counter is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started.

Thereafter, on the condition that a plurality of units of special additional effects are selected in the special additional effects selection process in step S3016 (step S3020: YES), special additional effects stock processing is executed (step S3021). As already explained, the performance side RAM 94 is provided with a stock area 128 for special additional performances. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and is capable of storing information on the types of special additional effects that are waiting to be executed in accordance with the order of execution.

If a negative determination is made in step S3020, or if the process in step S3021 is executed, the total number of additional games announced by the special additional effect selected in the special additional effect selection process in step S3016 is subject to ART subtraction. The total number of additional games is added to the counter 125 (step S3022), and the total number of additional games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3023). In this case, if multiple units of special additional effects are selected in the selection process of special additional effects in step S3016, the total number of additional games notified by the multiple units of special additional effects is added to the ART subtraction target counter. 125 and subtracted from the stock game number counter 127.

However, the addition process to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed every time the number of add-on games is notified in conjunction with the execution of the special add-on effect. This makes it possible to make the display content of the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 correspond to the execution of the special additional effect. After executing the process in step S3023, the processes in steps S3009 to S3011 described above are executed.

Next, the special additional effect processing executed in step S3011 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

If the special additional performance is being executed (step S3201: YES), it is determined whether an opportunity to update the special additional performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3201). Specifically, it is determined whether one game has been newly started. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, the value of the special additional effect counter is subtracted by 1 (step S3203). In addition, the number of additional games that will be announced in this game in the currently set 1 unit special additional effect is grasped from the special additional effect table that is currently being referenced, and the grasped number of additional games is used for display. It is added to the counter 126 (step S3204). As a result, the number of additional games announced in the current game as a special additional effect is added to the display of the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. Further, a special additional effect update setting process is executed (step S3205). In the update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referred to in the special additional effect table currently being referred to in accordance with the new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the special additional performance changes depending on the number of consecutive games of the special additional performance.

Thereafter, by determining whether or not the value of the special additional performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "0", it is determined whether one unit of special additional performance currently being executed has ended ( Step S3206). If a negative determination is made in step S3206, it is determined whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 is greater than or equal to the creation reference value corresponding to the number of games for which 1 unit of special additional effects can be newly created. (Step S3207). Specifically, the creation standard value is set to 50 games, which is the minimum number of special add-on games.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3207, a creation lottery process is executed (step S3208). In the creation lottery process, numerical information read from a random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is checked against the creation lottery table stored in the performance side ROM 93. The created lottery table is set so that the probability of winning is 50%. If the creation is won in the creation lottery process (step S3209: YES), it is determined whether the situation is such that it is possible to stock the special additional performance (step S3210).

Specifically, similar to step S3101 in the special add-on effect selection process (FIG. 57), the number of consecutive games in the current advantageous section SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum number of special add-on games (specific 50) exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500"), and also stores it in the stock area 128 of the special additional performance in the RAM 94 on the performance side. It is determined whether there is a free area for stocking information on special additional effects. If the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 has not been exceeded and there is an empty area in the stock area 128 for the special additional performance, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, an intermediate lottery process is executed (step S3211). In the midway lottery process, first, a special additional lottery table corresponding to the situation is read from the performance side ROM 93. Specifically, the types of special add-on effects that can be executed differ depending on the value stored in the stock game number counter 127. Also, the number of games that have already been played in the current ART state ST9 and the ART subtraction target counter 125 are subtracted from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2, so that the number of games does not exceed the remaining upper limit number of games. It is necessary to set the type of special additional effect. Therefore, a special bonus lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit number of games is read out from the production side ROM 93. In this case, in the special add-on lottery table read out in step S3102 in the special add-on effect selection process (FIG. 57), there were lottery results in which multiple special add-on effects were selected at once, but in step S3211 There are no lottery results in which a plurality of special bonus effects are selected at once in the special bonus lottery table that is read out. In the mid-way lottery process, numerical information from a random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read special additional lottery table. This specifies the type of special additional performance that will be stocked this time.

Thereafter, stock processing for special additional effects is executed (step S3212). As already explained, the performance side RAM 94 is provided with a stock area 128 for special additional performances. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and is capable of storing information on the types of special additional effects that are waiting to be executed in accordance with the order of execution. In step S3212, information on the type of special additional effect selected in step S3211 is written in the area with the highest execution order among the free areas in the special additional effect stock area 128.

After that, the total number of additional games notified by the special additional effect selected in step S3211 is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3213), and the total number of additional games is further subtracted from the stock game number counter 127. (Step S3214). However, the addition process to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed every time the number of add-on games is notified in conjunction with the execution of the special add-on effect. This makes it possible to make the display content of the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 correspond to the execution of the special additional effect.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3206 in the special additional performance processing, that is, when the special additional performance that is in progress is completed, the special additional performance stock area 128 is referred to to determine whether the stock of the special additional performance exists. It is determined whether or not (step S3215). If there is stock (step S3215: YES), a special additional performance setting process is executed (step S3216). In the setting process, information on the type of special additional effects stored in the area that is the first to be executed in the stock area 128 of special additional effects is grasped, and a special effect that enables execution of the grasped special additional effects is grasped. The additional performance table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the stored special additional performance table, the special additional performance that is to be executed this time is displayed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. This is executed for the number of consecutive games corresponding to the performance. Thereafter, the value of the number of consecutive games corresponding to the special additional performance that is currently being executed is set in the special additional performance counter of the performance side RAM 94 (step S3217).

If there is no stock (step S3215: NO), it is determined whether the A loop end command has not yet been received from the main MPU 72 and it is possible to create a special additional effect (step S3218). Specifically, as in step S3101 in the special additional effect selection process (FIG. 57), the determination as to whether or not the situation is such that it is possible to create a special additional effect is based on the number of consecutive games in the current advantageous section SC2 and the ART. Check whether the sum of the value of the subtraction target counter 125 and the minimum number of special add-on games (specifically, "50") exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3218, the type of special additional performance is selected by lottery by executing a lottery process in the same way as in step S3211 (step S3219). In this case, a special additional effect of 1 unit is also selected in the intermediate lottery process. Then, a special additional effect setting process is executed (step S3220). In the setting process, a special additional effect table that enables execution of the special additional effect selected in step S3219 is read from the effect side ROM93 and stored in the effect side RAM94. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the stored special additional performance table, the special additional performance that is to be executed this time is displayed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. This is executed for the number of consecutive games corresponding to the performance. Thereafter, the value of the number of consecutive games corresponding to the special additional performance that is currently being executed is set in the special additional performance counter of the performance side RAM 94 (step S3221).

After that, the total number of additional games notified by the special additional performance set to be executed this time is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3222), and the total number of additional games is further subtracted from the stock game number counter 127. (Step S3223). However, the addition process to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed every time the number of add-on games is notified in conjunction with the execution of the special add-on effect. This makes it possible to make the display content of the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 correspond to the execution of the special additional effect.

If the special additional effect is not being executed (step S3201: NO) and the expected effect is not being executed (step S3224: NO), it is determined whether the A loop end command has been received from the main MPU 72 ( Step S3225). As already explained, the A-loop end command is sent when the A-loop ends in the main MPU 72. If the A loop end command has been received (step S3225: YES), the A loop effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3226). When the A-loop effect flag is cleared to "0", a negative determination is made in step S3008 of the A-loop effect process (FIG. 56), so the special additional effect process is no longer executed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 60, a description will be given of how the expected performance and special additional performance are executed under the control of the performance side MPU 92 when the A loop occurs in the main side MPU 72. 60(a) shows the execution period of the A loop in the main side MPU 72, FIG. 60(b) shows the execution period of the expected effect, FIG. 60(c) shows the execution period of the special additional effect, and FIG. d) indicates the period during which the special additional effects are in stock.

First, a case where the special additional effects are not stocked will be explained.

At timing t1, the A loop is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 60(a). As a result, each time one game is executed, although the player is not notified, 50 games are added to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. Further, at the timing of t1, the expected performance is started as shown in FIG. 60(b). As already explained, the expected performance is executed by the main MPU 72 over three games regardless of whether or not the A loop continues.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(b), at timing t2 when the expected performance continues, the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 60(a). However, even if the A-loop ends, the expected performance continues to be executed over three games.

Thereafter, the expected performance ends at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 60(b). At the timing t3, the number and type of special additional effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 in the effect-side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends early and the number of add-on games stored in the stock game number counter 127 is small, so a special add-on effect of 1 unit is selected. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the selected one-unit special additional effect is executed from timing t3 to timing t4. The special add-on performance continues over a plurality of games, and the number of add-on games is notified to the player in each game.

Next, a case where special additional effects are stocked will be explained.

At timing t5, the A loop is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 60(a). As a result, each time one game is executed, 50 games are added to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. Further, at the timing t5, the expected performance is started as shown in FIG. 60(b). As already explained, the expected performance is executed by the main MPU 72 over three games regardless of whether or not the A loop continues.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the expected performance ends at timing t6 when the A loop continues in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 60(b). At the timing t6, the number and type of special additional effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game counter 127 in the effect-side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, it is decided to execute a special additional effect of 3 units. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(c), at the timing t6, 1 unit of special additional effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 60(d), execution of 2 units of special additional effect is in stock. Become.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(c), the special additional performance of one unit ends at timing t7. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60(d), since execution of the special additional effect is stored, the special additional effect is newly started at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 60(c). Note that, as shown in FIG. 60(a), since the A loop is still continuing in the main MPU 72, the number of remaining continuation games in ART state ST9 is added to each game by 50 games, although the player is not notified. ing.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends at timing t9, which is a situation in which the special additional effect started at timing t8 is being executed. Further, at the subsequent timing t10, the special additional performance of one unit ends as shown in FIG. 60(c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 60(d), since execution of the special additional effect is stored, the special additional effect is newly started at timing t11 as shown in FIG. 60(c). With the start of the special additional performance, the execution of the special additional performance is not stocked as shown in FIG. 60(d). Thereafter, the special additional effect ends at timing t12 as shown in FIG. 60(c).

Next, the B loop effect processing executed in step S2814 in the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61.

If the B loop addition command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3301: YES), addition processing to the stock game number counter 127 is executed (step S3302). In loop B, as described above, each time one game is executed, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9, so in the addition process of step S3302, the number of stock games counter 127 is set to " 50" is added.

If a negative determination is made in step S3301, or if the process in step S3302 is executed, it is determined whether a special freeze command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3303). The special freeze command is issued when the number of consecutive games in the B loop in the main MPU 72 is 21 or more, and the entire number of games added by the B loop is added to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. This is a command sent from the main MPU 72 when the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 is not exceeded. Additionally, as already explained, a situation where the number of consecutive games in Loop B is 21 or more means that even if the number of games played in Loop B is taken into account, the player is not notified at the end of Loop B. This means that the number of additional games is 1000 or more. Therefore, when the special freeze command is received, the performance side MPU 92 executes the performance for which the addition of 1000 games or more has been announced.

If a special freeze command has been received (step S3303: YES), special freeze effect start setting processing is executed (step S3304). In the start setting process, information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop set in the special freeze command is grasped. Then, (“Number of games continued in B loop” - “Number of games played in B loop”) “Number of games added to the number of continuous games in ART state ST9 for each game in B loop (50 games )") x "Number of games (50 games) that will be added to the number of continuous games in ART state ST9 for each game in B loop" as the number of special additional games. , a special freeze performance table that enables notification of the derived number of special add-on games is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.

In the special freeze effect table, information that enables display of the number of special add-on games derived as described above is set, and information that enables execution of the special freeze effect is set. In addition, since the special freeze effect is executed over the freeze period for the special freeze effect (specifically 30 seconds) set by the main MPU 72, the special freeze effect table that indicates the number of additional games is However, the execution period of the effect is set to the freeze period for the special freeze effect. By controlling the performance execution in the performance MPU 92 according to the special freeze performance table, the special freeze performance is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and more than 1000 games derived as described above are executed. An image showing the number of additional games is displayed on the image display device 63.

Thereafter, the derived number of special add-on games is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and also added to the display counter 126 (step S3305). As a result, the number of special add-on games becomes the number of games to be subtracted in the production side MPU 92 as the games in the ART state ST9 are completed, and the number of special add-on games is added to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. It will be added. Thereafter, the number of special add-on games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3306).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 62, a description will be given of how the special freeze effect is executed under the control of the effect side MPU 92 when the B loop occurs in the main side MPU 72. FIG. 62(a) shows the execution period of the B loop in the main MPU 72, FIG. 62(b) shows the execution period of one game, and FIG. 62(c) shows the execution period of the special freeze effect.

First, a case where the special freeze effect is not executed will be explained.

At timing t1, the B loop is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 62(a). As a result, each time one game is executed, although the player is not notified, 50 games are added to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. Note that when the A loop is started, the expected performance is started on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, but the expected performance triggered by the start of the B loop is not executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(a), the B loop continues from timing t1 to timing t2, from timing t3 to timing t4, and from timing t5 to timing t6. One game is executed as shown in (b). Since each of these games is executed in the B-loop situation, the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is added to the number of consecutive games by 50 games, and the consecutive winnings are made in the B-loop continuation lottery process.

Thereafter, one game is started as shown in FIG. 62(b) at timing t7, where the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 62(a). By starting this one game, 50 games are added to the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9. However, in the continuation lottery process of B loop, the continuation is not possible. Therefore, the B loop in the main MPU 72 ends at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 62(a). In this case, since the number of consecutive games in loop B is not 21 or more, the special freeze effect is not performed as shown in FIG. 62(c).

Next, a case where a special freeze effect is executed will be explained.

At timing t9, the B loop is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 62(a). As a result, each time one game is executed, although the player is not notified, 50 games are added to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

After that, in a situation where the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 62(a), as shown in FIG. 62(b), the timing from t9 to t10, the timing from t11 to t12, and the timing from t13 Including the timing of ~t14, 20 games are executed. Thereafter, one game is started as shown in FIG. 62(b) at timing t15, where the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 62(a). By starting this one game, 50 games are added to the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9. However, in the continuation lottery process of B loop, the continuation is not possible. Therefore, the B loop in the main MPU 72 ends at timing t15 as shown in FIG. 62(a).

In this case, the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 or more. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 62(b), although one game is started at the timing t15, by setting the freeze period for the special freeze effect in the main MPU 72, the game starts from the timing t15 to the timing t16. Even in a situation where a new game has started, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is in a standby state. Further, as shown in FIG. 62(c), a special freeze effect is executed from timing t15 to timing t16. Then, at timing t16, the freeze period for the special freeze effect passes in the main MPU 72, and the special freeze effect ends as shown in FIG. 62(c). As a result, a game involving rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed from timing t16 to timing t17.

Next, the stock release process executed in step S2819 in the non-normal production control process (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 63. Note that the stock release process is executed when the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the performance side RAM 94 becomes "0".

First, it is determined whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 in the production side RAM 94 is 1 or more (step S3401). A situation in which the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more is a situation in which the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, which is to be consumed by the main side MPU 72, is 1 or more, and the value is to be consumed by the production side MPU 92. This is a situation in which the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is "0". In this situation, the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, which is to be consumed in the main side MPU 72, is stored in the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, it is determined whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 is less than the first release reference value (step S3402). The first release reference value corresponds to the value of 10 games. As already explained, there are various types of additional effects in the ART state ST9, but the minimum number of games that can be notified in these various types of additional effects is 10 games. In other words, the first release reference value is set as the minimum number of games that can be notified in various additional effects.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, all values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3403). As a result, all the numbers of games stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. Thereafter, the display counter 126 of the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3404). As a result, although the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is newly set, that number of games is not displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuation games in the ART state ST9. Further, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S3405).

Thereafter, a start setting process for the first release effect is executed (step S3406). In the start setting process, a first release effect table that enables execution of the first release effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The first release effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the first release effect table. In the first release performance, a performance indicating that the end of the ART state ST9 is near is executed. Further, in the first release performance, an image indicating that the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is unknown is displayed on the image display device 63.

Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART state ST9 will be explained with reference to explanatory diagrams in FIGS. 64(a) and 64(b). If the value of the display counter 126 is 1 or more in the ART state ST9 and various additional effects are not being executed, a moving image is displayed by the effect character G8 for the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 64(a). , a game number image G9 is displayed to notify the value stored in the display counter 126 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. The number of games displayed in the game number image G9 is subtracted by 1 each time one game is played. Then, as a result of subtracting 1, the number of games displayed in the number of games image G9 becomes "0", and if the value stored in the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more but less than 10, then The first release performance is started. In the first release effect, as shown in FIG. 64(b), an end suggestion image G10 is displayed that indicates that the end of ART state ST9 is near, and also indicates that the number of remaining games to continue in ART state ST9 is unknown. An image G11 of unknown number of games is displayed. When the first release effect is executed in this way, the player recognizes that the ART state ST9 is nearing its end.

In addition, in the situation where the first release effect is being executed, if the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 is added directly, or if additional effects occur due to A loop or B loop, the first release effect will end. At the same time, a performance corresponding to the addition is executed. After that, a normal effect for ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 64(a) is executed. In addition, although the description of the specific process is omitted, if the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 is added in a situation where the first release effect is being executed, it corresponds to the effect that triggered the addition. The number of additional games is not reported as is, but the number of additional games is the sum of the number of additional games corresponding to the performance that triggered the addition and the remaining number of consecutive games of the first release performance. At the same time, it is notified as the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 in the normal performance for ART state ST9 that is started thereafter.

Returning to the description of the stock release process (FIG. 63), if a negative determination is made in step S3402, it is determined whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 is greater than or equal to the first release reference value and less than or equal to the second release reference value. (Step S3407). The second release reference value corresponds to the value of 100 games. As already explained, in the ART state ST9, there is a direct top-up effect, but the maximum number of games that can be notified in the above-mentioned direct top-down effect is 100 games. In other words, the second release reference value is set as the maximum number of games that can be notified in the direct top-up performance.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, all values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set in each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3408). As a result, all the numbers of games stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. Further, the number of games newly set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Thereafter, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S3409).

Thereafter, a start setting process for the second release effect is executed (step S3410). In the start setting process, a second release effect table that enables execution of the second release effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The second release effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the second release effect table. In the second release performance, a performance indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 has been added is executed, and the additional number of games is added to the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. The image will be displayed.

FIG. 64(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second release effect is executed. In the second release effect, an additional notification image G12 indicating that 100 games have been added is displayed, and the number of games displayed in the additional notification image G12 is added to the number of games image G9, which is 0 games. The image will be displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that an additional 100 games has occurred. After the second release effect is executed, a normal effect for ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 64(a) is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the stock release process (FIG. 63), if a negative determination is made in step S3407, it means that the number of games exceeding 100 games is stored in the stock game number counter 127. In this case, a process for selecting the number of games to be played is executed (step S3411). In the selection process, the release selection table corresponding to the current value of the stock game number counter 127 is read out from the performance side ROM 93, and numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out. Then, by comparing the read numerical information against the release selection table, the number of games to be released as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 is selected. In this case, in the release selection table, multiple types of release game numbers are set at 10-game intervals with the value stored in the stock game number counter 127 as the upper limit, and the selection rate for each release game number is constant or It remains almost constant.

Thereafter, the value of the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of released games is set in each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3412). As a result, the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of games to be released is set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. Further, the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of released games is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Thereafter, the value of the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of released games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3413).

Thereafter, a start setting process for the third release effect is executed (step S3414). In the start setting process, a third release effect table that enables execution of the third release effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The third release effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the third release effect table. In the third release performance, a performance indicating that the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 has been added is executed, and the additional number of games is added to the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. The image will be displayed. The specific content of the third release effect is the same as the content of the second release effect shown in FIG. 64(c).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3401 because the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0", a start setting process for the ART end effect is executed (step S3415). In the start setting process, an ART end effect table that enables execution of the ART end effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART end performance table, so that the ART end performance is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In the ART end effect, an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is executed, and the image display device 63 displays the number of games played in the current ART state ST9 and the player's information in the current ART state ST9. The number of game media awarded is notified.

Next, the manner in which various release effects are executed will be explained with reference to the time chart of FIG. 65. 65(a) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 65(b) shows the execution period of the normal performance in the ART state ST9, and FIG. 65(c) shows the execution period of the stock game number counter 127 when the value is 1 or more. 65(d) shows the execution period of the first release effect, FIG. 65(e) shows the execution period of the second release effect, and FIG. 65(f) shows the execution period of the third release effect. The execution period is shown, and FIG. 65(g) shows the timing of occurrence of the direct top performance.

First, a case where only the first release effect among the first to third release effects is executed will be described.

By starting the ART state ST9 at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 65(a), the normal performance in the ART state ST9 is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 65(b). Thereafter, at timing t2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the performance side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, as shown in FIG. 65(c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the release performance is started instead of the ART state ST9 being immediately ended. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing t2 is less than the first release reference value, the first release effect is started at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 65(d). This first release effect continues for the number of games corresponding to the value set in the stock game number counter 127 at timing t2. Note that at the timing t2, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0" as shown in FIG. 65(c).

After that, in the situation where the first release performance is being executed, no addition of the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 occurs, so that the ART that is measured by both the main side MPU 72 and the performance side MPU 92 at the timing t3 The remaining number of consecutive games in state ST9 becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing t3, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 65(a), and the first release effect ends as shown in FIG. 65(d).

Next, cases in which each of the first to third release effects are executed will be described.

By starting the ART state ST9 at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 65(a), the normal performance in the ART state ST9 is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 65(b). Thereafter, at timing t5, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the performance side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, as shown in FIG. 65(c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the release performance is started instead of the ART state ST9 being immediately ended. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing t5 is less than the first release reference value, the first release effect is started at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 65(d).

Thereafter, at timing t6 when the first release effect is being executed, a direct top effect occurs as shown in FIG. 65(g). In the direct top-up performance, the number of games that is the sum of the number of games targeted for top-up by the direct top-up and the number of remaining continuation games of the first release performance is notified as the number of top-up games. Further, at the timing of t6, the first release effect ends and the normal effect in the ART state ST9 starts, as shown in FIGS. 65(b) and 65(d).

Thereafter, at timing t7, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the performance side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, as shown in FIG. 65(c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the release performance is started instead of the ART state ST9 being immediately ended. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing t7 exceeds the second release reference value, the third release effect is executed from the timing t7 to the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 65(f). . In this case, the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of games to be released (step S3411) is notified as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is displayed as the number of remaining continuation games in the ART state ST9.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the normal performance of the ART state ST9 is executed from timing t8 to timing t9. Then, at timing t9, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the performance side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, as shown in FIG. 65(c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the release performance is started instead of the ART state ST9 being immediately ended. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing t9 is greater than or equal to the first release reference value and less than the second release reference value, as shown in FIG. A second release effect is executed. In this case, the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is notified as the number of additional games, and the number of additional games is displayed as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Note that at timing t9, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0" as shown in FIG. 65(c).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(b), the normal performance in the ART state ST9 is executed from timing t10 to timing t11. Then, at the timing t11, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9, which is measured by both the main side MPU 72 and the production side MPU 92, becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing t11, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 65(a), and the normal performance of the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 65(b).

<About the ending performance of advantageous section SC2>
Next, the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 will be explained. First, referring again to the flowchart of FIG. 33, the processing of steps S1301 to S1311 in the second control processing of the game section will be described.

First, it is determined whether the freeze standby flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1301). The freeze standby flag is used to display the ending performance until the end of the bonus state when the bonus state is entered in the middle of the ending performance and the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the bonus state. This flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify that it is waiting for the freeze setting at the end of the process.

If the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S1301: YES), freeze setting processing is executed (step S1302). The freeze setting process will be explained in detail later. If the freeze standby flag is not set to "1" (step S1301: NO), the game section is set to the advantageous section SC2 by determining whether or not the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S1303). When the advantageous section flag is set to "1" (step S1303: YES), the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1304). Thereafter, ending handling processing is executed (step S1305).

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the ending handling process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the ending handling process is executed in step S1305 in the second control process (FIG. 33) of the game section. As already explained, the second control process of the game section is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, so the ending corresponding process is also executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game is Executed after stopping.

First, it is determined whether the main ending effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3501). The main-side ending performance flag is a flag for the main-side MPU 72 to specify that it is the execution period of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2.

If the main side ending production flag is not set to "1" (step S3501: NO), the value of the advantageous continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 in the main side RAM 74, is the ending compatible game. It is determined whether the number is greater than or equal to the number (specifically, "1450") (step S3502). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3502, the sum of the value of the advantage continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main side RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games in the advantage section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). ) or more is determined (step S3503). That is, it is determined whether the sum of the number of games completed in ART state ST9 and the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST9 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in advantageous section SC2.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, it means that it is certain that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. In this case, the main side ending effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3504). Furthermore, an ending effect command indicating that the ending effect should be started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3505). By receiving the ending performance command, the performance side MPU 92 starts the ending performance even if other performances such as expected performance and special additional performance are being executed. Further, information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is set in the ending effect command. This makes it possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp the remaining number of games until the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

Due to the above configuration, if the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of ending compatible games, and in relation to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9, the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is the upper limit number of games. When it is certain that the ending effect will be reached, the ending effect will be executed. In this case, the execution period of the ending effect is started on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 is 1 or more, so the game states in which the execution period of the ending effect starts are ART state ST9 and ART state ST9. The state is either a bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) that occurs during the middle of the ART state ST9, or a preparation state ST8 after the bonus state that occurs during the ART state ST9 ends.

The contents of the processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained. When the production side MPU 92 receives the ending production command from the main side MPU 72, it makes an affirmative determination in step S2801 in the non-normal production control process (FIG. 54), and sets the production side ending production flag provided in the production side RAM 94. is set to "1" (step S2802). The performance-side ending performance flag is a flag for the performance-side MPU 92 to specify that it is the execution period of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2. If the production-side ending production flag is set to "1" (step S2803: YES), ending production processing is executed (step S2804).

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the ending production process executed by the production side MPU 92.

If it is the start timing of the ending effect (step S3601: YES), a process for determining the number of games in which the ending effect is to be executed is executed (step S3602). In this grasping process, the remaining number of games until the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is grasped from the ending effect command received this time. Then, the determined number of games is set in the ending performance counter provided in the performance side RAM 94. The ending performance counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of games to be executed for the ending performance on the performance side MPU 92, and if the ending performance counter is set to a value of 1 or more, 1 new game is started. Each time, the value of the ending effect counter is subtracted by 1, and if the value of the ending effect counter is already "0", that state is maintained even if one game is newly started.

Thereafter, the ending effect start setting process is executed (step S3603). In the start setting process, an ending effect table that enables execution of ending effects for the number of games grasped in step S3602 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table.

If it is not the timing to start the ending effect (step S3601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to update the ending effect (step S3604). Specifically, it is determined whether one game has been newly started. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3604, an ending effect update setting process is executed (step S3605). In the update setting process, the range to be referred to in the ending effect table currently being referred to is changed in accordance with the new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the ending effect changes depending on the number of games in which the ending effect continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S3604, or if the process in step S3605 is executed, it is determined whether any bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 (step S3606). Furthermore, at the start of the game in which the bonus winning data is set, the main MPU 72 transmits a game start command in which information that allows the type of the set bonus winning data to be specified is set, and when the bonus winning data is established. Since the MPU 92 transmits the corresponding commands, the MPU 92 on the performance side can specify whether or not bonus winning data is set in the RAM 74 on the main side based on these commands.

If any bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 (step S3606: YES), the first notification and the second notification are not executed (step S3607: NO). Announcement effect setting processing is executed (step S3608). In the performance setting process of the first notification, data is set so that the image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed in a reduced size in a situation where the video corresponding to the ending performance is being displayed on the image display device 63.

FIG. 68(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of a first notification in which an image corresponding to a bonus win is displayed in a situation where an ending effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 68(a), a partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In this case, the area other than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63 is set wider than the partial display area. In the area other than the partial display area, an image G13 for the ending effect is displayed as a moving image, and in the partial display area, a bonus announcement image G14 corresponding to any bonus winning data set in the main side RAM 74 is displayed. Displayed. By displaying the bonus notification image G14 in this way, it is possible to make the player aware that even in a situation where an ending effect is being executed, it is possible to win a bonus prize. . Furthermore, in the first notification, the ending effect image G13 is displayed more prominently than the bonus notification image G14. This makes it possible to display the bonus announcement image G14 while minimizing the visibility of the ending effect image G13. Note that the situation in which the first notification is being executed ends when a second notification, which will be described later, is started or when a bonus win is established.

If a negative determination is made in step S3606, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3607, or if the process in step S3608 is executed, a predetermined number of games (specifically, 5 games) is played after the bonus internal state ST2 is reached. It is determined whether or not it has been digested (step S3609). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3609, the effect setting process for the second announcement is executed (step S3611) on the condition that the second announcement is not executed (step S3610: NO). In the effect setting process for the second notification, in a situation where the video corresponding to the ending effect is displayed in a reduced size on the image display device 63, the image corresponding to the bonus win is displayed in a larger size than in the case of the first notification. Configure the data to do so.

FIG. 68(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a second notification in which an image corresponding to a bonus win is displayed in a situation where an ending effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 68(b), a partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In this case, the area other than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63 is set wider than the partial display area. In the partial display area, an image G13 for the ending effect is displayed as a moving image, and in an area other than the partial display area, a bonus announcement image G14 corresponding to the fact that any bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 is displayed. Displayed. In other words, the areas in which the images G13 and G14 are displayed are in a reverse relationship with respect to the first notification. By displaying the bonus notification image G14 in an enlarged manner in this manner, it becomes possible to emphasize that the bonus has been won to the player who is concentrating on the ending effect and is unaware of the bonus win. Note that the situation in which the second notification is being executed ends when a bonus win is established.

If a negative determination is made in step S3609, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3610, or if the process of step S3611 is executed, the condition is that any BB winning is established (step S3612: YES) , the BB performance standby flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3613), and on the condition that any RB winning is established (step S3614: YES), the BB performance standby flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". The RB performance standby flag is set to "1" (step S3615). The BB performance standby flag is a flag for specifying on the performance side MPU 92 that the BB state ST3 is in effect during the execution of the ending performance, and the RB performance standby flag is a flag for specifying that the RB state is in ST4 during the execution of the ending performance. This is a flag for specifying on the production side MPU 92 that there is. In addition, in a situation where the BB performance standby flag is set to "1", if the final game of BB state ST3 is started before the number of remaining execution games of the ending performance reaches "0", the BB performance standby flag is set to "1". is cleared to "0". In addition, in a situation where the RB performance standby flag is set to "1", if the final game of RB state ST4 is started before the number of remaining execution games of the ending performance reaches "0", the RB performance standby flag is set to "1". is cleared to "0".

Here, as already explained, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started, the freeze counter setting process is executed in step S1914 in the bonus process (FIG. 42) of the main side MPU 72, so that a new The game is now waiting to start. Then, in the situation where the freeze setting has been made, the effect corresponding to the start of the bonus state is executed by the effect side MPU 92. In this case, if the main ending effect flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S1913 and the process in step S1914 is not executed. Thereby, even if the bonus state is started while the ending effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the bonus state from being performed. If a bonus state occurs in a situation where an ending effect is being executed, the main side MPU 72 executes control corresponding to the bonus state, but the effect side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the bonus state. To continue an ending performance as it is without performing any control. In this case, as described above, even if a bonus state is started while the ending effect is being executed, the freeze setting is not performed, so that the flow of the ending effect is not obstructed by the freeze setting. becomes possible.

Furthermore, as already explained, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is terminated, a new freeze counter setting process is executed in step S2209 in the bonus state process (FIG. 45) of the main MPU 72. The game is now waiting to start. Then, in a situation where the freeze setting has been made, the performance MPU 92 executes a performance corresponding to the end of the bonus state. In this case, if the main ending effect flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S2208 and the process in step S2209 is not executed. Thereby, even if the bonus state is ended during the execution of the ending performance, it is possible to prevent the freeze setting corresponding to the end of the bonus state from being performed. If the ending effect occurs in the middle of the bonus state, or if the bonus state occurs while the ending effect is being executed, the control corresponding to the bonus state will be executed in the main MPU 72. The side MPU 92 controls the execution of the ending effect without controlling the execution of the effect corresponding to the bonus state. In this case, as described above, even if the bonus state ends while the ending effect is being executed, the freeze setting is not performed, so that the flow of the ending effect is not obstructed by the freeze setting. becomes possible.

In the ending effect processing (FIG. 67), when the timing is when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in a game where the value of the ending effect counter in the effect side RAM 94 is "0" (step S3616: YES). , executes the process for ending the ending effect (step S3617). That is, the process for ending the ending effect is executed when the ending timing of the game is such that the number of remaining games to be executed for the ending effect set when the ending effect is started becomes "0".

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the process for ending the ending effect.

First, it is determined whether the performance extension flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3701). The effect extension flag causes the ending effect to be extended due to the fact that the player enters a bonus state in the middle of the ending effect and the bonus state continues even if the number of remaining games of the ending effect reaches "0". This flag is used by the production side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the current situation exists.

If the production extension flag is not set to "1" (step S3701: NO), the BB state ST3 is determined by determining whether the BB production standby flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S3702). If the BB performance standby flag is set to "1" (step S3702: YES), after clearing the BB performance standby flag to "0" (step S3703), the game awarded to the player in the current BB state ST3 is It is determined whether the total number of media provided is less than or equal to a specific reference number (step S3704). As already explained, the BB state ST3 ends when the total number of game media given in the BB state ST3 becomes equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (specifically, "350"), but this game media The total number is measured not only by the main MPU 72 but also by the performance MPU 92 based on commands sent from the main MPU 72. Further, the specific reference number is set to be smaller than the BB end reference number. Specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100", which is less than half of the BB end reference number. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific reference number may be set to 1/3 or less of the BB end reference number, or may be set to 1/4 or less of the BB end reference number.

If the total number of game media awarded to the player in the BB state ST3 is less than or equal to the specific reference number (step S3704: YES), a BB performance start setting process is executed (step S3705). Thereafter, the performance-side ending performance flag in the performance-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3706).

In the BB performance start setting process, the ending end performance table that enables the execution of a performance corresponding to the end of the ending performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94, and the BB performance table that enables the execution of the BB performance is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect effect table. Thereafter, the performance MPU 92 controls execution of the performance according to the BB performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the BB performance. In other words, if the remaining number of games to be executed for the ending effect set at the start of the ending effect becomes "0" during the BB state ST3, the total number of gaming media given to the player in the BB state ST3. If it is still below the specific reference number, the ending effect is ended and the BB effect is started even if it is in the middle of the BB state ST3. Thereby, when the BB state ST3 is started just before the end of the ending performance, it is possible to create a situation in which the BB performance is executed following the ending performance.

Here, the details will be described later, but in a situation where the total number of game media given to the player in BB state ST3 is less than a specific standard number, the ending timing of the game becomes such that the value of the ending effect counter becomes "0". When the ending effect is executed, including the case where the ending is completed, a freeze setting is performed in the main MPU 72 to forcibly wait for the start of a new game over the freeze period at the end of the ending. The freeze period at the end of the ending corresponds to the execution period of the ending effect, and is specifically set to 15 seconds. In this way, by performing the ending effect while the player is forced to wait for the start of a new game, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the ending effect.

In addition, when a BB effect is executed following the ending effect, an image indicating that the BB state ST3 is subsequently started is displayed in the display effect of the image display device 63 corresponding to the ending effect. That is, when the BB performance is started following the ending performance, a freeze period corresponding to the ending performance is set, but a freeze period at the start of the bonus corresponding to the start of the bonus state is not set. This makes it possible to prevent the freeze period from becoming excessively long while ensuring a sufficient execution period for the ending effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S3702, it is determined whether the RB state ST4 is reached by determining whether the RB performance standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3707). . If the RB performance standby flag is set to "1" (step S3707: YES), the RB performance standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S3708).

If a negative determination is made in step S3704, or if the process in step S3708 is executed, a process for extending the ending effect is executed. In other words, if the remaining number of games to be played set at the start of the ending performance becomes "0", the total number of game media given to the player in BB state ST3 has already reached the specified standard. If the number exceeds the number, the ending effect is extended until the corresponding BB state ST3 ends. Furthermore, if the remaining number of games to be executed set at the start of the ending performance becomes "0" and the RB state ST4 is present, the ending performance is extended until the RB state ST4 ends.

As a process for extending the ending effect, an ending effect extension setting process is first executed (step S3709). In the extension setting process, an extension table for extending the ending performance by one game is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the performance execution in the performance side MPU 92 according to the extension table, the execution of the ending performance in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is extended by one game. In this case, a performance for one game is executed that has continuity of performance with respect to the content of the immediately preceding ending performance. Thereafter, the performance extension flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3710).

In the process for ending the ending effect, if none of the effect extension flag, BB effect standby flag, and RB effect standby flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3701, step S3702, and step S3707: NO), the normal Performance start setting processing is executed (step S3711). In the start setting process, an ending end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and at the same time, the ending effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read out and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the execution of the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. A normal performance table that is enabled is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, first, the performance-side MPU 92 controls execution of the performance according to the ending performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the ending performance. Thereafter, the performance MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance according to the normal performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1.

If the performance extension flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S3712). If the bonus state has not ended (step S3712: NO), an ending performance extension setting process is executed (step S3713). In the extension setting process, similarly to step S3709, an extension table for extending the ending effect by one game is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94. By controlling the performance execution in the performance side MPU 92 according to the extension table, the execution of the ending performance in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 is extended by one game. In this case, a performance for one game is executed that has continuity of performance with respect to the content of the immediately preceding ending performance.

If the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S3712: YES), the performance extension flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3714), and the performance side ending in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared. The production flag is cleared to "0" (step S3715). Thereafter, a normal performance start setting process is executed (step S3716). In the start setting process, an ending end effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and at the same time, the ending effect table that enables the execution of the effect corresponding to the end of the ending effect is read out and stored in the effect side RAM 94, and the execution of the effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. A normal performance table that is enabled is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, first, the performance-side MPU 92 controls execution of the performance according to the ending performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the ending performance. Thereafter, the performance MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance according to the normal performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1.

Returning to the explanation of the second control process (FIG. 33) for the game section, after the ending corresponding process is executed in step S1305, the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 becomes the upper limit number of games for the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, is a value corresponding to "1500") (step S1306). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, an advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S1307). In the advantageous section initialization process, the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the initialization process of the advantageous section, even if you stay in any of the false precursor state ST5, real precursor state ST6, chance state ST7, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9, the continuation of those gaming states ST5 to ST9 The gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the gaming states ST5 to ST9, including a counter for storing the number of games. Thereafter, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the off state (step S1308). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section on the advantageous section display section 67 is ended.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the main ending effect flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1309). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, freeze setting processing is executed (step S1310).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1309, a forced termination command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1311). When the production side MPU 92 receives the forced termination command, it executes the normal production start setting process in the other production processing of step S2820 in the non-normal production control process (FIG. 54). In the start setting process, the production side sets a normal return production table that enables the execution of a normal return production indicating a return to the normal gaming state ST1, and a normal production table that enables the execution of a production corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1. It is read out from the ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, first, the execution of the performance is controlled by the performance side MPU 92 according to the normal return performance table, so that the normal return performance is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and then the performance is performed according to the normal performance table. As the side MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1.

Next, the freeze setting process executed in step S1302 or step S1310 in the second control process (FIG. 33) of the game section will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 70. In addition, since the second control process of the game section is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, the freeze setting process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. executed later.

If the freeze standby flag in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S3801: NO), it means that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. do. In this case, first, the main ending effect flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3802). Thereafter, if the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is BB state ST3 (step S3803: YES), it is determined whether the current game is the final game of BB state ST3 (step S3804). If the current game is not the final game in BB state ST3 (step S3804: NO), it is determined whether the total number of game media given to the player in BB state ST3 is less than or equal to a specific reference number ( Step S3805). The specific reference number is the same as the specific reference number determined in step S3704 of the ending production termination process (FIG. 69) in the production side MPU 92. That is, the specific reference number is set to a smaller number than the BB end reference number, and specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100", which is less than half of the BB end reference number.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3804 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3806). In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S3806, the process waits in step S312 in normal processing (FIG. 12). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this state where the start of a new game is on standby, the ending effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, thereby drawing the player's attention to the ending effect. becomes possible. The standby state in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

On the other hand, if negative determinations are made in both steps S3804 and S3805, the freeze standby flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the freeze counter setting process. If it is not the final game in BB state ST3, but the total number of game media given to the player in BB state ST3 is not less than a specific reference number, the number of consecutive games in advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and becomes advantageous. Even after the initialization process of the section SC2 is executed, the execution of the ending performance in the performance side MPU 92 is extended in the situation of the normal section SC1 and the BB state ST3. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending performance is waited until the timing when the extension of the ending performance ends, that is, the timing when the BB state ST3 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in a standby state for such freeze setting.

If the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is not the BB state ST3 (step S3803: NO), it is determined whether the current game is other than the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S3808). If the current game is not in the RB state ST4, or if the current game is the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S3808: NO), a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3809). In the freeze counter setting process, similarly to step S3806, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S3809, the process waits in step S312 in normal processing (FIG. 12). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this state where the start of a new game is on standby, the ending effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, thereby drawing the player's attention to the ending effect. becomes possible. The standby state in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

As described above, by executing the freeze counter setting process in each of steps S3806 and S3809, when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the execution period of the ending effect, the game is If the game is not in the bonus state, if it is in the bonus state but it is the final game in the bonus state, or if the total number of game media given to the player in the BB state ST3 is less than the specific standard number, the game A freeze period occurs at the end of the ending. Then, the ending effect will be executed during the freeze period at the end of the ending.

If the current game is in the RB state ST4 and is not the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S3808: YES), the freeze standby flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the freeze counter setting process. do. If the game is in the RB state ST4 and it is not the final game of the RB state ST4, even after the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 has been executed, the normal section continues. In the situation of SC1 and RB state ST4, execution of the ending performance in the performance side MPU 92 is extended. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending performance is waited until the end of the extension of the ending performance, that is, the timing when the RB state ST4 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in a standby state for such freeze setting.

If the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S3801: YES), it is determined whether this is the final game in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 (step S3811). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3811, the state in which the ending effect is extended in the current game ends. Therefore, after clearing the freeze standby flag in the main side RAM 74 to "0" (step S3812), the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3813).

In the freeze counter setting process, similarly to steps S3806 and S3809, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S3809, the process waits in step S312 in normal processing (FIG. 12). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this state where the start of a new game is on standby, the ending effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 as described above, thereby drawing the player's attention to the ending effect. becomes possible. The standby state in step S312 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, the manner in which the ending effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 71. 71(a) shows the execution period of advantageous section SC2, FIG. 71(b) shows the execution period of BB state ST3, FIG. 71(c) shows the execution period of RB state ST4, and FIG. 71(d) shows the execution period of RB state ST4. shows the execution period of the ending effect, FIG. 71(e) shows the execution period of the bonus effect (BB effect or RB effect), and FIG. 71(f) shows the freeze period.

First, a case where the ending effect ends in a situation that is neither BB state ST3 nor RB state ST4 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), at timing t1, which is a situation in the advantageous section SC2, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of ending compatible games, and in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 71(d). Thereafter, at timing t2, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the number of consecutive games in advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, and a new game is started as shown in FIG. 71(f). A freeze period is started in which the start of the process is forced into a standby state. The ending effect is executed during the freeze period. Thereafter, at timing t3, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 71(f), and the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 71(d).

Next, a case where the ending effect ends in the middle of the BB state ST3 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), at timing t4, which is a situation in the advantageous section SC2, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of ending compatible games, and in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 71(d). Thereafter, the BB state ST3 is started as shown in FIG. 71(b) at timing t5 when the ending effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71(f), the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the BB state ST3 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being obstructed by the freeze setting.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(b), at timing t6, when the BB state ST3 is being executed, the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, as shown in FIG. 71(a). This is the end of the game. In this case, since the total number of game media awarded up to that point in BB state ST3 is less than the specific reference number, no extension of the ending effect occurs. Therefore, at timing t6, a freeze period is started in which the start of a new game is forced to wait, as shown in FIG. 71(f). The ending effect is executed during the freeze period. Thereafter, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 71(f) at timing t7, and the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 71(d). Further, at the timing of t7, an effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 is started as shown in FIG. 71(e).

Thereafter, the game ends at timing t8, when the BB state ST3 ends. Therefore, at timing t8, a freeze period is started in which the start of a new game is forced to wait, as shown in FIG. 71(f). During the freeze period, an effect corresponding to the end of the BB state ST3 is executed. Thereafter, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 71(f) at timing t9, and the effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 ends as shown in FIG. 71(e).

Next, a case will be described in which the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the RB state ST4 and the ending effect is extended.

As shown in FIG. 71(a), at timing t10, which is a situation in the advantageous section SC2, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of ending compatible games, and in relation to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. When it is determined that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ending effect is started at the timing t10, as shown in FIG. 71(d). After that, the RB state ST4 is started as shown in FIG. 71(c) at timing t11, which is a situation where the ending effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 71(f), the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the RB state ST4 is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being obstructed by the freeze setting.

After that, as shown in FIG. 71(c), at timing t12, when the RB state ST4 is being executed, the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, as shown in FIG. 71(a). This is the end of the game. In this case, since the RB state ST4 continues, the ending effect will be extended.

Thereafter, the game ends at timing t13, when the RB state ST4 ends. Therefore, at timing t13, a freeze period is started in which the start of a new game is forced to wait, as shown in FIG. 71(f). The ending effect is executed during the freeze period. Thereafter, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 71(f) at timing t14, and the RB state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 71(c), and the ending occurs as shown in FIG. 71(d). The performance ends.

<About advantageous maintenance section>
Next, the advantageous maintenance section will be explained.

As already explained, by executing steps S2704 to S2709 of the ART state processing (FIG. 52), when the ART state ST9 ends, the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 up to that point becomes the number of consecutive games ( Specifically, if it is less than "1200"), the lottery process for generating an advantageous maintenance section is executed, and if an advantageous maintenance winning is achieved in the lottery process for generating the advantageous maintenance section, the advantageous maintenance in the main side RAM 74 is executed. A value corresponding to the number of advantage maintenance games (specifically, "10") is set in the counter, and the advantage section SC2 becomes the advantage maintenance section to be maintained. In the advantage maintenance section, the value of the advantage maintenance counter is decremented by 1 every time one game is played, and if the value of the advantage maintenance counter is "0" in the normal gaming state ST1, the value of the advantage maintenance counter is "0", Based on the affirmative determination made in step S1312 of the second control process (FIG. 33), the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed, and the advantageous section SC2 ends.

If a bonus win is established in the advantageous maintenance period, if the first game in the bonus state that is started by the winning is established in the advantageous period SC2, it is confirmed that the game will move to the ART state ST9 after the bonus state ends. . In this case, if the bonus state is due to a 3rd BB win, 4th BB win, or 1st RB win, which is a bonus win with no setting difference, the bonus state will start regardless of the playing section of the game in which the bonus win was achieved. This becomes an advantageous section SC2 in the game. Therefore, even if the bonus winning is achieved in the last game of the advantageous maintenance period, the starting game of the bonus state will be maintained in the advantageous period SC2, so it is certain that the transition to the ART state ST9 will occur after the bonus state ends. Become.

On the other hand, if the bonus state is due to the establishment of the 1st BB win, 2nd BB win, or 2nd RB win, which is a bonus win with a setting difference, the advantageous section SC2 will not be maintained or set with the start of the bonus state. . Then, if the bonus win is achieved in the last game of the advantageous maintenance section, the starting game of the bonus state will be in the normal section SC1, so even if the bonus win occurs in the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 will be confirmed. do not. On the other hand, when a bonus is won in the advantageous maintenance period, the effect is executed in a manner corresponding to the type of winning combination and the number of games played in the advantageous maintenance period. The processing configuration for controlling the execution of the performance will be described below.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the effect control process for the advantageous maintenance section. Note that the effect control process for the advantageous maintenance section is executed after the normal effect control process (FIG. 38) is executed.

First, it is determined whether an advantage maintenance command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3901). The advantage maintenance command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the advantage maintenance section is started when the ART state ST9 ends. When the advantage maintenance command is received (step S3901: YES), the start setting process of advantage maintenance effect is executed (step S3902). In the start setting process, an advantage maintenance performance table that enables execution of an advantage maintenance performance corresponding to an advantage maintenance section over the number of advantage maintenance games (specifically "10") is read out from the performance side ROM 93, and the performance side Store it in RAM94. The advantageous maintenance effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the advantageous maintenance effect table. Note that in the advantage maintenance performance on the image display device 63, although an image corresponding to the advantage maintenance performance is displayed, the remaining number of consecutive games of the advantage maintenance performance is not displayed. In addition, notification regarding the remaining number of games to continue the advantageous maintenance performance is not performed not only by the image display device 63 but also by the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62.

If the advantage maintenance effect is being executed (step S3903: YES), it is determined whether any bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 (step S3904). If any bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 (step S3904: YES), it is determined whether or not this is the last game of the advantage maintenance section (step S3905).

If it is not the last game of the advantage maintenance section (step S3905: NO), a bonus winning notification setting process is executed (step S3907), provided that the bonus winning notification is not being executed (step S3906: NO). In the bonus winning notification setting process, data is set so that an image corresponding to a bonus winning is displayed in a situation where a moving image corresponding to an advantage maintenance performance is being displayed on the image display device 63.

FIG. 73(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the bonus winning notification image G15. As shown in FIG. 73(a), the image display device 63 displays a bonus winning notification image G15 with the words "Make the bonus successful!". By displaying the bonus winning notification image G15 in this manner, it is possible to urge the player to win a bonus within the advantage maintenance section. The display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is ended when the display of a bonus type notification image G16, which will be described later, is started or when a bonus winning is established.

If it is the final game in the advantageous maintenance section (step S3905: YES), the winning data currently set in the main side RAM 74 is the winning data with a setting difference in winning probability, which is the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data. It is determined whether it is either data or second RB winning data (step S3908). The performance side MPU 92 can specify whether or not bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 based on the game start command transmitted from the main side MPU 72, and can also specify the type of the bonus winning data. can.

If the winning data is any of these (step S3908: YES), even if a bonus win is established in the final game of the advantage maintenance period, the game period is normal in the starting game of the bonus state corresponding to the establishment of the bonus win. Since it is in the section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined. Therefore, on the condition that the normal effect is not being executed (step S3909: NO), the normal effect start setting process is executed (step S3910). In the normal performance start setting process, a normal performance table that enables execution of the normal performance corresponding to the normal section SC1 in the normal game state ST1 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The normal effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table.

Unless a bonus winning is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintaining section with a set difference in winning probability, when a bonus winning is achieved in the advantageous maintaining section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. In this case, if the final game of the advantage maintenance section is set in a situation where bonus winning data with a difference in winning probability is set, the normal performance will be started at the start of that game. As a result, it becomes difficult to give the impression to the player that the transition to the ART state ST9 did not occur even though the bonus winning was achieved in the advantageous maintenance section.

If a negative determination is made in step S3908, a bonus type notification setting process is executed (step S3912) on the condition that bonus type notification is not being executed (step S3911: NO). In the notification setting process of the bonus type, it is possible to establish a bonus prize corresponding to the bonus winning data currently set in the main side RAM 74 in a situation where a video corresponding to the advantage maintenance performance is displayed on the image display device 63. Data settings are made so that an image showing the desired combination of symbols is displayed.

FIG. 73(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the bonus type notification image G16 in a situation where the third BB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74. As shown in FIG. 73(b), the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image G16 of "Red 7, Red 7, White 7" which corresponds to the combination of symbols that establishes the 3rd BB winning. By displaying the bonus type notification image G16 in this manner, it is possible to increase the probability of winning a bonus in which there is no set difference in winning probability in the final game of the advantage maintenance section. The display of the bonus type notification image G16 ends when a bonus win is established.

If the advantageous maintenance performance is being executed (step S3903: YES) and it is time to update the advantageous maintenance performance due to the start of a new game (step S3913: YES), the advantageous maintenance performance update setting process is performed. (Step S3914). In the update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referred to in the advantage maintenance effect table currently being referred to in accordance with the new start of one game. As a result, the content of execution of the advantageous maintenance performance changes depending on the number of games in which the advantageous maintenance performance continues.

Next, the progression of the advantageous maintenance section will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 74. FIG. 74(a) shows the execution period of the advantage maintenance section, FIG. 74(b) shows the execution period of the advantageous section SC2, and FIG. 74(c) shows the bonus winning data where there is no setting difference in winning probability. 74(d) shows the timing when bonus winning data with a setting difference in winning probability is set, and FIG. 74(e) shows the execution period of the bonus state. (f) shows the timing of winning the transition to ART state ST9, FIG. 74(g) shows the execution period of advantage maintenance effect, and FIG. 74(h) shows the execution period of bonus winning or bonus type announcement effect. , and FIG. 74(i) shows the execution period of the normal effect.

First, a case will be described in which a bonus is won with a setting difference in the advantageous maintenance section, and the bonus is won in a game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), at timing t1, which is the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous maintaining section is started as shown in FIG. 74(a), and the advantageous maintaining section is started as shown in FIG. 74(g). The performance begins. Thereafter, at timing t2, which is the timing at which a game earlier than the final game in the advantageous maintenance period is started, a bonus winning with a setting difference occurs as shown in FIG. 74(d). In this case, at the timing t2, a bonus winning notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 74(h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is started.

The player who confirms the bonus winning announcement image G15 wins the bonus in the game in which the bonus is won. As a result, at timing t3, which is the end timing of the game, the advantageous maintenance period is ended and the bonus state is started, as shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(e). Further, at the timing t3, the advantage maintenance effect is ended as shown in FIG. 74(g), and the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is ended as shown in FIG. 74(h). Thereafter, the first game in the bonus state is started at timing t4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74(b), since the advantageous section SC2 is maintained, a bonus win is established in the advantageous section SC2, and the starting game of the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at the timing t4, the transition to the ART state ST9 is achieved as shown in FIG. 74(f).

Next, a case will be described in which a bonus winning with a setting difference occurs in the advantageous maintaining section and a bonus winning is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintaining section.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), at timing t5, which is the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous maintaining section is started as shown in FIG. 74(a), and the advantageous maintaining section is started as shown in FIG. 74(g). The performance begins. Thereafter, at timing t6, which is the timing at which a game earlier than the final game in the advantageous maintenance section is started, a bonus winning with a setting difference occurs as shown in FIG. 74(d). In this case, at the timing t6, a bonus winning notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 74(h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(a), the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 is started.

Although the player has confirmed the bonus winning notification image G15, the final game of the advantage maintenance section is started at timing t7 without being able to win the bonus. In this case, even if the main MPU 72 is maintained in the advantageous maintenance section as shown in FIG. 74(a), at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 74(g) and FIG. 74(i), The advantageous performance is ended and the normal performance is started. Further, even if the advantage maintenance performance is ended and the normal performance is started in this way, the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 continues as shown in FIG. 74(h). Then, a bonus win is established in the final game. In this case, at timing t8, which is the end timing of the final game, the advantage maintaining section ends as shown in FIG. 74(a), and the advantageous section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 74(b). Further, at the timing t8, a bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 74(e). In the starting game of the bonus state, the normal section SC1 is used instead of the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, although a bonus prize is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not result in a winning.

As mentioned above, even if a bonus winning with a setting difference occurs in a game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section and the bonus winning notification image G15 is displayed, the bonus winning cannot be achieved before the final game of the advantageous maintenance section. If this is not possible, even if a bonus win is achieved in the advantageous maintenance section, the winning will not proceed to the ART state ST9. That is, in order to win the transition to the ART state ST9, it is necessary to predict the type of bonus winning data for the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 by a game before the final game of the advantage maintenance section. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous maintenance section.

Next, a case will be described in which a bonus with a setting difference is won in the final game of the advantage maintenance section.

In a situation where the advantageous section is as shown in FIG. 74(a) and the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIG. 74(b), the final game of the advantageous section is started at timing t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74(d), a bonus win with a setting difference occurs at the timing t9. If a bonus with a setting difference is won in the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the bonus winning notification image G15 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 74(h). Further, at timing t9, the advantageous maintenance effect is ended and the normal effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 74(g) and 74(i). Even if a bonus is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the advantageous maintenance section will not only end at the timing t10, which is the end timing of the final game, as shown in FIG. 74(a). As shown in FIG. 74(b), the advantageous section SC2 is ended. Further, at the timing t10, a bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 74(e). In the starting game of the bonus state, the normal section SC1 is used instead of the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, although a bonus prize is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not result in a winning.

Next, a case will be described in which a bonus is won with no setting difference in the final game of the advantage maintenance section.

In a situation where the advantageous section is as shown in FIG. 74(a) and the advantageous section SC2 as shown in FIG. 74(b), the final game of the advantageous section is started at timing t11. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74(c) at the timing t11, the bonus is won without any setting difference. If the bonus is won with no setting difference and it is the final game of the advantage maintenance section, a bonus type notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 74(h). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73(b), the display of the bonus type notification image G16 is started.

The player who confirms the bonus type notification image G16 wins the bonus in the game in which the bonus is won. As a result, at timing t12, which is the end timing of the game, the advantageous maintenance period is ended and the bonus state is started, as shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(e). Further, at the timing t12, the advantage maintenance performance is ended as shown in FIG. 74(g), and the display of the bonus type notification image G16 is ended as shown in FIG. 74(h). Thereafter, the first game in the bonus state is started at timing t13. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74(b), since the advantageous section SC2 is maintained, a bonus win is established in the advantageous section SC2, and the starting game of the bonus state is started in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, at the timing t13, the transition to the ART state ST9 is achieved as shown in FIG. 74(f).

<About gaming history management>
Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 72 to manage the game history and notify the results of the management will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75. Note that the management process is executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When one game is newly executed (step S4001: YES), the value of the total number of games counter 74a provided in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S4002). The total number of games counter 74a is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of the gaming state and the playing period. The total number of games counter 74a is made up of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games with an upper limit of the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of 256. Further, the value of the total number of games counter 74a is not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process of step S104 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to measure the total number of games played in a gaming hall over a plurality of business days.

If one game is newly executed (step S4001: YES) and the game is in the advantageous section SC2 (step S4003: YES), the value of the total number of games counter 74a is not only incremented by 1, but also the value of the main side RAM 74 is The value of the advantageous game number counter 74b provided in is incremented by 1 (step S4004). The advantageous game number counter 74b is provided separately from the advantageous continuation counter in the main side RAM 74, and even if the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed, the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0". Therefore, when the advantageous section SC2 occurs multiple times with the normal section SC1 in between, it is possible to measure the total number of games played in the plurality of advantageous sections SC2 using the advantageous game number counter 74b. . The advantageous game number counter 74b consists of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games with an upper limit of the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of 256. Further, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process of step S104 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to measure the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 over a plurality of business days in the gaming hall.

If a negative determination is made in step S4001, if a negative determination is made in step S4003, or if the process in step S4004 is executed, it is determined whether the game history management results are being displayed ( Step S4005). If the game history management results are not being displayed (step S4005: NO), it is determined whether an instruction to display the game history management results has been issued (step S4006). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is opened and the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is operated while the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied. As already explained, when the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 56, the clearing process in step S104 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). If the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the game history is being supplied, this means that an instruction to display the game history management results has been issued.

If it is determined that an instruction to display the game history management results has been issued (step S4006: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total number of games counter 74a is calculated (step S4007). That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result="value of advantageous game number counter 74b"/"value of total number of games counter 74a".

Thereafter, display start processing is executed (step S4008). In the display start process, display of the calculation result in step S4007 on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is started. In this case, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result in step S4007 by 100, the 10's digit is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-purpose display section 66, and the 1's digit is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. Display control is performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 so as to display the same information. The above calculation result is reported as a percentage. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "3" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66a on the left, and "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right. Ru.

However, in the case of display using only the two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b, the display contents on the dual-purpose display section 66 will differ depending on whether the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100" or "0". They end up being the same. Therefore, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "0" is not only displayed on each of the left 7 segment display 66a and the right 7 segment display 66b, but also on the advantageous section display. 67 is turned on and the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "0", "0" is not only displayed on each of the left 7 segment display 66a and the right 7 segment display 66b. Therefore, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off. In addition, when the management result of the gaming history is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is not "100", it is assumed that the current gaming section is the advantageous section SC2. Also, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off.

On the other hand, when the game history management results are displayed (step S4005: YES), the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and the payment detection sensor 51a It is determined whether an ON signal is received from any one of them (step S4009). When an ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 is being pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, an ON signal indicating that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is being pressed is received from any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If an ON signal indicating that medals have been inserted is received from the detection sensors 42a to 44a, and if an ON signal indicating that medals have been inserted is received from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, one of the credit input buttons 47 to 49 is pressed. If an ON signal indicating that the credit insertion detection sensor 47a to 49a has received an ON signal indicating that the payment button 51 has been pressed, or if an ON signal indicating that the payment button 51 has been pressed is received from the payment detection sensor 51a, step An affirmative determination is made in S4009. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether each ON signal is generated during the valid period.

That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a triggers the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop. Furthermore, an affirmative determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a is subject to bet setting or credit increase. Furthermore, an affirmative determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether or not the reception of ON signals from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a is subject to bet setting. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S4009 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 51a triggers the settlement of credited virtual medals.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4009, display end processing is executed (step S4010). In the display termination process, the display of the calculation results on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is ended, and the display contents of the dual-use display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 are changed to those immediately before the display of the calculation results is started. Display content. For example, if the display of the calculation result is started in a situation where the combined display unit 66 is displaying the number of game media awarded corresponding to the winning result of one game, the display of the number of game media awarded is restarted. let In addition, if the display of the above calculation result is started in a situation where information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, the display of the information corresponding to the stop order is started. Let it restart. Furthermore, if the display of the calculation result is started in a situation where nothing is being displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, it is assumed that nothing is being displayed. Furthermore, when the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on due to the display of the above calculation result in a situation where the advantageous section display section 67 is in the off state, the advantageous section display section 67 is returned to the off state. Furthermore, when the advantageous section display section 67 turns off as a result of displaying the above calculation result in a situation where the advantageous section display section 67 is in the lit state, it is returned to the lit state.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 76, a description will be given of how the gaming history management results are displayed using the dual-purpose display section 66. 76(a) shows a period during which the number of game media awarded corresponding to the winning result of one game is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 (display of the number of awarded game media), and FIG. 76(b) shows the period during which the dual-purpose display section 66 76(c) shows a period during which the front door 12 is in an open state. (d) shows the timing when the management display instruction is given, and FIG. 76(e) shows the reception of an ON signal from any of the various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, and 51a, which is the trigger for display termination. Indicates the timing.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), the front door 12 is opened as shown in FIG. 76(c) at timing t1 when the number of grants is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, and then at timing t2. As shown in FIG. 76(d), the reset button 56 is operated as a management display operation. As a result, management display is started on the dual-purpose display section 66 at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 76(b). After that, the front door 12 is closed as shown in FIG. 76(c) at timing t3 when the management display is continued. In this case, the present slot machine 10 is provided with a sensor for detecting whether or not the front door 12 is open. No display end trigger occurs. Therefore, even at the timing t3, the management display continues as shown in FIG. 76(b). Since the opening and closing of the front door 12 does not trigger the end of the management display, opening the front door 12 and operating the reset button 56 starts the management display on the dual-purpose display section 66 and advantageous section display section 67. In this case, the content of the management display can be confirmed with the front door 12 closed.

Note that the reel index sensor that detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has completed one rotation is also excluded from the sensors that generate the trigger for ending the management display. As a result, if the management display is started while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the management display will be terminated due to the rotation status of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, against the will of the gaming hall manager. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Thereafter, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 76(e), an ON signal is received from any one of the various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, and 51a, which triggers the end of the display. As a result, the management display is ended and the grant number display is restarted at the timing t4, as shown in FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among multiple levels of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player expects that the more advantageous setting value is set to be used. I will do it. Further, since there are a plurality of types of game states ST1 to ST9 and a separate game section exists, it is possible to diversify the content of the game progress. Further, in the normal section SC1, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur, but in the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 may occur, and both the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2 are in the normal game state. Since the player is configured to be able to stay in ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4, the player plays the game while expecting to be in an advantageous gaming state and in the advantageous section SC2.

In this case, the bonus state (BB state) corresponding to the bonus role (specifically, the role of the 1st BB winning data, the role of the 2nd BB winning data, the role of the 2nd RB winning data) whose winning probability changes depending on the set value. A transition to ART state ST9 may occur based on the occurrence of ST3 and RB state ST4) in advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, even if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to a set value occurs in the normal section SC1, a shift to the ART state ST9 does not occur. As a result, the player expects that a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination in which the winning probability fluctuates according to the set value will occur in the advantageous section SC2. Furthermore, according to this configuration, the probability of transitioning to ART state ST9 is affected by the probability of occurrence of the bonus state, so the probability of transitioning to ART state ST9 does not have to be directly varied according to the set value. , it becomes possible to indirectly vary the transition probability to the ART state ST9 according to the set value.

Even if you win a bonus combination in which the probability of winning varies according to the set value in the advantageous section SC2, the lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 will not be executed, and the probability of winning will change according to the set value in the advantageous section SC2. Based on the fact that the game in the bonus state corresponding to the fluctuating bonus combination has been executed, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, players who expect to transition to ART state ST9 not only pay attention to winning a bonus combination whose winning probability changes according to the setting value, but also enter the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in the advantageous section SC2. The focus will be on whether or not it has started. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A bonus state corresponding to a bonus role whose winning probability does not vary depending on the set value (specifically, a role of the 3rd BB winning data, a role of the 4th BB winning data, a role of the 1st RB winning data) has occurred in the advantageous section SC2. A transition to ART state ST9 may also occur in this case. This makes it possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 from becoming significant.

If a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the transition to the bonus state is used as an opportunity to shift the gaming section from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, a transition to ART state ST9 may occur. On the other hand, even if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability changes according to the set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the game section is maintained in the normal section SC1, so a transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. do not. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the former bonus state more than the latter bonus state.

By winning a non-bonus combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value in the normal section SC1, a lottery process to move to the advantageous section SC2 is executed, and by winning in the transfer lottery process, the game section changes to the normal section. Transition is made from SC1 to advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the transition probability to the advantageous section SC2 from changing depending on the set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the influence of the setting value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 from becoming significant.

Even if you win a bonus combination whose winning probability changes according to the set value in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 will not be executed, and the game will be played in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination in the advantageous section SC2. When is executed, the transition lottery process for ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, players who expect to move to ART state ST9 not only pay attention to winning the bonus combination, but also check whether the player is in the advantageous section SC2 if the game is executed in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination. The focus will be on whether or not. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if a bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to a set value is won in the normal section SC1 and a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination is started, the transition from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 does not occur. As a result, in order for a game in a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability varies depending on the set value to be executed in the advantageous section SC2, it is necessary to win the bonus combination in the advantageous section SC2 and to win the bonus combination in the advantageous section SC2. A game in a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination needs to be executed. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation of the advantageous section SC2, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the first game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination whose winning probability varies according to the set value is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section SC2, the bonus winning is established at an early stage, thereby making it easier to obtain an opportunity to execute the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9.

When a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability does not vary according to a set value occurs, even if it is a normal section SC1, it becomes an advantageous section SC2, and a transition lottery process to an ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, in the normal section SC1, the player expects to win a bonus combination whose winning probability does not vary according to the set value rather than a bonus prize whose winning probability fluctuates according to the set value.

Even after the ART state ST9 ends, the advantageous section SC2 is continued by being set as the advantageous maintenance section. Then, if a bonus win is achieved in the situation in the advantageous maintenance section and a game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus win is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. . As a result, the player expects to win a bonus prize in the advantageous maintenance period, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Even if a bonus win is achieved during the advantage maintenance period, if the game in which the bonus win is achieved is the final game of the advantage maintenance period, the bonus win is a bonus win whose probability of winning fluctuates according to the set value. If the game corresponds to the normal period SC1 in the game in the bonus state, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. On the other hand, if you win a bonus combination whose winning probability changes according to the set value in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, even if it is the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the advantageous combination corresponding to the advantageous maintenance section will be maintained. To perform normal performance without executing the performance. As a result, it becomes difficult to give the impression to the player that the shift to the ART state ST9 did not occur even though the bonus winning was achieved in the final game of the advantage maintenance section.

On the other hand, if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination whose winning probability does not vary depending on the set value occurs, the advantageous section SC2 becomes the advantageous section SC2 even if it is the normal section SC1. Therefore, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus combination is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. Therefore, if a bonus winning combination is won in which the probability of winning does not change according to the set value in the final game of the advantageous maintenance section, advantageous preservation effect is executed also in the final game. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of an event in which a bonus is won during the advantageous maintenance section and the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed, and it is possible to increase the attention of players to the advantageous maintenance section. becomes.

When the number of games played in the advantage maintenance section reaches the number of advantage maintenance games, the advantage maintenance section is ended and the advantage section SC2 is ended. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the timing for ending the advantageous maintenance section clear to the player.

Based on the fact that the ART state ST9 ends in a situation where the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is less than or equal to the number of games that can be continued, which is set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games by the number of advantageous maintenance games, the ART state ST9 ends. Set. This makes it possible to prevent an advantageous maintenance section from occurring even though the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 is close to the upper limit number of games.

In a configuration in which, when the precursor state ST6 is reached, an effect that makes the player expect a transition to the ART state ST9 is executed over multiple games, and a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the game ends. In the case of a false precursor state ST5, although a performance that makes the player expect a transition to the ART state ST9 is executed over a plurality of games, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the game ends. As a result, if an effect that makes the player expect to transition to ART state ST9 over multiple games is executed, the player will expect to transition to ART state ST9 afterwards, which will improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to achieve this goal. In this case, in the false precursor state ST5, the game section is set to the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to trigger a transition to the ART state ST9 even in the false precursor state ST5, thereby increasing the player's attention not only to the actual precursor state ST6 but also to the false precursor state ST5. becomes possible.

When a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs in the false precursor state ST5, the number of games executed in the false precursor state ST5 is also counted as the number of games executed in the subsequent advantageous section SC2. Then, when the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is ended. As a result, while it is possible to obtain the advantage of advantageous section SC2 in false omen state ST5, there is a disadvantage of continuation of false omen state ST5 regarding the upper limit number of games in advantageous section SC2. becomes possible.

If the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning occurs before the end of the false precursor state ST5, when the false precursor state ST5 ends, While the advantageous section SC2 ends, if the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell even if the false precursor state ST5 ends does not occur once, then it is false. The advantageous section SC2 is maintained even after the precursor state ST5 ends. As a result, in the case of advantageous section SC2, it is ensured that the notification of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the establishment of the first bell prize, will be issued once, so that the advantageous section SC2 becomes advantageous. In addition, it becomes possible to diversify the end timing of the advantageous section SC2 with respect to the end timing of the false precursor state ST5 depending on whether or not notification of the stop order occurs.

By winning a predetermined combination in chance state ST7, a transition lottery process to ART state ST9 is executed, and by winning a transition lottery in the transition lottery process, a transition to ART state ST9 occurs. As a result, the player expects the chance state ST7 to occur, and also expects to win a predetermined combination in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, by executing a chance effect in each game in the chance state ST7, it is possible to suitably increase the player's expectations for the chance state ST7. In this case, if the chance state ST7 is set in a situation where the false omen effect is being executed in the false omen state ST5, the chance effect is not started but the false omen effect is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the performance content up to the point of the false omen performance from being disturbed by the occurrence of the chance performance. Furthermore, even if the false omen performance continues without the chance performance being executed, the gaming state remains in the chance state ST7, so the profit of the chance state ST7 should not be lost. However, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

After the main state ST6 ends, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs, and also when a transition lottery process executed in the chance state ST7 results in a transition winning, a transition to the ART state ST9 also occurs. In this case, if the false omen performance is set to the chance state ST7 while the false omen performance is being executed as described above, the false omen performance is continued, so that the ART state ST9 is set during the false omen performance. A transition to ART state ST9 may occur. As a result, a transition to ART state ST9 can occur even in a situation where a false omen effect is being executed, and even when either a false omen effect or a real omen effect is being executed, ART It is possible to make the player expect the transition to state ST9.

If the false omen performance ends in the chance state ST7, the chance performance is started. This makes it possible to provide an opportunity for the chance effect to be executed. Furthermore, even if a chance performance is executed following the end of the false omen performance, the chance performance is similar to the case where the chance performance is started when the chance state ST7 is set. This continues for a number of games. Thereby, even if the chance state ST7 ends during the execution of the chance performance, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation while the chance performance is being executed.

By terminating the advantageous section SC2 based on the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 advantageous to the player is prevented from continuing excessively. becomes possible. In this case, the ending effect is executed based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of ending-compatible games set as the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the advantageous section SC2 is nearing its end. In addition, by making the player want to check the ending effect, it is possible to increase the player's desire to continue the advantageous section SC2, and furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of satisfaction when the ending effect is actually executed. It becomes possible to give. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a situation where the number of remaining continuation games in ART state ST9 is greater than or equal to the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of games in advantageous section SC2, and the number of games executed in advantageous section SC2 is greater than or equal to the number of ending compatible games. The ending performance will be performed. As a result, the ending effect will be executed in a situation where it is certain that the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a phenomenon in which the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 does not reach the upper limit number of games even though the ending effect has been executed.

In any of the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9, which are advantageous gaming states to the player, the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of ending-compatible games. The ending effect is executed based on a certain thing. As a result, the ending effect is executed in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and when the ending effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

If a bonus state occurs in a situation where an ending performance is being executed, the bonus performance (BB performance, RB performance) is not started and the ending performance is continued. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the ending effect.

If the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the ending effect is being executed in the BB state, the total number of game media given in the BB state at that time is If the number is below the specific reference number, the BB effect is started. Thereby, even in a situation where execution of the ending effect is prioritized, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the BB effect.

If the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the ending effect is being executed in a BB state, the total number of game media given in the BB state at that time is If the number exceeds a specific standard, the ending effect will continue. Furthermore, if the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the RB state is in place and the ending effect is being executed, the ending effect is continued. This makes it possible to extend the ending effect by utilizing the period during which conditions advantageous to the player continue. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that a situation in which the bonus state continues after the end of the advantageous section SC2 is a situation in which the ART state ST9 continues.

When the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the normal game progress based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the advantageous section SC2 has ended. In this case, if the bonus state continues even after the end of the advantageous section SC2 and the ending performance is continued, the progress of the game will not be stopped at the end of the advantageous section SC2. As a result, when the ending effect is continued, it is possible to prevent the flow of the ending effect from being hindered by the state in which the progress of the game is stopped, and it is also possible to prevent the bonus state from being interrupted after the advantageous section SC2 ends. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the continuing situation is one in which the ART state ST9 continues.

When the bonus state starts and ends, the normal game progress based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the bonus state is starting or ending. In this case, even if the bonus state is started or ended while the ending effect is being executed, the progress of the game will not be stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending performance from being hindered by the state in which the progress of the game is stopped due to the bonus state.

Regardless of the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table, or the 2nd RT mode lottery table, the index value IV with the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6" is the index value It is aggregated into index values IV in the front range that are serial numbers from IV = 1, and the index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values "1" to "6" are the index values IV of the last index value IV in the front range. The index values IV are aggregated into consecutive index values IV in the rear range from the next index value IV to the last index value IV. In this way, the index values IV with the same probability of winning between the setting values of "1" and "6" are aggregated in the front range, and the index values with different probability of winning between the setting values of "1" and "6" are aggregated into the front range. By consolidating the IVs into the rear range, it is possible to set index values IV that have the same winning probability and index values IV that have different winning probabilities between the set values "1" to "6" at the design stage of the slot machine 10. It becomes easier to make corrections.

In the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, different index values IV are set between each lottery table even if the winning data is set to be the same. . On the other hand, an offset table 111 is provided, and in the offset table 111, combinations in which the same winning data is set but different index values IV are set are aggregated into the same winning number. . The winning number is used in various processes after determining the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. As a result, it becomes possible to treat winning combinations with the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the execution of the lottery process, and winning in various processes. It becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration of the winning combination identification process.

The winning numbers in the offset table 111 are set as serial number information. Thereby, it becomes possible to suitably perform processing for grasping the winning combination in various processes after determining the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination.

The relationship between the index value IV and the winning number in each lottery table is set as an offset table 111 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load for determining the winning numbers based on the index value IV of each lottery table.

Of the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9, the number of games set in the display counter 126 is notified to the player, but the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is not notified to the player. Then, according to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127, a special add-on effect indicating that the number of games has been given to the player is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The stock game number counter 127 stores the number of games corresponding to the multiple addition triggers, and the stored number of games is collectively notified as an increase in the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a large number of games have been awarded at once, and it becomes possible to provide a sense of surprise.

Even in a situation where the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is the same, there are multiple types of selection modes for the number of games to be notified to the player as a special additional effect. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games to be notified is selected from the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127.

Even in a situation where the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is the same, there are multiple types of special additional effects to be selected. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of the special add-on performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Execution of multiple types of special additional effects may be decided at once. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which special add-on effects are performed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the special additional effect is executed, an increase in the number of remaining continuation games in the ART state ST9 is notified in each of the plurality of games. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the number of times that the increase in the number of remaining consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is notified, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

If the conditions for directly adding the number of games are met in a situation where the special additional effect is being executed, in addition to the notification of an increase in the number of remaining continuation games in ART state ST9 due to the special additional effect, the direct addition notification of the number of games will be made. executed. This makes it possible to provide surprise to the player regarding the notification of an increase in the number of remaining consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

The main side MPU 72 executes a process to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST9, and the production side MPU 92 executes a process to execute a production corresponding to the increase in the number of continuous games. As a result, the processing load on the main MPU 72 will increase even if the progress control of the ART state ST9 is performed centrally in the main MPU 72, and even if the performance corresponding to the increase in the number of consecutive games is performed in a complicated manner. It is possible to prevent this from happening. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably control the ART state ST9.

When the B loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added as the predetermined increased number of games in each game to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. In this case, based on the fact that the number of games played in the B loop exceeds the specified standard number of 21 games, the total number of games assigned to the B loop is notified to the player at once. A special freeze effect will be performed. As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to be notified of the award of a large number of games at once, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Even if the B loop is set in the main MPU 72, the effect corresponding to the setting of the B loop will not be executed until the special freeze effect occurs. This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the special freeze effect has suddenly occurred, and it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

When the special freeze effect is executed, the normal game progress based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special freeze effect.

A special freeze effect is executed based on the fact that the B loop ends in a situation where the number of games executed in the B loop becomes 21 games or more, which is a specific reference number of times. This makes it possible to execute a special freeze effect in a situation where a large number of games are given, and also to notify the player that the B loop has ended.

The specified reference number of times is set to a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing 1000 games by 50 games, which is the predetermined increased number of games. As a result, even if the number of games given in the B loop is used up during the B loop, the number of unused games of 1000 or more will be added to the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9. This makes it possible to notify the player of this fact.

When the A-loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added as the specific increased number of games in each game to the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. In this case, the number of games awarded in the A loop is temporarily added to the stock game number counter 127 without being notified to the player, while when the A loop is set, the number of games awarded in the A loop is 3 games, which is the number of specific effect games. Since the expected performance is executed throughout, it is possible to make the player expect how many games have been added to the stock game number counter 127 in a situation where the expected performance is being executed.

When the expected performance is executed over the number of specific performance games, the special additional performance corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 at that time is executed even if the A loop is not yet completed. As a result, while the expected performance is being executed, the player expects the content of the special additional performance that will be executed afterwards. Furthermore, it is possible to start the special additional performance earlier than in a configuration in which the special additional performance is not executed until the A loop ends.

Even in a situation where the expected performance is executed over the number of specific performance games, the A-loop ends when the end condition of the A-loop is satisfied. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the A-loop ends before the expected performance ends, and a situation in which the A-loop continues even after the expected performance is completed.

In a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that is notified to the player becomes 0 games, the value of the stock game number counter 127 becomes the first release standard. Depending on the value and the relationship with the second release reference value, the execution mode of the release effect that continues the ART state ST9 is different. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of the release performance according to the value of the stock game number counter 127, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is equal to or higher than the first release reference value, if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that is notified to the player becomes 0 games, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is At least a part of the value is notified to the player as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of security that the ART state ST9 will continue to some extent.

In a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 exceeds the second release reference value, if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9 that is notified to the player becomes 0 games, the value of the stock game number counter 127 Only a partial value of is notified to the player as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the frequency with which the release effect that notifies the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 is executed, and the number of remaining consecutive games in ART state ST9 that is reported to the player increases. Even if the game approaches 0 games, it is possible to make the player expect that the ART state ST9 will continue.

In a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is less than the first release reference value, if the number of remaining continuation games in ART state ST9 that is notified to the player becomes 0 games, the remaining continuation games in ART state ST9 The ART state ST9 is continued while not broadcasting the number. This makes it possible for the player to expect how long the ART state ST9 will continue.

The first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l are commonly used in a plurality of types of lottery processing. This makes it possible to suppress the number of random number circuits 101a to 101l, making it possible to simplify the configuration.

The first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l are targets for obtaining random numbers in a predetermined order. This makes it possible to prevent random number acquisition targets from being biased toward one random number circuit 101a to 101l. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that random numbers are acquired from the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer of the main side RAM 74, the processing configuration for specifying the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l from which random numbers are to be acquired is complicated. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

The number of lottery processes for acquiring random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is greater than the number of first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to increase the number of lottery processes while suppressing an increase in the number of random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is greater than the maximum number of lottery processes for acquiring random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in one game. As a result, in a configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are jointly used in multiple lottery processes, the same random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used in multiple lottery processes in one game. It becomes possible to prevent the information from being used in the lottery process.

In lottery processing for winning combinations, random numbers are not obtained from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, but rather from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. This makes it possible to strictly perform lottery processing for winning combinations.

The first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l all generate 8-bit random numbers. This makes it possible to use random numbers with the same number of bits even if the random numbers are obtained from any of the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l in one lottery process.

Each time one game is executed, the value of the total number of games counter 74a in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1, and each time one game is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the value of the advantageous games number counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is increased by 1. will be added. This allows the slot machine 10 to store and hold information for deriving the percentage of stays in the advantageous section SC2. Further, the percentage of staying in the advantageous section SC2 is calculated using the value of the total number of games counter 74a and the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b, and the result of the calculation is displayed on the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67. Is displayed. This makes it possible to grasp the percentage of passengers staying in the advantageous section SC2. Furthermore, if a termination trigger occurs in a situation where the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous section SC2 is displayed on the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, the display is ended. As a result, in a situation where there is no need to display the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to prevent the display from being performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67. Become.

Even if an ON signal is received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and payment detection sensor 51a, it is determined that an end opportunity has occurred. The display of the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous section SC2 on the shared display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is completed. This makes it possible to improve the operability for ending the display.

There is only one type of operation to start displaying the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous section SC2 on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67. This makes it possible to prevent the display of the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous section SC2 on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 from unintentionally starting.

Transmission of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a, transmission of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and transmission of ON signals from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a may occur when starting a game. In this case, based on the occurrence of an event that may occur when starting a game in this way, the calculation result of the percentage staying in the advantageous section SC2 is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67. is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played while the computation result of the percentage staying in the advantageous section SC2 is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67.

Even if an ON signal is received from the start detection sensor 41a in a situation where the operation of the start lever 41 is not enabled, the ratio of staying in the advantageous section SC2 on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 is displayed. The display of the calculation results is finished. As a result, by operating the start lever 41, the user can stay in the advantageous section SC2 in the dual-use display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 without waiting for the operation of the start lever 41 to become effective. It becomes possible to end the display of the ratio calculation results. This also applies to the stop buttons 42-44.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, a pseudo-bonus state exists as one type of bonus state. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

Similar to the ART state ST9, the pseudo-bonus state makes it possible to win the first bell if any winning number from "1" to "3" is set in the lottery process (Figure 16). The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced, and if a winning combination is won that allows the establishment of a promoted replay prize that promotes the gaming mode to the 1st RT mode or the 2nd RT mode, the promoted replay prize can be established. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, and if a winning combination is won that enables a falling replay winning that causes the gaming mode to fall to the normal mode or the first RT mode, it is possible to avoid the falling replay winning from occurring. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified. In other words, similar to the ART state ST9, the pseudo-bonus state basically progresses in a situation where the game mode is the second RT mode, and in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), one of "1" to "3" is selected. When the winning number is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is notified. Therefore, in the pseudo bonus state, the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is the same as in the ART state ST9. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games in the pseudo-bonus state and the ART state ST9 may be slightly different but substantially the same, or may be substantially different. good.

Similar to the ART state ST9, the pseudo-bonus state occurs under the condition of being in the advantageous section SC2, and ends when the remaining number of consecutive games is played. Further, by winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the pseudo bonus state, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the pseudo bonus state ends. Note that in a situation where the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been determined, such as the main precursor state ST6 or the preparation state ST8, and in a situation where the state is the ART state ST9, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state does not occur. The processing configuration regarding the pseudo bonus state will be described below.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing pseudo bonus generation management processing executed by the main MPU 72. It should be noted that the pseudo bonus generation management process is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

In a situation where the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4101: YES), in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16), "4" to "8", "15", " If the winning number "16" is set (step S4102: YES), a pseudo bonus state transition lottery process is executed. In other words, the transition lottery process for the pseudo bonus state is executed on the condition that it is in the advantageous section SC2. Further, the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is executed when a predetermined winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the pseudo-bonus state transfer lottery process, first, the pseudo-bonus transfer table corresponding to the winning number set in the current winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S4103). In this case, the pseudo-bonus transition table is set such that the winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of being won to transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S4104). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S4104 with the pseudo bonus transition table read out in step S4103, it is determined whether the transition to the pseudo bonus state has been won (step S4105). If the transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been won (step S4105: YES), the pseudo-bonus winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4106). The pseudo-bonus winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not a transition to a pseudo-bonus state has been won.

Next, the pseudo bonus management process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 78. Note that the pseudo bonus management process is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game has all stopped.

If the pseudo bonus win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4201: YES), the bonus precursor counter provided in the main RAM 74 has a value of "5" corresponding to the number of consecutive games in the bonus precursor state. ” (step S4202). By setting a value in the bonus precursor counter, the gaming state becomes a bonus precursor state. The value set in the bonus precursor counter is decremented by 1 each time a new game is executed, and when the value of the bonus precursor counter becomes "0", the game enters the bonus preparation state. Further, a bonus precursor start command indicating that a bonus precursor state has been entered is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4203). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the bonus precursor start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the performance corresponding to the bonus precursor state is executed.

If the value of the bonus precursor counter in the main side RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S4204: YES), the value of the bonus precursor counter is subtracted by 1 (step S4205). If the value of the bonus precursor counter after subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S4206: YES), the bonus preparation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4207). By setting the bonus preparation flag to "1", the gaming state becomes a bonus preparation state. Further, a bonus preparation start command indicating that the bonus preparation state has been entered is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4208). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the bonus preparation start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the performance corresponding to the bonus preparation state is executed.

If the bonus preparation flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4209: YES), it is determined whether or not the second RT replay winning has been achieved in the current game (step S4210). If the second RT replay win has been established (step S4210: YES), this means that an opportunity to shift from the bonus preparation state to the pseudo bonus state has occurred, so pseudo bonus start processing is executed (step S4211) . Thereafter, a pseudo bonus start command indicating that a pseudo bonus state has been entered is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4212). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the pseudo-bonus start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the production corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state is executed. Furthermore, information on the initial number of continuous games and the number of transfer condition games determined in a pseudo bonus start process to be described later is set in the pseudo bonus start command. Further, if the state is a pseudo-bonus state (step S4213: YES), a pseudo-bonus advancement process is executed (step S4214).

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus start process in step S4211.

First, processing is executed to determine the initial number of consecutive games in the current pseudo-bonus state. Specifically, the initial continuous game number table is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S4301). Only one type of initial continuous game number table is prepared, regardless of the setting values of "1" to "6" and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination that triggered the occurrence of the current bonus precursor state. In the initial number of continuous games table, a plurality of types of initial number of continuous games are set as the number of continuous games at the start of the pseudo-bonus state. FIG. 80(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial number of consecutive games table. In the initial number of continuous games table, as shown in FIG. 80(a), 33 games, 41 games, 49 games, and 50 games are set as the initial number of continuous games. In addition, in the initial continuous game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 50%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 30%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 10%. , 50 games, the selection probability is set to 10%.

Here, in the pseudo-bonus state, the first 25 games correspond to the execution period of the pre-branch effect, and in the pre-branch effect, a moving image is displayed on the image display device 63 along a predetermined story. Then, after the execution period of the pre-branch performance ends, the execution period of the branch performance occurs. The execution period of the branch performance is set to eight games, and as the branch performance, the image display device 63 executes a performance indicating whether or not a shift to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the pseudo bonus state. Specifically, regarding the branching effect, a video is displayed in which an ally character and an enemy character face off, and when a transition to ART state ST9 occurs, a video is displayed in which the ally character wins over the enemy character. If the transition to ART state ST9 does not occur, a video is displayed in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and if the notification of the presence or absence of transition to ART state ST9 is carried over to the branch performance of the next execution time. A video is displayed showing a tie between the friendly character and the enemy character.

If 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the execution period of branching effect will occur once after the execution period of the pre-branching effect ends, and if 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, branching will occur. If the execution period of the branching effect occurs twice after the execution period of the pre-branching effect ends, and 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the execution period of the branching effect will occur after the execution period of the pre-branching effect ends. The execution period occurs three times. The upper limit of the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch performance in the pseudo-bonus state is three times. Therefore, if 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, even if the remaining number of continuous games of the pseudo-bonus state is added during the execution of the pseudo-bonus state, the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect is not changed. On the other hand, if 33 games or 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, and the remaining number of continuous games of the pseudo-bonus state is added during the execution of the pseudo-bonus state, the total number of continuous games is limited to 3 times. As a result, the number of occurrences of the branch effect execution period may increase.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S4302). The contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the initial continuous game number lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it.

By comparing the random number obtained in step S4302 with the initial number of continuous games table read out in step S4301, the initial number of continuous games in the current pseudo-bonus state is selected, and the selected initial number of continuous games is used as the main number. It is set in the continuous game number counter 131 provided in the side RAM 74 (step S4303). That is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81, in this embodiment, a continuous game number counter 131 is provided in the main side RAM 74 in addition to the ART game number counter 121. The remaining number of consecutive games in the pseudo bonus state is set in the number of consecutive games counter 131. The main MPU 72 specifies whether or not the pseudo bonus state is in effect by checking the number of continuous games counter 131, and also specifies the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state.

Next, processing for determining the number of transition condition games is executed. The transition condition number of games is the number of consecutive games in the pseudo bonus state that is required in order to win the transition to the ART state ST9 in the current pseudo bonus state. In other words, when the number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the transition condition number of games, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends.

Specifically, as a process for determining the number of transition condition games, first, the transition condition game number table is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S4304). Only one type of transition condition game number table is prepared regardless of the setting values of "1" to "6" and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the winning combination that triggered the occurrence of the current bonus precursor state. A plurality of types of transition condition game numbers are set in the transition condition game number table. FIG. 80(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition condition game number table. In the transition condition game number table, as shown in FIG. 80(b), 33 games, 41 games, and 49 games are set as the transition condition game numbers. In addition, in the transition condition game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 5%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 10%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 85%. .

Here, all of these transition condition game numbers match the initial number of continuous games set in the initial number of continuous games table as shown in FIG. 80(a). In addition, 50 games are set as the initial number of continuous games in the initial number of continuous games table, and the 50 games are greater than any number of transition condition games set in the transition condition number of games table. There is. As already explained, when the number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the transition condition number of games, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends. Therefore, when 33 games are selected as the transition condition number of games, the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed when 41 games, 49 games, or 50 games are selected as the initial continuous game count, and the transition condition number of games is If 41 games are selected, the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed when 49 or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, and if 49 games is selected as the number of transition condition games, the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed. When 50 games are selected as the number of consecutive games, the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed.

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S4305). The contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the transition condition game number lottery process, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is written to the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get a random number. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, normal processing (Fig. ) Obtain the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304. I will do it.

By comparing the random number obtained in step S4305 with the transition condition game number table read out in step S4304, the number of transition condition games for the current pseudo-bonus state is selected, and the selected number of transition condition games is used as the main The transition condition is set in the game number counter 132 provided in the side RAM 74 (step S4306). That is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 81, in this embodiment, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a transition condition game number counter 132. The remaining number of transition condition games is set in the transition condition game number counter 132. Each time one game is played in the pseudo bonus state, the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 is subtracted by 1, and the remaining number of transition condition games stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 is used as the remaining number of transition condition games for the remaining continuation of the pseudo bonus state. When the number of games exceeds the number of games, the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state stored in the continuous game number counter 131 exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 (step S4307). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4307, the ART winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4308). The ART winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state.

Next, the game start processing during the pseudo bonus executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 82. Note that the process at the start of the game during the pseudo bonus is executed after the determination of the validity of the combination is completed in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" are set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) (step S4102: YES), "1" is set in the ART winning flag of the main side RAM 74. ” is not set (step S4402: NO), an additional lottery process for the remaining number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state is executed. In the additional lottery process, first, the first bonus table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S4403). In this case, the first top-up table is set so that the winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of winning an additional win, and the winning number with a low probability of winning is expected to have a higher number of additional games in the event of a winning number. The first addition table is set so that the number of values increases.

FIG. 83(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first addition table. As shown in FIG. 83(a), the first bonus table shows that if the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is "4" or "5", the probability of not winning the bonus is 90. %, and the probability that the number of additional games of 8 games will be selected is 10%. In some cases, the probability of not winning an additional prize is 70%, the probability of selecting an additional number of 8 games is 25%, and the probability of selecting an additional number of 22 games is 5%. Therefore, if the winning number set in the lottery process (Figure 16) is "8", the probability that there will be no additional winning is 10%, and the probability that the number of additional games of 8 games will be selected is 70%. %, and the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 52 games, the number of additional games of 102 games, the number of additional games of 202 games, and the number of additional games of 302 games is set to be 5% each, If the winning number set in the lottery process (Figure 16) is "15" or "16", the probability that the number of additional games of 8 games will be selected is 50%, and the number of additional games of 22 games is 32. The probability that the number of additional games for games, the number of additional games for 52 games, and the number of additional games for 102 games will be selected is 5%, and the probability that the number of additional games for 202 games and 302 games will be selected, respectively. It is set to be 15%.

As mentioned above, the number of additional games is set to 8 games or 22 games or more. If the number of additional games of 22 or more is selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at that point. In other words, while the minimum number of initial continuous games is 33 games, the maximum number of transition condition games is 49 games, so if 22 or more games are added, the remaining number of pseudo bonus status This is because the number of consecutive games will definitely exceed the number of remaining transition condition games.

On the other hand, even if the number of additional games of 8 games is selected, the transition to the ART state ST9 may not be determined. For example, if 49 games are selected as the transition condition number of games at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, even if the initial number of continuous games is 33 games and the 8-game addition occurs twice, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state remains. does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. In addition, if 49 games are selected as the transition condition number of games at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, even if the initial number of continuous games is 41 games and an 8-game addition occurs once, the remaining continuous games of the pseudo-bonus state The number does not exceed the number of remaining transition condition games. Under these circumstances, the transition to ART state ST9 may not be confirmed.As only 8 games are set as the number of additional games, the transition to ART state ST9 is not determined even if the number of additional games occurs. In this case, it is sufficient to simply add an execution period for a branch effect in a manner that does not correspond to the transition to the ART state ST9, making it easier to adjust the effect when the number of additional games occurs.

Returning to the description of the process at the start of the game during the pseudo bonus (FIG. 82), after reading the first add-on table in step S4403, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S4404). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the additional lottery process for the number of consecutive games in the pseudo bonus state, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is selected from the corresponding latch among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the random number written to the register. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, normal processing (Fig. ) Obtain the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer at the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304. I will do it.

As a result of comparing the random number obtained in step S4404 with the first add-on table read out in step S4403, if any number of add-on games is selected (step S4405: YES), it is stored in the continuous game number counter 131. Check whether the sum of the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state currently selected and the number of additional games selected this time is larger than the remaining number of transition condition games stored in the transition condition game number counter 132. Determination is made (step S4406). If a negative determination is made in step S4406, it means that the transition to ART state ST9 has not been determined yet, so the value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the number of continued games counter 131 (step S4407). . In this case, it means that the addition of 8 games has occurred in a situation where there is plenty of room for the number of occurrences of the execution period of the branch effect, so the execution period of the branch effect has been added once.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4406, it means that the transition to ART state ST9 has been determined. In this case, the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4408). After that, the value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main side RAM 74 (step S4409). In other words, at the stage when the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of additional games, including the number of additional games that triggered the confirmation of the transition, is not the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state, but the remaining number of games in ART state ST9. will be added as the number of consecutive games. Thereby, it becomes possible to make it easier for the ART state ST9 to continue for a long time.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag has already been set to "1" (step S4402: YES), an additional lottery process for the number of remaining consecutive games in the ART state ST9 is executed. In the bonus lottery process, first, the second bonus table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 16) is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S4410). In this case, the second add-on table is set so that the winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of winning an additional win, and the winning number with a low probability of winning is expected to have a higher number of additional games in the event of an additional win. The second addition table is set so that the number of values increases.

FIG. 83(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second addition table. As shown in FIG. 83(b), the second bonus table shows that if the winning number set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is "4" or "5", the probability of not winning the bonus is 90. %, and the probability that the number of additional games of 12 games will be selected is 10%. In some cases, the probability of not winning an additional prize is 70%, the probability of selecting the number of additional games of 12 games is 10%, the number of additional games of 22 games, the number of additional games of 32 games, the number of additional games of 52 games. The probability of selecting the number of additional games of 102 games and 102 games is set to be 5% each, and if the winning number set in the lottery process (Figure 16) is "8", the additional number of games will be selected. The probability of not winning is 10%, the probability that 12 games will be selected is 50%, the probability that 22 games will be selected is 10%, and 32 games and 52 games will be selected. The probability that the number of additional games will be selected is 5%, the probability that the number of additional games of 102 games will be selected is 10%, and the probability that the number of additional games of 202 games and 302 games will be selected is 5%. Each winning number is set to be 5%, and if the winning number set in the lottery process (Figure 16) is "15" or "16", the number of additional games of 22 games will be selected. The probability is 30%, the probability that the number of additional games of 32 games and the number of additional games of 52 games will be selected is 10%, and the probability that the number of additional games of 102 games will be selected is 20%, and the number of additional games of 202 games will be selected. The probabilities of selecting the number of games and the number of additional games of 302 games are each set to be 15%.

As described above, when the second add-on table is selected, the probability of winning an add-on is the same as when the first add-on table is selected. However, the expected value of the number of top-up games in the case of a top-up win is set so that the second top-up table is larger than the first top-up table. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of determining the transition to the ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state. Further, in the first add-on table, the minimum number of add-on games is 8 games, whereas in the second add-on table, the minimum number of add-on games is 12 games. Also from this point of view, it is possible to increase the advantage of determining the transition to the ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state.

Returning to the description of the process at the start of the game during the pseudo bonus (FIG. 82), after reading the second add-on table in step S4410, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S4411). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process are as already explained using FIG. 15. In the additional lottery process for the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9, the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is selected from among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Get the random number written to the latch register. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed, normal processing (Fig. ) At the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S304, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. I will do it.

As a result of comparing the random number acquired in step S4411 with the second add-on table read out in step S4410, if any number of add-on games is selected (step S4412: YES), the number of ART games in the main side RAM 74 The value of the number of additional games selected this time is added to the counter 121 (step S4413).

When the process of step S4407 is executed, when the process of step S4409 is executed, or when the process of step S4413 is executed, an additional generation command indicating that an increase in the number of games has occurred is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S4414). Information about the number of additional games selected this time is set in the additional generation command, and the current number of additional games is the addition of either the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state or the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST9. Information indicating whether it is targeted is set. When the production side MPU 92 receives the addition generation command, it controls the execution of the production in a mode corresponding to the current addition. This will be explained in detail later.

Next, the process for advancing the pseudo bonus executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

The pseudo bonus progress process is executed in step S4214 in the pseudo bonus management process (FIG. 78), and the pseudo bonus management process is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. Ru. In other words, the situation in which the process for advancing the pseudo bonus is executed is a situation in which one game has been played in the pseudo bonus state. Therefore, first, the value of the continuous game number counter 131 in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S4501), and then the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S4502).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the continuous game number counter 131 is "0" (step S4503). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, it means that it is the end timing of the pseudo bonus state. In this case, by determining whether the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", it is determined whether the transition to the ART state ST9 in the pseudo bonus state is confirmed (step S4504). .

If the ART winning flag is set to "1" (step S4504: YES), ART start processing is executed (step S4505). In the ART start process, information in the main side RAM 74 is set so that the ART state process in step S1207 is executed in the game end response process (FIG. 32). As a result, the gaming state becomes the ART state ST9. Further, in the ART start processing, information of 50 games, which is the starting number of games in the ART state ST9, is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, an ART start command indicating that the ART state ST9 is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4506). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the ART start command, it creates an ART start production table that enables execution of production corresponding to the start of ART state ST9, and an ART production that enables execution of production corresponding to ART state ST9. The table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. First, the execution of the performance is controlled by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART start performance table, and then the performance is controlled by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device At step 63, an ART start effect is first executed, and then an ART effect is executed. Further, when the production side MPU 92 receives the ART start command, it adds information of 50 games, which is the starting number of games in the ART state ST9, to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the production side RAM 94. As a result, 50 games are displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

Here, in the pseudo-bonus state, by confirming the transition to ART state ST9, the ART game number counter 121 of the main side RAM 74 is incremented when the addition condition for the number of games is satisfied, and the remaining amount in ART state ST9 is The number of consecutive games will be added. On the other hand, the number of additional games is added to the stock game number counter 127 of the performance side RAM 94 in the performance side MPU 92. At the start timing of the ART state ST9, the number of games added to the stock game number counter 127 is not shifted to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126. Therefore, the number of additional games added when the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state is not notified to the player at the start of ART state ST9, but at a timing in the middle of the ART state ST9. The player will be notified. This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the additional number of games is notified during the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (step S4504: NO), it means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state. In this case, a pseudo bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state has ended without transition to the ART state ST9 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S4507). When the production-side MPU 92 receives the pseudo-bonus end command, it creates a bonus-end production table that enables execution of a production corresponding to the termination of the pseudo-bonus state and a normal production corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1. A normal performance table to be executed is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. First, the performance is controlled by the performance MPU 92 according to the bonus end performance table, and then the performance is controlled by the performance MPU 92 according to the normal performance table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device At 63, a bonus end performance is first performed, and then a normal performance is performed.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 85, a description will be given of how the number of additional games is handled depending on the status of the ART winning flag in the pseudo bonus state. FIG. 85(a) shows the execution period of the pseudo bonus state, FIG. 85(b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 85(c) shows the state of the ART winning flag, and FIG. 85(d) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9. 85(e) shows the timing of addition to the continuous game number counter 131 of the main side RAM 74, and FIG. 85(f) shows the timing of addition to the ART game number counter 121 of the main side RAM 74.

First, a case will be described in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined in the pseudo bonus state.

At timing t1, a pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 85(a). Since the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is determined at the start of the pseudo bonus state, the initial number of continuous games is added to the number of continuous games counter 131 at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 85(e). However, since the initial number of continuous games is less than or equal to the transition condition number of games, the ART winning flag is not set to "1" at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, as shown in FIG. 85(c).

Thereafter, the top-up generation timing is reached at timing t2 and timing t3, which are in the middle of the execution of the pseudo-bonus state, as shown in FIG. 85(d). However, at any of these timings, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state does not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85(e), the number of additional games is added to the number of consecutive games counter 131 at each of timing t2 and timing t3. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 85(c), the ART winning flag is not set to "1" at either the timing t2 or the timing t3.

Thereafter, the pseudo bonus state ends at timing t4 as shown in FIG. 85(a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is not set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(c), the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur as shown in FIG. 85(b).

Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined in the middle of the pseudo bonus state.

At timing t5, a pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 85(a). Since the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is determined at the start of the pseudo bonus state, the initial number of continuous games is added to the number of continuous games counter 131 at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 85(e). However, since the initial number of consecutive games is less than or equal to the transition condition number of games, the ART winning flag is not set to "1" at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, as shown in FIG. 85(c).

Thereafter, at timing t6 during execution of the pseudo-bonus state, the additional generation timing occurs as shown in FIG. 85(d). By adding the number of additional games to the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state, the remaining number of continuous games exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at timing t6, the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(c), and the current number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 85(f). be done.

Thereafter, at timing t7, the additional generation timing occurs as shown in FIG. 85(d). In this case, since the ART winning flag has already been set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(c), the current number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 85(f). Ru.

Thereafter, the pseudo bonus state ends at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 85(a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(c), the state shifts to ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 85(b).

Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined when the pseudo bonus state is started.

At timing t9, a pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 85(a). Since the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo bonus state is determined at the start of the pseudo bonus state, the initial number of continuous games is added to the number of continuous games counter 131 at the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 85(e). In this case, the initial number of continuous games exceeds the transition condition number of games. Therefore, at timing t9, the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(c).

Thereafter, the additional generation timing is reached at each of the timing t10 and the timing t11, as shown in FIG. 85(d). In this case, since the ART winning flag has already been set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(c), the number of additional games at each of these timings is displayed in the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 85(f). will be added.

Thereafter, the pseudo bonus state ends at timing t12 as shown in FIG. 85(a). In this case, since the ART winning flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 85(c), the state shifts to ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 85(b).

Next, the effect control process for the pseudo bonus executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86. Note that the performance control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the pseudo bonus state.

If a pseudo bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4601: YES), a pre-branch performance start setting process is executed (step S4602). In the pre-branch performance start setting process, a pre-branch performance table that enables execution of the pre-branch performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The pre-branch effect table is set with information that enables execution of a pre-branch effect that continues for 25 games. By controlling the time of presentation by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the pre-branch presentation table, the pre-branch presentation is executed over 25 games on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

After that, the number of occurrences of the branch effect that occurs in the current pseudo bonus state is determined from the information on the initial number of continuous games set in the pseudo bonus start command, and the information on the number of occurrences of the branch effect that has been grasped is stored in the effect side RAM 94. It is set in the provided branch effect counter (step S4603). The performance side MPU 92 executes the branch performance until the value of the branch performance counter becomes "0" after the end of the pre-branch performance.

After that, by determining whether the initial number of continuous games set in the pseudo bonus start command exceeds the number of transition condition games also set in the pseudo bonus start command, ART is activated at the start of the pseudo bonus state. It is determined whether the transition to state ST9 has been determined (step S4604). If a negative determination is made in step S4604, a setting process for a branch effect for ART non-winning is executed (step S4605). In this setting process, if the number of branch performances currently scheduled to be executed is one, a defeat performance table in which the result of the branch performance is the defeat of the ally character is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, after the performance side MPU 92 finishes controlling the execution of the performance using the pre-branch performance table, it controls the execution of the performance using the defeat performance table. In addition, in this setting process, if the number of branch effects currently scheduled to be executed is multiple times, the draw effect table in which the result of the branch effect of the execution time before the final time is a tie is created for the number of execution times. A defeat performance table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94, and a defeat performance table in which the result of the final branch performance is the defeat of the ally character is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, after finishing the performance execution control using the pre-branch performance table, the performance side MPU 92 executes the performance execution control using the draw performance table for the number of minutes that the draw performance table is stored in the performance side RAM 94, and then The performance is controlled by the defeat performance table.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4604, a setting process for a branch effect for ART winning is executed (step S4606). The case where transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed at the start of the pseudo-bonus state is when 41 games, 49 games, or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, and if it is 41 games, branching is performed. The effect is executed twice, and if it is the 49th game or the 50th game, the branch effect is executed three times. In other words, when the process of setting a branch effect for ART winning is executed, the branch effect will be executed two or more times. In this case, in the setting process, a draw effect table in which the result of the branch effect of the execution time before the final time is a draw is read out from the performance side ROM 93 for the number of execution times and stored in the performance side RAM 94, A victory performance table in which the result of the final branch performance is a victory for the ally character is read out from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, after finishing the performance execution control using the pre-branch performance table, the performance side MPU 92 executes the performance execution control using the draw performance table for the number of minutes that the draw performance table is stored in the performance side RAM 94, and then Execution of the performance is controlled using the victory performance table.

Thereafter, the ART winning flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4607). The ART winning flag is a flag used by the production side MPU 92 to specify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been determined in the current pseudo bonus state.

In the performance control process for the pseudo bonus, when a new game is executed and it is time to update the pre-branch performance (step S4608: YES), a pre-branch performance update setting process is executed (step S4609). In the update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referred to in the pre-branch effect table currently being referred to in accordance with the new start of one game. As a result, the execution content of the pre-branch presentation changes depending on the number of consecutive games of the pre-branch presentation. In addition, in the update setting process, when it is the end timing of the pre-branch performance, execution control of the performance is started according to any type of branch performance table set as the next reference target in the performance side RAM 94. As a result, the branch performance for the first execution is started.

In the production control process for the pseudo bonus, if the addition generation command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S4610: YES), if the ART winning flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S4611 : NO), by determining whether information indicating that the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9 is subject to addition is set in the additional generation command received this time, ART is applied in the current game. It is determined whether the transition to state ST9 has been finalized (step S4612).

If a negative determination is made in step S4612, an adjustment process for branch effects for ART non-winning is executed (step S4613). The case where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed although the number of additional games has occurred means that the current number of additional games is 8 games. Therefore, in the adjustment process of the branch performance for ART non-winning, adjustment is performed so that one execution of the branch performance that results in a draw is added before the execution of the branch performance that results in a loss. Specifically, if the stage is before the performance is controlled by the defeat effect table, the draw effect table is stored in the effect side RAM 94 so as to be executed before the performance is controlled by the defeat effect table. Make me remember. In addition, if the execution of the performance is controlled by the defeat effect table, the contents of the defeat effect table will be modified to the content that will ultimately result in a draw, and the defeat effect table will be changed so that it will be executed after that. It is stored in the performance side RAM 94.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4612, adjustment processing of branch effects for ART winning is executed (step S4614). When an additional number of games occurs and the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed, the current number of additional games is added to the remaining number of consecutive games in ART state ST9. Therefore, in the adjustment process of the branch performance for ART winning, the content of the branch performance that results in a losing result is changed to the content of the branch performance that results in a winning result. Specifically, if the stage is before the execution control of performance using the defeat performance table, the defeat performance table is changed to the victory performance table. Furthermore, if the execution of the performance is controlled by the defeat performance table, the content of the defeat performance table is modified to the content that will ultimately result in a victory. Thereafter, the ART winning flag in the production-side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4615), and the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the addition generation command received this time is input to the stock game number counter 127 in the production-side RAM 94. (step S4616).

If the addition generation command is received in a situation where the ART winning flag is set to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4611. In this case, a value corresponding to the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command received this time is added to the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 (step S4616).

In the performance control process for the pseudo bonus, when a new game is executed and it is time to update the branch performance (step S4617: YES), a branch performance update setting process is executed (step S4618). In the update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the branch effect table (draw effect table, defeat effect table, or victory effect table) that is currently being referenced according to the new start of one game. . As a result, the content of execution of the branch performance changes depending on the number of consecutive games of the branch performance. In addition, in the update setting process, when the end timing of one branch performance is reached and there are still execution times of the branch performance to be executed, the update setting process is set as the next reference target in the performance side RAM 94. Execution control of the effect is started according to any type of branch effect table that exists.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 87, a description will be given of how the pre-branch effect and the branch effect are executed in the pseudo-bonus state. 87(a) shows the execution period of the pseudo bonus state, FIG. 87(b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, FIG. 87(c) shows the execution period of the pre-branch effect, and FIG. 87(d) shows the execution period of the pre-branch effect. indicates the execution period of the branch effect, FIG. 87(e) shows the timing at which the effect side MPU 92 receives the addition generation command, FIG. 87(f) shows the additional timing of one execution of the branch effect, and FIG. g) indicates the timing of modifying the content of the branching effect.

First, a case will be described in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined in the pseudo bonus state.

At timing t1, a pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 87(a). Furthermore, since 33 games have been selected as the initial number of consecutive games, at this point in time, the planned number of executions of the branch performance in the current pseudo-bonus state is one. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the transition condition game number is set to 41 games, so transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined at the start timing. Further, at timing t1, a pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 87(c).

Thereafter, at timing t2, when the pre-branch effect is being executed, an additional generation command is received from the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 87(e). In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional addition generation command is 8 games. Therefore, even if the number of additional games occurs, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state will not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 87(f), with the occurrence of the current number of add-on games as a trigger, the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect is added by one, and the planned number of executions of the branch effect becomes two.

Thereafter, the pre-branch effect ends at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 87(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 87(d), one execution of the branch effect resulting in a draw is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4, and from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6, a branch effect is executed that results in a draw. One execution of the resulting branch effect is executed. The pseudo-bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 87(a) at timing t6 when the branch performance resulting in the loss ends. In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been determined, the transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur as shown in FIG. 87(b).

Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined while the pre-branch effect is being executed.

At timing t7, a pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 87(a). Furthermore, since 33 games have been selected as the initial number of consecutive games, at this point in time, the planned number of executions of the branch performance in the current pseudo-bonus state is one. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the transition condition game number is set to 41 games, so transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined at the start timing. Further, at timing t7, a pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 87(c).

Thereafter, at timing t8 when the pre-branch effect is being executed, an additional generation command is received from the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 87(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 22 games. Therefore, due to the occurrence of the number of additional games, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 87(g) at the timing t8, the content of the branch performance corresponding to the defeat result scheduled to be executed is modified to a win result.

Thereafter, the pre-branch effect ends at timing t9 as shown in FIG. 87(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 87(d), one execution of the branch performance resulting in a winning result is executed from the timing t9 to the timing t10. At the timing t10 when the branch performance resulting in the winning result ends, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 87(a). In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 has been determined, the transition to the ART state ST9 is made as shown in FIG. 87(b).

Next, a case will be described in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined during the execution of a branch performance that results in a defeat.

At timing t11, a pseudo bonus state is started as shown in FIG. 87(a). Furthermore, since 33 games have been selected as the initial number of consecutive games, at this point in time, the planned number of executions of the branch performance in the current pseudo-bonus state is one. Further, while 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuous games, the transition condition game number is set to 41 games, so transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined at the start timing. Further, at timing t11, a pre-branch effect is started as shown in FIG. 87(c).

Thereafter, at timing t12 when the pre-branch effect is being executed, an additional generation command is received from the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 87(e). In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional addition generation command is 8 games. Therefore, even if the number of additional games occurs, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state will not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 87(f), with the occurrence of the current number of additional games as a trigger, the scheduled number of executions of the branch effect is added by one, and the planned number of executions of the branch effect becomes two.

Thereafter, at timing t13, the pre-branch effect ends as shown in FIG. 87(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 87(d), one execution of a branch effect that results in a draw is executed from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14, and then, at the timing of t15, a branch effect that results in a loss is executed. One run is started.

As shown in FIG. 87(e), an add-on generation command is received from the main side MPU 72 at timing t16, which is a situation in which the branch effect resulting in the loss is being executed. In this case, the number of additional games set in the additional addition generation command is 8 games. Therefore, due to the occurrence of the number of additional games, the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 87(g), the contents of the currently executed branch performance corresponding to the losing result are modified to the winning result.

Thereafter, at timing t17, the branch performance corresponding to the winning result ends as shown in FIG. 87(d). At the timing t17, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 87(a). In this case, since the transition to the ART state ST9 has been determined, the transition to the ART state ST9 is made as shown in FIG. 87(b).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In a configuration where the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the total number of games awarded to the player in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the transition condition game number, the transition condition game number is determined by lottery. As a result, in the case of a pseudo-bonus state, it is expected that a smaller number of transition condition games will be selected, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the pseudo-bonus state starts, the initial number of consecutive games is determined by lottery. If the initial number of consecutive games determined by the lottery exceeds the transition condition number of games, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. This makes it possible to diversify the patterns in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined in the pseudo bonus state.

An additional number of games may be awarded during the pseudo-bonus state. As a result, even if the total number of games awarded to the player does not exceed the transition condition number of games at the stage when the pseudo-bonus state starts, an additional number of games will be awarded during the pseudo-bonus state and the player will be transferred. It is possible that the number of games required will be exceeded. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the pseudo-bonus state.

If the number of additional games is given during the pseudo-bonus state but does not exceed the transition condition number of games, the number of additional games is used up in the pseudo-bonus state. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of consecutive games in the pseudo-bonus state increases.

If the number of additional games is awarded during the pseudo-bonus state and exceeds the transition condition number of games, the number of additional games is used up in the ART state ST9 that occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends. This makes it possible to easily increase the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9.

If the number of additional games is awarded in a situation where transition to the ART state ST9 has already been determined in the pseudo-bonus state, the number of additional games is used up in the ART state ST9. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state increases even though the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been determined, and the game in the pseudo-bonus state is prolonged. It becomes possible.

Until the total number of games awarded to the player exceeds the number of transition condition games, the additional lottery process for the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to a pseudo bonus state, and the total number of games awarded to the player exceeds the number of transition condition games. After the number of games is exceeded, an additional lottery process for increasing the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the ART state ST9. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute the additional lottery process for the number of games in a manner suitable for each situation. Furthermore, the earlier the timing of exceeding the transition condition game number, the longer the period during which the game number addition lottery process is executed in a manner corresponding to the ART state ST9 can be ensured.

Even if the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the transition condition number of games at the stage when the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined, the initial number of continuous games is used up in the pseudo-bonus state. As a result, even in a situation where it is certain that the ART state ST9 will occur after the end of the pseudo-bonus state, it is possible to play a certain amount of games in the pseudo-bonus state.

Note that instead of the configuration in which the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed when the number of games awarded to the player in the pseudo-bonus state exceeds the transition condition number of games, the number of games awarded to the player in the pseudo-bonus state A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is determined when the number of games becomes equal to or greater than the transition condition game number.

Further, instead of the configuration in which the initial number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined by lottery, the initial number of continuous games may be a fixed number of games. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the fixed number of games may or may not exceed the number of transfer condition games depending on the lottery result of the number of transfer condition games. Alternatively, the fixed number of games may be configured to ensure that the number of games does not exceed the transition condition number of games. In this case, unless an additional number of games is awarded in the pseudo-bonus state, the number of games awarded to the player will not exceed the transition condition number of games.

In addition, if the number of additional games is granted in a pseudo-bonus state, and the number of games awarded to the player exceeds the transition condition number of games after the granting of the number of additional games, the number of additional games becomes ART. Instead of the configuration in which the bonus is consumed in the state ST9, a configuration in which the bonus is consumed in the pseudo-bonus state may be used. This allows the pseudo bonus state to continue for a long time.

In addition, the number of additional games awarded when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state is added to the stock game number counter 127 and is not reported to the player, but at least The notification may be made by the start timing of state ST9. For example, in a game in which the transition to ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state, it is announced that the transition to ART state ST9 has been confirmed, and each time the number of additional games is awarded in the pseudo bonus state, the number of additional games is awarded. A configuration may be adopted in which a notification indicating that the number of remaining consecutive games in the ART state ST9 has increased in the game that has been played may be executed. In addition, in a game to which the number of additional games is given, it is not announced, but when the pseudo bonus state ends and ART state ST9 is started, the additional number of games in the pseudo bonus state is added to the initial number of continuous games of the ART state ST9. The remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9 may be notified after the number of games has been added.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the player is more advantageous in granting the number of additional games after the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state than before the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, either Even in the case where the number of additional games is given, the advantage regarding the granting of the number of additional games may be the same or almost the same, and the advantage before the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed is better than after the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed. It may be configured to be advantageous to the player regarding the provision of the number of additional games.

<Third embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the second embodiment in the configuration of the add-on table executed in the game number add-on lottery process. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the second embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the second embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIGS. 88(a) to 88(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the additional tables 141 to 144 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the additional tables 141 to 144 include a first additional table 141 shown in FIG. 88(a), a second additional table 142 shown in FIG. 88(b), and a third additional table shown in FIG. 88(c). 143 and a fourth additional table 144 shown in FIG. 88(d) can be used by the main MPU 72. Although the details will be described later, the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 are not stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 as they are, but the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 are stored in advance so that the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 can be created. Fourth compressed data 146 to 149 are stored in the main ROM 73 in advance.

The first add-on table 141 is referred to when the add-on lottery process is executed in a situation where transition to the ART state ST9 is not determined in the pseudo-bonus state. The second add-on table 142 is referred to when the add-on lottery process is executed in a situation where transition to the ART state ST9 is determined in the pseudo-bonus state. The third add-on table 143 is referred to when the add-on lottery process is executed as a direct add-on in a situation where the A loop and the B loop are not being executed in the ART state ST9. The fourth add-on table 144 is referred to when the add-on lottery process is executed as a direct add-on in a situation where the A loop or the B loop is being executed in the ART state ST9.

As shown in FIGS. 88(a) to 88(d), numerical information of an additional index is set in each of the first additional table 141, the second additional table 142, the third additional table 143, and the fourth additional table 144. In addition, the number of winning random numbers is set corresponding to the numerical information of the additional index for each group of winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16". The data area has been set. Specifically, for these data areas, values from "0" to "8" are set in consecutive numbers as numerical information of the additional index. In this case, one byte of data is allocated to each data area in which the numerical information of the additional index is set. In other words, in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, nine data areas "0" to "8" are set as numerical information of the add-on index, but all of these nine data areas are This is 1 byte of data.

The numerical information of the add-on index is numerical information for specifying the actual number of add-on games by the main MPU 72. An index correspondence table 145 is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 as data for specifying the actual number of add-on games with respect to the numerical information of the add-on index. FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index correspondence table 145. Numerical information of the add-on index of "0" corresponds to the fact that the number of add-on games is 0 games, that is, the result is a loss in the add-on lottery process. The numerical information of the add-on index "1" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 8 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "2" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 12 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "3" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 22 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "4" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 32 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "5" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 52 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "6" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 102 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "7" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 202 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "8" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 302 games.

As mentioned above, the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 do not directly set the numerical information of the number of add-on games, but set the numerical information of the add-on index, and use the index correspondence table 145 to set the numerical information of the add-on index. By deriving the numerical information of the number of add-on games from the information, it is possible to suppress the data capacity of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144. In other words, the numerical information on the number of additional games is 302 games at most, and to represent the numerical information in binary, 9 bits are required, and in byte units, 2 bytes are required. Then, in order to standardize the process of adding up the number of add-on games, if we try to make the data capacity of the data area where the numerical information of each number of add-on games is set constant, the numerical information of the maximum number of add-on games Therefore, the data capacity of each data area in which numerical information of the number of additional games is set is 2 bytes. In this case, if the numerical information of each number of add-on games is set as is in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, 72 bytes are required (2 bytes x 9 pieces x 4 pieces). On the other hand, in the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, numerical information of an add-on index having a data capacity of 1 byte is set, and numerical information of the actual number of add-on games is derived from the numerical information of the add-on index. When using the index correspondence table 145 for the index table 145, 1 byte x 9 x 4 (36 bytes) is required as the data capacity to set the numerical information of the additional index in the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144. At the same time, in the index correspondence table 145, 27 bytes (1 byte x 9 pieces + 2 bytes x 9 pieces) are required, resulting in a total of 63 bytes. These 63 bytes are smaller than the 72 bytes that would be required if the numerical information of each number of additional games is set as is in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 145.

In detail, regarding the data areas in which the numbers of winning random numbers in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 are set, as shown in FIGS. 88(a) to 88(d), "4" to "8", The winning numbers "15" and "16" are divided into a first group containing the winning numbers "4" and "5", a second group containing the winning numbers "6" and "7", and a "8" group. '' and the fourth group includes winning numbers ``15'' and ``16''. Further, in this embodiment, dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d for 16-bit random numbers are used in the additional lottery process. In each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, the numerical information of each add-on index in the first group is the number of winning random numbers for winning, and the numerical information of each add-on index is determined in the second group. The number of winning random numbers for winning, the number of winning random numbers for numerical information of each additional index in the third group to win, and the number of winning random numbers for numerical information of each additional index in the fourth group The number of winning random numbers for is set.

Here, in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, the type of numerical information of the add-on index in which the number of winning random numbers of 1 or more is set is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88(a), in the first addition table 141, the numerical information of the addition indices "0", "1", "6" to "8" includes the first to fourth groups. The number of winning random numbers that is 1 or more is set in one of the groups, whereas the numerical information of the additional index of "2" to "5" includes the number of winning random numbers in any of the 1st to 4th groups. The number is set to 0. Further, as shown in FIG. 88(b), in the second add-on table 142, the number of winning random numbers that are 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups is set in the numerical information of the add-on index other than "2". On the other hand, in the numerical information of the additional index "2", the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in all of the first to fourth groups. In addition, as shown in FIG. 88(c), in the third addition table 143, the numerical information of the addition indices "0", "2" to "4" has 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups. While the number of winning random numbers is set as 0, the number of winning random numbers in any of the 1st to 4th groups is 0 in the numerical information of the additional index of "1", "5" to "8". It is set to . In addition, as shown in FIG. 88(d), in the fourth add-on table 144, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "6" to "8" includes winning random numbers that are 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups. While the number of winning random numbers is set, the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the additional indexes "0" to "5".

As described above, in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, when there is numerical information of an add-on index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups. However, since the numerical information of "0" to "8" is commonly set as the numerical information of the additional index in any of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144, the first ~The index correspondence table 145 can be used in common in the fourth additional tables 141 to 144. In other words, if numerical information of a non-common additional index is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144, the index correspondence table 145 is However, since the numerical information of the common add-on index is set in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 as described above, it is possible to use one type of index correspondence table 145 in common. It becomes possible to use it. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the index correspondence table 145, and also makes it possible to read out the common index correspondence table 145 even when using any of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading out the index correspondence table 145.

During the top-up lottery process, the table to be referenced among the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144 is developed in the main side RAM 74, but the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144 are stored in the main side ROM 73. are not stored as they are, but as first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149. As already explained, in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, there is numerical information of an add-on index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups. There is. Therefore, in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the numerical information of the additional index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 does not have data indicating the number of winning random numbers.

The first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 will be explained in detail below. FIGS. 90(a) to 90(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149.

The first compressed data 146 is data for creating the first additional table 141, the second compressed data 147 is data for creating the second additional table 142, and the third compressed data 148 is data for creating the third additional table 142. The fourth compressed data 149 is data for creating the fourth additional table 144. As shown in FIGS. 90(a) to 90(d), header data and actual data are set in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149.

The header data is set with information indicating which additional index numerical information corresponds to the actual data set in the corresponding compressed data 146 to 149. In addition, in the actual data, the number of winning random numbers of one or more in any of the 1st to 4th groups is set. Regarding the numerical information of the additional index, the winning random numbers set in each of the 1st to 4th groups. Information on the number of items is set. In this case, information on the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of multiple additional indexes is set as actual data, but each piece of information is arranged in ascending order according to the numerical information of the additional indexes. There is.

In detail, regarding the first compressed data 146, as shown in FIG. "0", "1", "6", "7", and "8" are set as information that allows the numerical information of the added index to be specified. In addition, five units of actual data are set as actual data, and the first unit of actual data set following the header data has the numerical information of the addition index of "0" in the first addition table 141. Information about the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups is set. In addition, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "1" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "6" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "7" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Furthermore, the fifth unit actual data set following the fourth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "8" in the first addition table 141. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When executing the top-up lottery process using the first top-up table 141, the first top-up table 141 is stored in the main-side RAM 74 by executing a decoding process on the first compressed data 146 read from the main-side ROM 73. Let it unfold. In this case, first, the numerical information of the additional indexes "0" to "8" is written into the main side RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit of real data arranged in the real data is written in order from the numerical information of the smallest value among the numerical information of the said additional index in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main side RAM 74. As a result, information on the number of winning random numbers is set for each of the 1st to 4th groups for the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0", "1", "6", "7", and "8". becomes. After that, it corresponds to the fact that the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups is 0 for the numerical information of the additional index written in the main side RAM 74 that is not set in the header data. Configure information settings. As a result, the first additional table 141 is developed in the main RAM 74 using the first compressed data 146.

In detail, regarding the second compressed data 147, as shown in FIG. 90(b), 2-byte header data is set as the first data, and there is no actual data in the second compressed data 147 in the header data. ``0'', ``2'', ``3'', ``4'', ``5'', ``6'', ``7'', and ``8'' are set as information that makes it possible to specify the numerical information of the added index. . In addition, eight unit actual data are set as the actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data has the numerical information of the addition index "0" in the second addition table 142. Information about the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups is set. In addition, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "2" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "3" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Furthermore, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "4" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Furthermore, the fifth unit actual data set following the fourth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "5" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the sixth unit actual data set following the fifth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "6" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Furthermore, the seventh unit actual data set following the sixth unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "7" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. Furthermore, the eighth unit actual data set following the seventh unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "8" in the second addition table 142. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When executing the top-up lottery process using the second top-up table 142, the second top-up table 142 is stored in the main-side RAM 74 by executing a decoding process on the second compressed data 147 read from the main-side ROM 73. Let it unfold. In this case, first, the numerical information of the additional indexes "0" to "8" is written into the main side RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit of real data arranged in the real data is written in order from the numerical information of the smallest value among the numerical information of the said additional index in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main side RAM 74. As a result, the numerical information of the additional indexes of "0", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8" will be changed for each of the 1st to 4th groups. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set for . After that, it corresponds to the fact that the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups is 0 for the numerical information of the additional index written in the main side RAM 74 that is not set in the header data. Configure information settings. As a result, the second additional table 142 is developed in the main RAM 74 using the second compressed data 147.

Regarding the third compressed data 148, in detail, as shown in FIG. "0", "2", "3", and "4" are set as information that allows the numerical information of the added index to be specified. In addition, four unit actual data are set as the actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data has the numerical information of the addition index "0" in the third addition table 143. Information about the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups is set. In addition, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "2" in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "3" in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "4" in the third addition table 143. Information on the number of winning random numbers is set.

When executing the top-up lottery process using the third top-up table 143, the third top-up table 143 is stored in the main-side RAM 74 by executing a decoding process on the third compressed data 148 read from the main-side ROM 73. Let it unfold. In this case, first, the numerical information of the additional indexes "0" to "8" is written into the main side RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit of real data arranged in the real data is written in order from the numerical information of the smallest value among the numerical information of the said additional index in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main side RAM 74. As a result, information on the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups is set for the numerical information of the additional indexes "0", "2", "3", and "4". After that, it corresponds to the fact that the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups is 0 for the numerical information of the additional index written in the main side RAM 74 that is not set in the header data. Configure information settings. As a result, the third additional table 143 is developed in the main RAM 74 using the third compressed data 148.

In detail, regarding the fourth compressed data 149, as shown in FIG. 90(d), 2-byte header data is set as the first data, and the actual data exists in the header data in the fourth compressed data 149. ``6'', ``7'', and ``8'' are set as information that allows the numerical information of the additional index to be specified. In addition, three unit actual data are set as the actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data has the numerical information of the addition index "6" in the fourth addition table 144. Information about the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups is set. In addition, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "7" in the fourth addition table 144. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set. In addition, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the addition index "8" in the fourth addition table 144. Information about the number of winning random numbers is set.

When executing the top-up lottery process using the fourth top-up table 144, the fourth top-up table 144 is stored in the main-side RAM 74 by executing a decoding process on the fourth compressed data 149 read from the main-side ROM 73. Let it unfold. In this case, first, the numerical information of the additional indexes "0" to "8" is written into the main side RAM 74 in ascending order. After that, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit of real data arranged in the real data is written in order from the numerical information of the smallest value among the numerical information of the said additional index in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main side RAM 74. As a result, information on the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups is set for the numerical information of the additional indexes "6", "7", and "8". After that, it corresponds to the fact that the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups is 0 for the numerical information of the additional index written in the main side RAM 74 that is not set in the header data. Configure information settings. As a result, the fourth additional table 144 is developed in the main RAM 74 using the fourth compressed data 149.

In a configuration where the random number used in the additional lottery process is 16 bits, from the viewpoint of simplifying the process when specifying the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of each additional index in the additional lottery process, the first ~In the fourth addition tables 141 to 144, the data capacity of each data area in which the number of winning random numbers is set is set to 2 bytes. The first to fourth groups are set in the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144, and each of the first to fourth groups corresponds to the numerical information of the addition index "0" to "8". Since the data representing the number of winning random numbers is set, the data capacity for specifying the information on the number of winning random numbers in any of the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 is 2 bytes x 9. x 4 pieces = 72 bytes. Further, the first to fourth addition tables 141 to 144 have numerical information of addition indexes "0" to "8" set therein, and each of these numerical information has a data capacity of 1 byte. Therefore, the data capacity of each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 is 81 bytes (72 bytes + 1 byte x 9). On the other hand, the data capacity of the first compressed data 146 is 42 bytes, which is the sum of 2 bytes of header data and 2 bytes x 4 pieces x 5 pieces of actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the first addition table 141. . Further, the data capacity of the second compressed data 147 is 66 bytes, which is the sum of 2 bytes of header data and 2 bytes x 4 pieces x 8 pieces of actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the second addition table 142 . Further, the data capacity of the third compressed data 148 is 34 bytes, which is the sum of 2 bytes of header data and 2 bytes x 4 pieces x 4 pieces of actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the third addition table 143 . Further, the data capacity of the fourth compressed data 149 is 26 bytes, which is the sum of 2 bytes of header data and 2 bytes x 4 pieces x 3 pieces of actual data, which is smaller than the data capacity of the fourth addition table 144 . This makes it possible to use the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 while suppressing the required data capacity in the main ROM 73.

Next, the add-on lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 using the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91. Note that the additional lottery process is executed when one game is newly started after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed and before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating.

First, among the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the compressed data 146 to 149 corresponding to the current gaming situation are read from the main side ROM 73 (step S4701). Thereafter, the numerical information of the additional indexes "0" to "8" is written into the main side RAM 74 in ascending order (step S4702).

Thereafter, the numerical information of the additional index set in the header data of the compressed data 146 to 149 read out in step S4701 is read out, and the numerical information of the additional index is read out in order from the smallest value in step S4701. Each unit of real data arranged in the real data of the read compressed data 146 to 149 is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index already written in the main side RAM 74 (step S4703). After that, among the numerical information of the additional index written in the main side RAM 74, the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups corresponds to 0 for numerical information that is not set in the header data. Information settings are performed (step S4704).

After that, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S4705). In the random number acquisition process, 16-bit random numbers updated in the dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d corresponding to the additional lottery process are acquired.

Thereafter, additional index acquisition processing is executed (step S4706). FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the additional index acquisition process. Among the first to fourth groups in the add-on tables 141 to 144 developed in the main side RAM 74 in steps S4701 to S4704, the group corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current hand is selected. Understand (step S4801). After that, "9" corresponding to the maximum value of the numerical information of the additional index is set in the repetition counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S4802). Further, the value of the 16-bit random number obtained in step S4705 is set in the judgment value counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S4803).

After that, in the group grasped in step S4801 among the additional tables 141 to 144 developed in the main RAM 74 in steps S4701 to S4704, the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the value of the repetition counter in the main RAM 74 corresponds to Then, the set number of winning random numbers is read out (step S4804). In this case, for example, if the value of the repeat counter is "9", the number of winning random numbers set corresponding to the numerical information of the add-on index of "8" is read, and if the value of the repeat counter is "5", the number of winning random numbers is read out. The number of winning random numbers set in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index of "4" is read out, and if the value of the repeat counter is "1", the number of winning random numbers is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the additional index of "0". Read the number of winning random numbers. Then, the determined number of winning random numbers is added to the determination value counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S4805).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the determination value counter after the addition exceeds "65535", which is the maximum value of the 16-bit random number (step S4806). If a negative determination is made in step S4806, it means that the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the current value of the repetition counter has not been won. In this case, the value of the repetition counter of the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S4807), and on the condition that the value of the repetition counter after the 1 subtraction is not "0" (step S4808: NO), after the 1 subtraction The processes of steps S4804 to S4806 are executed for the value of the repetition counter in .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4806, it means that the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the current value of the repetition counter has been won. Therefore, the numerical information of the additional index corresponding to the current value of the repetition counter is acquired (step S4809). For example, if the value of the repetition counter is "9", "8" is obtained as the numerical information of the additional index, and if the value of the repetition counter is "5", "4" is obtained as the numerical information of the additional index, and the repetition is repeated. If the value of the counter is "1", "0" is acquired as numerical information of the additional index.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4808, an affirmative determination is supposed to be made in step S4806 at the timing when one of the numerical information of the additional index "0" to "8" is selected. First, assuming that no positive determination is made in step S4806 for any of the numerical information of the additional indexes "0" to "8", processing is executed to cause an abnormality notification to be executed (step S4810). . This makes it possible to notify the gaming hall manager if electrical noise or a problem with the set value of the add-on table occurs.

Returning to the explanation of the add-on lottery process (FIG. 91), after the add-on index acquisition process is executed in step S4706, the index correspondence table 145 is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S4707). Thereafter, information on the number of add-on games corresponding to the information on the add-on index acquired in step S4706 is read from the index correspondence table 145 (step S4708). Then, the read information on the number of additional games is added to the counter that is currently being added (step S4709).

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Even if there is numerical information of an add-on index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, , numerical information of "0" to "8" is commonly set as the numerical information of the additional index in all of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144. This makes it possible to use the index correspondence table 145 in common among the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144. In other words, if numerical information of non-common additional indexes is set in each of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144, the index correspondence table 145 is However, since the numerical information of the common add-on index is set in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 as described above, it is possible to use one type of index correspondence table 145 in common. It becomes possible to use it. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the index correspondence table 145, and also makes it possible to read out the common index correspondence table 145 even when using any of the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading out the index correspondence table 145.

During the top-up lottery process, the table to be referenced among the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144 is developed in the main side RAM 74, but the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144 are stored in the main side ROM 73. are not stored as they are, but as first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149. As already explained, in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, there is numerical information of an add-on index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in any of the first to fourth groups. There is. On the other hand, in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the numerical information of the additional index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 has data indicating the number of winning random numbers. Not yet. This makes it possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the main ROM 73.

Note that even if there is a lottery table in which the number of winning random numbers is not set in the predetermined index value as described above, the additional lottery process is configured to standardize the index value among multiple lottery tables. It may be applied to other lottery table groups instead of the table group for the lottery.

Further, the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 are not limited to the configuration stored in the main side ROM 73 as the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, and the first to fourth additional tables 141 to 144 are 144 may be stored as is in the main ROM 73.

Further, the data configurations of the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 are not limited to those described above, and the specific data configurations may be arbitrary as long as the data can be compressed.

<Fourth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the random number acquisition process in the main MPU 72 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment.

In steps S4901 to S4908, the same processes as steps S401 to S408 of the random number acquisition process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment are executed. As a result, when the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are targets for obtaining random numbers, the 16-bit random numbers updated in the corresponding dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are obtained.

If the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used for random numbers (step S4907: NO), the value of the random number pointer provided in the main side RAM 74 is first incremented by 1 (step S4909). The random number pointer is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used for random numbers, and it stores numerical information from "0" to "11". It can be taken. Then, when the random number pointer is "0", the first shared random number circuit 101a becomes the target for using random numbers, and when the random number pointer is "1", the second shared random number circuit 101b becomes the target for using random numbers, When the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c is the target for using random numbers, and when the random number pointer is "m", the m+1st shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used for random numbers. target (m is an integer greater than or equal to 0).

If the value of the random number pointer after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value "11" (step S4910: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S4911). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is incremented by 1 each time it is used for lottery processing in the numerical range of "0" to "11", and when it exceeds the maximum value of the numerical range, it becomes the minimum value. It will be looped back. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used as random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a are to be used in a predetermined order each time they are to be used in lottery processing. .about.101l are sequentially changed, and after the last common random number circuits 101a to 101l are used, the first common random number circuits 101a to 101l are used again.

If a negative determination is made in step S4910 or if the process in step S4911 is executed, the random numbers of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are the current random numbers. Numerical information of a random number is acquired from the latch register written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the game (step S4912).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the random number to be obtained this time is a 16-bit random number (step S4913). That is, in this embodiment, not only 8-bit random numbers but also 16-bit random numbers may be obtained using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. If a negative determination is made in step S4913, this means that the random number to be acquired this time is an 8-bit random number, and thus the present random number acquisition process is ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4913, it is determined whether a 16-bit random number has been acquired (step S4914). If a negative determination is made in step S4914, by re-executing the processes in steps S4909 to S4912, the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l from which the previously acquired 8-bit random numbers are to be acquired are processed in the next acquisition order. An 8-bit random number is additionally obtained from a certain shared random number circuit 101a to 101l. As a result, a total of 16-bit random numbers are obtained, including the previously obtained 8-bit random numbers and the newly obtained 8-bit random numbers.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is possible to obtain not only 8-bit random numbers but also 16-bit random numbers by using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to diversify the types of lottery processing in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used.

In addition, when obtaining an 8-bit random number, an 8-bit random number is obtained from one of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and when obtaining a 16-bit random number, the first to twelfth shared random number circuit is used. The configuration is such that 8-bit random numbers are obtained from two of the random number circuits 101a to 101l, respectively. This makes it possible to obtain 16-bit random numbers while using the processing configuration for obtaining 8-bit random numbers.

<Fifth embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration for supplying clock signals to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 94 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the random number circuit group 100 in this embodiment.

In the random number circuit group 100, the configuration regarding the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d is the same as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are provided with a common shared clock circuit 104, and the shared clock circuit 104 is connected to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a. Although the configuration is such that a clock signal is output to all of the common random number circuits 101a to 101l, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are provided. The output cycles of the clock signals of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are different from each other and are set so as not to be a multiple of each other. This makes it possible to diversify the combination patterns of random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at any given timing.

Furthermore, the output cycles of the clock signals of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are all sufficiently short compared to the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41. For example, while the time required for a player to operate the start lever 41 is 1 second, the output period of the clock signal of the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l is in the range of 3 to 30 microseconds. It becomes. As a result, the deviation in the update cycle of the random numbers in the first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l is sufficiently small in relation to the time required for the player to operate the start lever 41.

<Sixth embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the normal performance control process in the performance side MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing normal production control processing in this embodiment.

In step S5001, the same process as steps S1701 to S1710 of the normal performance control process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment is executed. Thereafter, it is determined whether the chance effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5002). The chance production flag is a flag used by the production side MPU 92 to specify that the production corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. If the value of the chance production flag is "0" (step S5002: NO), it is determined whether a chance start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5003). If the chance start command has been received (step S5003: YES), it is determined whether the false omen performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5004).

If the false omen performance flag is set to "1" (step S5004: YES), it is determined whether the currently executed false omen performance is to be stopped (step S5005). There are two types of false precursor performances: one type in which the expectation level of transition to the ART state ST9 is high, and the other type in which the expectation level for transition to the ART state ST9 is low. In addition, since the false omen state ST5 is a gaming state that does not lead to a transition to the ART state ST9 in the first place, no matter which type of false omen effect is being executed, the transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the false omen effect ends. No transition will occur.

If the false omen effect currently being executed is of a type in which the expectation level of transition to ART state ST9 is low, an affirmative determination is made in step S5005, and the false omen effect flag is cleared to "0". (Step S5006). As a result, the false omen performance that is in the middle of being executed will be stopped midway due to the transition to the chance state ST7.

If a negative determination is made in step S5004, or if the process in step S5006 is executed, a chance production start setting process is executed (step S5007). In the chance performance start setting process, a chance performance table that enables execution of the chance performance corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The chance performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the performance by the performance side MPU 92 according to the chance performance table. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the player is in the chance state ST7. Thereafter, the chance effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5008).

On the other hand, if the false precursor effect currently being executed is of a type in which there is a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9, a negative determination is made in step S5005. In this case, the chance standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5009). The chance standby flag is a flag used by the production side MPU 92 to specify that the false omen production corresponding to the false omen state ST5 is in the process of being executed and is in a state of waiting for the start of the chance production. be. Here, in the main side MPU 72, if the transition to the chance state ST7 is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is ended midway and the transition to the chance state ST7 is made. On the other hand, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the middle of the false omen performance, the performance side MPU 92 executes the performance in which the false omen performance in the middle of execution is highly expected to transition to the ART state ST9. type, the false omen performance is continued even if control corresponding to a chance state ST7 is executed in a main side MPU 72 without terminating the false omen performance midway. As a result, in the gaming state, the transition to the chance state ST7 is given priority over the continuation of the false precursor state ST5, thereby ensuring the player's benefit from the occurrence of the chance state ST7, while ensuring the transition to the ART state ST9. By continuing the false omen performance that is in the middle of the execution of a highly anticipated performance, it is possible to prevent the contents of the performance from giving a sense of discomfort.

If a negative determination is made in step S5003, or if the process in step S5009 is executed, a production control process for a false precursor state is executed (step S5010). The processing contents of the production control processing for the false omen state are the same as in the first embodiment. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5002, the processes of steps S5011 to S5016 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S5011 to S5016 are the same as steps S1717 to S1722 of the normal production control process (FIG. 38) in the first embodiment.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, if the currently executed false omen performance is of a type in which there is a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9, the main side MPU 72 moves to the chance state ST7. Even if a transition occurs, the execution of the false omen effect is continued. As a result, in the gaming state, the transition to the chance state ST7 is given priority over the continuation of the false precursor state ST5, thereby ensuring the player's benefit from the occurrence of the chance state ST7, while ensuring the transition to the ART state ST9. By continuing the false omen performance that is in the middle of the execution of a highly anticipated performance, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the content of the performance.

On the other hand, if the false precursor performance currently being executed is of a type in which there is a low expectation of transition to the ART state ST9, if a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the main MPU 72, the corresponding A false omen performance is stopped midway and a chance performance is started. As a result, in a situation where a false omen effect with low attention level is being executed, in conjunction with the transition to the chance state ST7 in the main MPU 72, it is possible to It becomes possible to give priority to the start of chance productions that have a high degree of attention.

<Seventh embodiment>
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the production control process for the false omen state in the production side MPU 92 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the production control process for a false omen state in this embodiment. Note that the effect control processing for the false omen state is not limited to the situation where the false omen effect is being executed, but also applies to the actual omen effect, chance effect, effect for the bonus state, effect for the preparation state ST8, and effect for the ART state ST9. is executed even if it is not executed.

In steps S5101 to S5104, the same processes as steps S1801 to S1804 of the effect control process for the false precursor state (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are executed. If the false omen performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5101: YES), the information to be referred to in the false omen performance table stored in the performance side RAM 94 is set at the end timing of the false omen performance. By determining whether it is the corresponding information, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the false omen effect (step S5105).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, it is determined whether a false omen start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5106). If the false omen start command has not been received (step S5106: NO), a false omen performance end setting process is executed (step S5107). In the end setting process of the false omen effect, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false omen state ST5 and return to the normal gaming state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 are read from the effect side ROM 93. and stored in the performance side RAM 94. By controlling the performance execution in the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 end the false omen state ST5 and return to the normal gaming state ST1. After the corresponding normal return performance is executed, the normal performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the precursory performance has ended and the game has returned to the normal gaming state ST1.

If a false omen start command has been received (step S5106: YES), a false omen performance adjustment process is executed (step S5108). In the process of adjusting the false omen performance, a false omen performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 in order to execute a false omen performance that has continuity of performance with respect to the contents of the false omen performance at that time, and the production side Store it in RAM94. In this case, the false omen effect table corresponds to the information on the number of consecutive games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the false omen performance table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed with content that has continuity with the content of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point. A false omen effect is executed on the display device 63. In addition, when a false omen performance is started in the middle of a false omen performance, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 display the number of games of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point and the number of games of the false omen performance that will be executed from now on. The precursor effect for the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

If it is not the end timing of the false omen effect (step S5105: NO), it is determined whether a false omen start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5109). If the false omen effect start command has not been received (step S5109: NO), a false omen effect update setting process is executed (step S5110). In the update setting process, if the false omen effect is updated due to the new execution of one game, the range to be referenced in the false omen effect table that is currently being referenced is set for one game. Perform processing that changes depending on the new start. As a result, the content of execution of the false omen effect changes depending on the number of consecutive games of the false omen effect.

If a false omen effect command has been received (step S5109: YES), a false omen effect adjustment process is executed (step S5111). In the process of adjusting the false omen performance, a false omen performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 in order to execute a false omen performance that has continuity of performance with respect to the contents of the false omen performance at that time, and the production side Store it in RAM94. In this case, the false omen effect table corresponds to the information on the number of consecutive games in the false omen state ST5 set in the false omen start command received this time. By controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the false omen performance table, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image are displayed with content that has continuity with the content of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point. A false omen effect is executed on the display device 63. In addition, when a false omen performance is started in the middle of a false omen performance, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 display the number of games of the false omen performance that has been executed up to that point and the number of games of the false omen performance that will be executed from now on. The precursor effect for the total number of games including the number of games will be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S5102, if the process of step S5104 is executed, if the process of step S5107 is executed, if the process of step S5108 is executed, if the process of step S5110 is executed, or if the process of step S5111 is executed, When the process is executed, it is determined whether a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5112). Even if the performance side MPU 92 is in a situation where control for executing a false omen performance is being executed, a situation may occur in which the gaming state in the main side MPU 72 is a chance state ST7. In such a situation, the main side MPU 72 wins the transition lottery process from the chance state ST7 to the ART state ST9, so that even if a false omen performance is executed, the main side MPU 72 A preparation start command is sent to the production side MPU 92.

If the preparation start command has been received (step S5112: YES), a preparation production start setting process is executed (step S5113). In the preparation performance start setting process, a preparation performance table that enables execution of the preparation performance corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the preparation performance table, so that the preparation performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, by checking the performance, the player can understand that the game is in the preparation state ST8. In addition, if the start setting process for the preparation performance is executed in a situation where a false omen performance is being executed, the transition to ART state ST9 will be selected in a way that interrupts the series of stories of the false omen performance. The performance will be executed. Thereafter, various flags related to false omen performances are cleared to "0" (step S5114).

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, even if the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the main side MPU 72 while the false omen performance is being executed, the false omen performance that is in the middle of execution is continued, and the main Even if the false omen performance is ended in a situation where the chance state ST7 continues in the side MPU 72, the chance performance is not started. As a result, the chance performance will not suddenly start in the middle of the false omen performance, or the chance performance will not start at the same time as the false omen performance ends, and the player will not feel uncomfortable about the sudden start of the chance performance. It becomes possible to do so.

<Eighth embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the manner in which the bonus winning notification is executed when the bonus winning occurs during the execution of the ending effect. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the bonus notification process during the ending that is executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the bonus notification process during the ending is executed during the execution of the ending effect.

It is determined whether any bonus winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 (step S5201). Furthermore, at the start of the game in which the bonus winning data is set, the main MPU 72 transmits a game start command in which information that allows the type of the set bonus winning data to be specified is set, and when the bonus winning data is established. Since the MPU 92 transmits the corresponding commands, the MPU 92 on the production side can specify whether or not bonus winning data is set in the RAM 74 on the main side based on these commands.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the game in which the bonus winning data has been set (step S5202). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the number of non-announcement compatible games corresponding to the type of bonus winning data set this time is read from the production side ROM 93 (step S5203). Multiple types of non-announcement compatible games are set depending on the type of bonus winning data. Specifically, if any BB winning data is set, 10 games will be selected as the number of non-announcement compatible games, and if any RB winning data is set, 20 games will be selected as the number of non-announcement compatible games. A game is selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S5202, or if the process in step S5203 is executed, whether the number of remaining games of the number of continuation games of the ending effect set at the start of the ending effect is less than the number of non-announcement compatible games. is determined (step S5204). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, an announcement effect setting process is executed (step S5205). In the notification effect setting process, data is set so that an image corresponding to a bonus win is displayed in a reduced size in a situation where a moving image corresponding to an ending effect is being displayed on the image display device 63.

According to the embodiment described in detail above, if a bonus is won during the ending performance, the bonus winning announcement will be made at the timing when the remaining number of consecutive games of the ending performance reaches a predetermined number of games. . This makes it possible to make the bonus winning announcement at a favorable timing in relation to the ending effect.

Note that the number of non-announcement compatible games may be configured to differ depending on whether there is a setting difference in the winning probability.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) If you win a winning combination in which the probability of winning changes according to the set value in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process for the false omen state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real omen state ST6, and the transition lottery process for the chance state ST7 are executed. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which these transition lottery processes are not executed even if a win is won in a winning combination whose probability of winning varies depending on the set value. In this case, the transition lottery process will be executed only when winning a winning combination whose winning probability does not change according to the setting value in the advantageous section SC2, so the influence of the setting value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 will be It becomes possible to reduce this. In addition, instead of this configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which the transfer lottery process is executed when a winning combination whose winning probability changes according to a set value is won and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established.

(2) In the game won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process of the false omen state ST5, the transition lottery process of the real omen state ST6, and the transition lottery process of the chance state ST7 are configured to be executed. , a configuration may be adopted in which these transition lottery processes are not executed in a game won in the transition lottery process of the advantageous section SC2. Thereby, it becomes possible to cause the transition to the advantageous section SC2 and the transition to each of the gaming states ST5 to ST7 using different games as triggers.

In addition, although the transition lottery process for advantageous section SC2 was configured to be executed when winning a winning combination whose winning probability does not change according to the set value, it is not limited to this, and the winning probability varies according to the set value. It may be configured to be executed when a winning role is won that does not change and a prize corresponding to the winning role is established, or it is executed when a winning role is won whose winning probability changes according to the set value. Alternatively, the present invention may be configured such that it is executed when a combination with a winning probability that changes depending on a set value is won and a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established.

(3) Transition to Advantageous Section SC2 When a winning is achieved in the lottery process, the advantageous section SC2 may be started from the game following the winning game. In this case, if the configuration is such that the transfer lottery process for false omen state ST5, the transfer lottery process for real omen state ST6, and the transfer lottery process for chance state ST7 can be executed on the condition that the advantageous section SC2 is in advantageous section SC2, Even if you win in the lottery process, the game is not in the advantageous zone SC2, so in the game where you win in the transition lottery process in the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process to the false omen state ST5 and the transition to the real omen state ST6 are performed. The lottery process and the chance state ST7 transition lottery process will not be executed.

(4) When a shift to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, the end occurs every time the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize in the advantageous section SC2 is announced. A lottery process may be executed, and a transition to the normal section SC1 may occur when a final winning is achieved in the final lottery process. In this case, it is possible to make it possible to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R multiple times, which makes it possible to achieve the first bell prize even in the advantageous section SC2 shifted in the normal gaming state ST1. becomes.

(5) The number of notifications of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables the establishment of the first bell winning necessary to generate an opportunity to end the advantageous section SC2, is not limited to one time, but is not limited to two times. It may be multiple times, such as once, three times, or four or more times.

(6) Instead of the configuration in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is notified as the trigger for the end of the advantageous section SC2, If there is a specific win that is a win with a large number of game media awarded and is achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined order, then the specific win is established. The advantageous section SC2 may not end until the notification of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In other words, in this configuration, the reel 32L allows the winning for which the number of game media awarded is the maximum to be realized when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined order. , 32M, and 32R are notified a predetermined number of times, the advantageous section SC2 will not end. In this case, even in the advantageous section SC2 shifted in the normal gaming state ST1, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be stopped until the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R occurs a predetermined number of times, which makes it possible to achieve a specific winning. If a win is won in which a first bell prize is established according to the stopping order of the reels, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the first bell winning to be established may be notified.

(7) The number of notifications of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell winning required to generate the opportunity to end the advantageous section SC2 is different from the normal gaming state ST1, false precursor state ST5, and It is also possible to have a configuration that is different between a plurality of game states such as chance state ST7. For example, by setting the above-mentioned required number of times of notification to be greater in the false precursor state ST5 than in the normal gaming state ST1, it becomes possible to make the false precursor state ST5 a more advantageous gaming state than the normal gaming state ST1. .

(8) When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is announced in the normal gaming state ST1 and the advantageous section SC2, the notification is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. However, the image display device 63 may not perform the process. In this case, it is possible to inconspicuously notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables the establishment of the first bell prize that triggers the end of the advantageous section SC2.

(9) In a configuration in which the advantageous section display section 67 is in a light emitting state (that is, a display state) in the advantageous section SC2, if a predetermined abnormal state has occurred in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section display section 67 is in an extinguished state. (that is, a non-display state). Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. In this configuration in which the common display area 68 includes the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, if a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section display section 67 By turning off the light and displaying a display corresponding to the type of abnormal condition on the dual-purpose display section 66, even if the same abnormal condition is occurring, a common display is displayed depending on whether it is in the advantageous section SC2 or not. Since an event in which the display mode of the display area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(10) If the number of games executed in the B loop is 21 or more, an additional 1000 games will be announced as a special freeze effect even if the number of games executed in the B loop is 22 or more. A configuration may also be used. In this case, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games that are notified at once from becoming excessively large.

(11) When the B loop is started, if the number of remaining continuous games in ART state ST9 measured by the main side MPU 72 is less than 20 games, the special freeze effect may not occur. In this case, if a B loop occurs in a situation where the remaining number of continuous games in ART state ST9 is 20 or more, and 20 games are executed in the B loop, the total By configuring the system to notify the number of additional games, it becomes possible to perform the additional notification of 1000 games without assuming that the number of games given in the B loop will be used up halfway.

(12) A configuration may be adopted in which 20 games are added at the stage when the B loop is started. In this case, if 20 games have been executed in the B loop, the total number of additional games will be notified regardless of whether the B loop continues or not, so that the number of games awarded in the B loop can be changed in the middle. It becomes possible to carry out additional notification for 1000 games without assuming that the game will be used up.

(13) The freeze period at the end of the ending may be longer when the BB effect is started after the ending effect than when the BB effect is not started after the ending effect. In this case, when the ending performance is finished and the BB performance is started, the longer period can be used to execute the BB start performance after the end performance of the ending performance is executed.

(14) There are bonus roles whose winning probability changes according to the set value and bonus roles whose winning probability does not change according to the set value, and if a bonus role is won during the ending performance, a bonus winning announcement (No. A configuration may be adopted in which whether or not the first notification and the second notification are performed is different. For example, for a bonus role whose winning probability changes depending on the setting value, a bonus winning announcement will be made if the winning occurs during the ending performance, and for a bonus role whose winning probability does not change according to the setting value, the ending performance will be announced. Even if the player wins during the process, the bonus winning notification may not be made. If the bonus state corresponding to the latter bonus role is reached (BB state ST3, RB state ST4), even if the game section is the normal section SC1, the transition to the advantageous section SC2 will occur, so the ending effect will end. By generating a bonus state corresponding to the bonus combination after the advantageous section SC2 ends, even if the advantageous section SC2 is forcibly ended, it is possible to immediately return to the advantageous section SC2.

(15) The ending effect may be executed on the condition that the total number of game media awarded in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. This makes it possible to prevent the ending performance from being executed even though the game media has not been provided to the extent that the player is satisfied.

(16) When the ending effect is executed, a video effect is performed in 5-game increments, and at the end, the end screen shows the number of game media acquired in the current ART state ST9 and the number of games executed in the current ART state ST9. The configuration may be such that the is displayed.

(17) If you win a bonus role in a situation where the ending effect is being executed and the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 is 1490 or more, you will receive a bonus winning announcement (first announcement, second announcement). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which no announcement is made. In this case, in the bonus internal state ST2, the replay winning probability is higher than in the normal gaming state ST1, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell is notified. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the ending effect is being executed in the ART state ST9 even if the ending effect is being executed in the bonus internal state ST2.

(18) In the ending effect, the end credits may be played, and the end timing of the ending effect and the end timing of the end credits may be matched by changing the playback speed.

(19) If the ending effect is extended by entering a bonus state during the ending effect, an additional image such as character introduction may be displayed in the extended game. Alternatively, an image suggesting a setting value may be displayed in an extended game. In this case, if a bonus win is won during the ending performance, it is assumed that the ending performance is extended and a setting value suggestion image is displayed by deliberately not allowing the bonus win to be achieved. Therefore, if a bonus win is not achieved for, for example, five or more games after winning the bonus combination, the setting value suggestion image may not be displayed even if the ending effect is extended.

(20) If the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 during the bonus state becomes equal to or greater than the number of games compatible with endings, the bonus performance may be terminated and the ending performance may be started. The ending effect may be started after the state ends, or the ending effect may be started when the transition from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 occurs after the bonus state ends. .

In a configuration in which the ending performance is started after the bonus state ends, the start of the ending performance will be delayed relative to the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, the ending effect is basically a video effect every 5 games, but by making the video effect every 3 games, all the effects can be displayed before the ending effect ends. You can do it like this. Furthermore, if all the performance contents cannot be displayed by the final game of the ending performance, all the performance contents may be displayed using a freeze period that occurs when the ending performance ends.

In addition, multiple types of effects are prepared as ending effects, such as effects for 30 games, effects for 40 games, and effects for 50 games, and the ending effects are started for the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2. A configuration may be adopted in which a performance is selected depending on the timing.

(21) The number of games played in the bonus state may be excluded from the measurement of the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of games executed in advantageous section SC2 from reaching the upper limit number of games during the bonus state, and it is also possible to prevent the ending effect from starting during the bonus state. becomes.

(22) If a bonus combination is won in a game other than the final game of the advantage maintenance section, the bonus type may be immediately announced regardless of the type of the bonus combination. This makes it possible to increase the chances of winning a bonus in a game before the final game in the advantage maintenance period.

(23) Instead of the configuration in which a bonus win is established in the advantageous maintenance period and the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed if the starting game in the bonus state is in the advantageous period SC2, a transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 is higher than in other cases. Even in this case, it is possible to award a profit in response to a bonus win being achieved in the advantageous maintenance section.

(24) The number of consecutive games in the advantage maintenance section is not limited to a fixed number, but may be determined by lottery. However, even if the number of games is determined by lottery, it is necessary to select a number of games within a range in which the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 does not exceed the upper limit number of games.

(25) Instead of the configuration in which the transition lottery process for ART state ST9 is executed when the starting game in the bonus state is in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process for ART state ST9 is executed when the starting game in the bonus state is in the advantageous section SC2. A configuration may be adopted in which the transition lottery process is executed, or a configuration in which the transition lottery process in the ART state ST9 is executed when the final game in the bonus state is in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, if the bonus state is started in a situation where the advantageous section SC2 is, the timing for ending the advantageous section SC2 may be determined by lottery. For example, in a configuration in which the transition lottery process for ART state ST9 is executed when the final game in the bonus state is in the advantageous section SC2, the content that until the end of the final game in the bonus state is not selected as the trigger for ending the advantageous section SC2 is not selected. In this case, the transition lottery process for ART state ST9 triggered by the bonus state will not be executed.

Further, in the above configuration, the timing at which the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed may be different depending on the bonus combination that triggered the occurrence of the bonus state. For example, if the bonus state corresponds to a predetermined bonus combination, the transition lottery process to ART state ST9 is executed in the starting game, and if the bonus state corresponds to a specific bonus combination, the transition lottery process to ART state ST9 is executed in the final game. By configuring this to be executed, it is possible to vary the probability that the ART state ST9 transition lottery process will be executed depending on the type of bonus combination.

(26) If a bonus winning combination whose winning probability changes according to a set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, the ART state ST9 transition lottery process may be executed in the winning game. In this case, by informing the player that it is the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to increase the attention level to winning the bonus combination. Furthermore, when a bonus winning combination whose winning probability changes according to a set value is won in the advantageous section SC2, a lottery process for shifting to the ART state ST9 may be executed in the winning game.

(27) The configuration of the offset table 111 for associating each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table with winning numbers is limited to the configuration in the first embodiment above. Not done. For example, instead of setting the order of minor role group → bonus role group → replay role group, the configuration may be such that the order of bonus role group → replay role group → minor role group is set. .

(28) The offset table 111 is not set in common for the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, but an individual offset table is set corresponding to each lottery table. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is provided. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, a group of winning combinations whose winning probability changes depending on the set value and a group of winning hands whose winning probability does not change according to the setting value are summarized separately. An offset table may be provided to separate and aggregate the small winning combination group, the bonus winning combination group, and the replay winning combination group. Furthermore, for the same purpose, an offset table may be provided for the first RT mode lottery table, and an offset table may also be provided for the second RT mode lottery table. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning numbers of each offset table are set so as not to overlap between the offset tables. Even with this configuration, the index value IV is set in each lottery table in a manner that is easy to design, and the winning numbers are set in each offset table in a manner that makes it easy to handle winning combination information in subsequent processing. Can be set.

(29) A configuration may be adopted in which the false omen state ST5 can be extended if a winning combination is won in the false omen state ST5 to trigger the start of the false omen state ST5. Then, when the false precursor state ST5 is extended, the advantageous section SC2 may also be extended by that amount. As a result, the advantageous section SC2 is extended through the extension of the false precursor state ST5, so it is more advantageous for the player to extend the false precursor state ST5.

(30) If the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed, which makes it possible to win the first bell even if it is in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the advantageous section SC2 ends and the normal It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the period shifts to section SC1. This makes it possible to create a situation in the normal section SC1 even in the false precursor state ST5.

(31) If a predetermined combination is won during the false omen state ST5, a transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed, while if a predetermined combination is won during the main omen state ST6, the ART state is entered. A configuration may also be adopted in which an additional lottery process for the remaining number of consecutive games in ST9 is executed. In this case, not only is it advantageous for the player to have a longer number of consecutive games in the false precursor state ST5, but also it is advantageous for the player to have a longer number of consecutive games in the real precursor state ST6. Therefore, if a transition to the real precursor state ST6 is won in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the remaining number of consecutive games in the false precursor state ST5 at that point is added to the number of consecutive games in the actual precursor state ST6. You can also use it as This makes it possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of consecutive games in this precursory state ST6.

(32) The number of consecutive games in the false omen state ST5 is not limited to a configuration in which the number of consecutive games is determined by lottery, but may be configured to be fixed at a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games).

(33) If a bonus win is established in a situation where the false precursor state ST5 is in the advantageous section SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 may be determined. In this case, the player expects a bonus win to be achieved in a situation where the false omen effect is being executed.

(34) When transitioning to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false omen state ST5, a configuration may be adopted in which a production or notification indicating that the false omen state is in the chance state ST7 is executed while continuing the false omen production. In this case, it is possible to make the user look forward to the chance state ST7 while enjoying the series of false omen performances.

(35) When transitioning to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false omen state ST5, a configuration may be adopted in which the false omen effect is ended at that point and the chance effect is started.

(36) The transition to the ART state ST9 is won in the chance state ST7 in the case of transitioning to the chance state ST7 in a situation other than the false precursor state ST5, and in the case of the transition to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false precursor state ST5. A configuration with different probabilities may also be used. For example, if you transition to chance state ST7 in a situation other than false precursor state ST5, the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 in chance state ST7 is higher than if you transition to chance state ST7 in the middle of false precursor state ST5. It is also possible to have a configuration with a high value. Furthermore, the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 is higher when the transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the middle of the false precursor state ST5 than when the transition is made to the chance state ST7 in a situation other than the false precursor state ST5. It is also possible to have a configuration with a high value.

(37) In a situation where the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is not transferred to the display counter 126, a configuration may be adopted in which notification corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is executed. . For example, a display area is set on the image display device 63 in which a color corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is displayed, and for example, if the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 500 or more, the display area is If it is less than 500 but more than 300, it will be shown in green. If it is less than 300 but more than 200, it will be shown in yellow, and if it is less than 200 and more than 100, it will be shown in blue. , and if it is less than 100, it may be configured to display white. This allows the player to predict the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127.

(38) Although the configuration is such that a plurality of special additional effects can be selected at one time, the number of special additional effects selected at one time may be one. In this case, although the frequency of execution of the process for selecting the special additional effect becomes higher, an area for storing the selected special additional effect becomes unnecessary.

(39) Although the special additional effect is executed only when the A loop occurs, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the display counter A special additional performance may be executed as a type of release performance when the value of 126 becomes "0". In this case, a special additional effect is executed when the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9, which is reported to the player, becomes 0 games, so it is possible to give the player a surprise. .

(40) Although the configuration is such that the expected performance is started when the A loop is set in the main MPU 72, the configuration may be such that the expected performance is not executed. In this case, a special additional effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may be executed at a timing when a predetermined number of games have elapsed since the A loop was set. As a result, the special additional performance suddenly occurs, making it possible to provide surprise to the player.

(41) When the A loop is set in the main MPU 72, a special additional effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may not be executed until the A loop ends. Thereby, it becomes possible to execute a special additional performance in a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is large.

(42) The main MPU 72 executes a lottery process to determine whether or not to grant an additional number of games, and if a winner is selected, a fixed number of games (for example, 30 games) is always set as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST9. The number of games may be added, and the production side MPU 92 may decide at what timing to notify the number of games. In this case, since there is only one processing pattern for the additional lottery process in the main MPU 72, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 72.

(43) If the value of the display counter 126 becomes "0" in a situation where the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0", the end lottery process of ART state ST9 is executed for each game and the game ends. A configuration may also be adopted in which the ART state ST9 ends when the prize is won. Alternatively, the ART state ST9 may be continued until the fall to the first RT mode occurs, and the ART state ST9 ends when the fall to the first RT mode occurs, and the ART state ST9 may be terminated until the fall to the first RT mode occurs. The ART state ST9 may be continued until a fall occurs, and the ART state ST9 may be terminated when a fall to the normal mode occurs. In this case, the configuration may be such that the same performance as the first release performance is performed, or the configuration may be such that a performance different from the first release performance is performed.

(44) If the number of games played without bonus status (BB status ST3, RB status ST4) and ART status ST9 reaches the number of unlocked games, ART status ST9 may be given. , a configuration may be adopted in which a pseudo-bonus state is provided as in the second embodiment.

(45) In the bonus internal state ST2, a configuration may be adopted in which a symbol corresponding to a bonus winning combination is given priority in stop control over a symbol corresponding to a winning combination that causes awarding of game media. In this case, if a winning number of "1" to "3" is set in the bonus internal state ST2, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell is announced, and A configuration may be adopted in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning bonus combination is notified. When the notification is executed in this way, the bonus winning can be achieved by performing the stopping operation in the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the stopping operation timing that does not make the bonus winning possible, but that makes it possible to make the first bell winning. Instead, it becomes possible to win the first bell.

(46) It is limited to a configuration in which a normal section SC1 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported and an advantageous section SC2 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified as the game sections. However, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified in any of the sections, but a plurality of sections may be set in which the types of winning data to be notified of the stop order are different. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified, a plurality of sections may be set in which the stop order is notified at different frequencies. Even in this case, it is possible to draw the attention of players to the transition of game sections by giving different degrees of advantage regarding the notification of the stop order in a plurality of sections.

(47) A configuration may be adopted in which notification for making the player recognize which game section is in is executed outside the advantageous section display section 67. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 executes an effect that allows the player to recognize which game section is in. Additionally, in addition to or in place of these configurations, a configuration may be adopted in which information indicating which gaming section is in is outputted externally to the hall computer of the gaming hall.

(48) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games, the number of games executed in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 may not be added to the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2. good.

(49) A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games is calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the set value is changed, it is necessary to have a configuration in which the calculation is continued without initializing the ratio information that is performed for each set value. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the above-mentioned ratio for each set value.

(50) A configuration that stores the total number of played games and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2, as history information, and calculates the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to store the number of winnings and the total number of games of a predetermined role to be drawn in the lottery process as history information, and calculate the winning probability of the predetermined role. Good too. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of winnings for each of the first and second predetermined combinations is individually stored as history information, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Alternatively, the number of winnings for each of all the winning combinations may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning for each winning combination may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager of the probability of winning the winning combination to be managed.

Alternatively, the total number of game media awarded and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager of the number of game media given per unit number of games. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media given and the total number of games is stored as history information separately for each gaming state and advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media given per unit number of games is calculated for each game. It may be configured to calculate each of the state and advantageous section SC2 separately.

Alternatively, the number of transitions to the bonus state and the total number of games played in non-bonus state gaming states may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the bonus state may be calculated.

(51) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the result of the ending lottery process executed in the advantageous section SC2 is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends and shifts to the normal section SC1 when it is a final winning result. The trigger for executing this termination lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, the configuration may be such that the termination lottery process is executed in each game, such as when a predetermined lottery trigger combination is won or a predetermined lottery trigger prize is established. A configuration may also be adopted in which the end lottery process is executed at the end of the lottery. In addition, on the condition that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, a termination lottery process is executed every time a lottery opportunity occurs, and if the result of the termination lottery process is a final winning result, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends and shifts to the normal section SC1.

(52) In the advantageous section SC2, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so the structure is not limited to the advantageous section SC2 being more advantageous than the normal section SC1, and for example, winning a small prize. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section SC2 is more advantageous than the normal section SC1 because the number of game media given increases when the following is established, and the number of game media required to start one game is reduced. Therefore, the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1.

(53) Notification of the calculation results using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67 are used, and for example, the notification may be performed using the credit display section 65. Often, the credit display section 65 and the dual-purpose display section 66 may be used. Furthermore, if there are multiple types of calculation results to be notified, a configuration may be adopted in which each type of event to be notified is sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is switched sequentially in this way, for example, the credit display section 65 displays the type of event to be notified, and the dual-purpose display section 66 displays the calculation result for the event to be notified or the content of the calculation result. A configuration may also be adopted in which corresponding information is displayed. Thereby, even if there are multiple types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the multiple types of events to be reported using a small number of display units.

(54) A configuration may also be adopted in which an upper limit number of consecutive games is set for the normal section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously played in the normal section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is set. This makes it possible to compensate for the fact that the normal section SC1 continues until it reaches the upper limit number of games. In addition, by making the upper limit number of games in the normal section SC1 the same between the setting values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", no advantage or disadvantage will occur depending on the set value regarding the upper limit number of games. becomes possible.

(55) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one main line ML, and may be a configuration in which there are two, three, or four or more effective lines. In this case, it may be configured such that the number of active lines increases as the number of game media bet is large, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of game media bet.

(56) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments, and for example, if a winning corresponding to the award of game media is established, the winning will be awarded as a result of the winning. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the performance MPU 92. In this case, it becomes possible to notify information on the number of game media awarded by winning a prize on the image display device 63 or the like. In addition, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped or stopped, the corresponding information will be sent to the main side. It may also be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, it becomes possible to perform effects corresponding to the rotational conditions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 or the like.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is given when a small winning combination is achieved, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the configuration is such that some kind of benefit is granted to the player. That's fine. For example, it may be configured to pay out prizes other than medals when a small winning combination is achieved. Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credit for medals owned by a player, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of a benefit.

(58) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, a C type, a combination type of A type and C type, a combination type of B type and C type, furthermore, an RT game, a CT game, or an AT game. The present invention may be applied to any type of slot machine, such as a type equipped with a game.

(59) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. Further, it is possible to form a pattern using light, color, etc., a pattern may be formed using a three-dimensional shape, or a combination of these may form a pattern. That is, the pattern may be any pattern as long as it has a function as information with distinctiveness.

(60) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but it may also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played using game balls as a game medium, and the slot machine and pachinko The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of the above and the other machines.

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. a setting means (a function for executing the winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
State transition means for transitioning the gaming state between multiple types of gaming states with different advantages (normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) (correspondence at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) functions) and
A first section setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1307, S1314, and S1321 in the main MPU 72) that sets the gaming section to the first section (normal section SC1);
a second section setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S807 and step S2004 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the gaming section to a second section (advantageous section SC2);
Equipped with
In the second section, a specific benefit (transition to ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be provided to the player, or in the second section, a specific benefit may be provided to the player more than in the first section. It has an easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which the player can stay in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and can also stay in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states. and
This gaming machine can generate a predetermined event whose probability of occurrence can vary depending on the setting value (setting of 1st BB winning data, setting of 2nd BB winning data, setting of 2nd RB winning data) or based on the occurrence of the predetermined event. The specific benefit is provided to the player based on the occurrence of a predetermined response situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB prize or second BB prize winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB prize) in the second section. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a specific granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2016 to S2020 in the main MPU 72).

According to feature A1, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, since there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game sections, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, the second section has a structure in which specific benefits are more easily granted than the first section, and both the first section and the second section have a structure in which it is possible to stay in the predetermined gaming state and other gaming states, The player plays the game while expecting to be in an advantageous gaming state in the second section.

In this case, a specific benefit is granted to the player based on the fact that a predetermined event whose occurrence probability can vary depending on the set value or a predetermined response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the predetermined event occurs in the second section. . As a result, the player expects that a predetermined event or a predetermined response situation will occur in the second section. In addition, according to this configuration, the probability of granting a specific benefit is affected by the probability of occurrence of a predetermined event, so even if the probability of granting a specific benefit is not directly changed according to the set value, the probability of granting a specific benefit is It becomes possible to indirectly change the granting probability of , depending on the set value.

Feature A2. It is equipped with a lottery means (a function of executing the lottery process of the combination in the main side MPU 72) that executes the lottery process,
The game according to feature A1, wherein the predetermined event is a predetermined lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery process. Machine.

According to feature A2, a player who expects to be awarded a specific benefit in the second section expects a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. In addition, by varying the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process according to the set value, it is possible to indirectly vary the probability of being awarded a specific benefit in the second section according to the set value.

Feature A3. a game execution means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for executing one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery processing;
Based on the result of the lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, means for causing the predetermined response situation to be achieved in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result was obtained (a bonus process in the main MPU 72) function) and
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the specific granting means grants the specific benefit to the player based on the predetermined response situation in the second section.

According to feature A3, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second period becomes a predetermined lottery result, no specific benefit will be granted, and the predetermined lottery result will not be awarded in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result was obtained. A specific benefit is granted based on the occurrence of a predetermined response situation in the second section triggered by the result. As a result, players who expect to be given specific benefits will not only pay attention to the specified lottery result, but also if the specified response situation occurs in a game after the game that resulted in the specified lottery result. Attention will be paid to whether or not this is the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A4. According to feature A3, the second section setting means does not set the second section even if the predetermined response situation occurs in response to the predetermined lottery result in the first section. Game machine.

According to feature A4, in a configuration in which a specific benefit is granted based on the predetermined response situation in the second section, in order to be in the predetermined response situation in the second section, a predetermined lottery result will be obtained in the second section. Even if a predetermined response situation occurs in the game, it is necessary to remain in the second section. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation of the second section, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A5. The specific granting means is configured to generate a specific event whose probability of occurrence does not vary depending on the set value (setting of 3rd BB winning data, setting of 4th BB winning data, setting of 1st RB winning data) or that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event. The specific benefit is provided to the player based on the occurrence of a specific corresponding situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB prize or 4th BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB prize) in the second section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to feature A5, a specific benefit may be granted to a player even when a specific event whose occurrence probability does not vary according to a set value or a specific response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event occurs in the second section. . This makes it possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the probability of being granted a specific benefit in the second section from becoming significant.

Feature A6. It is equipped with a lottery means (a function of executing the lottery process of the combination in the main side MPU 72) that executes the lottery process,
The predetermined event is a predetermined lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery process,
The game according to feature A5, wherein the specific event is a specific lottery result (setting of 3rd BB winning data, setting of 4th BB winning data, setting of 1st RB winning data) in the lottery process. Machine.

According to feature A6, a player who expects to be awarded a specific benefit in the second section expects a predetermined lottery result or a specific lottery result in the lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. In addition, by varying the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process according to the set value, it is possible to indirectly vary the probability of receiving a specific benefit in the second section according to the set value. To prevent the influence of the setting value on the probability of being granted a specific benefit in the second section from becoming significant by not changing the probability of a specific lottery result in the lottery process according to the setting value. becomes possible.

Feature A7. a game execution means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for executing one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery processing;
Based on the result of the lottery process being the predetermined lottery result, means for causing the predetermined response situation to be achieved in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result was obtained (a bonus process in the main MPU 72) function) and
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery process is the specific lottery result, a means for causing the specific corresponding situation to occur in a game subsequent to the game that has the specific lottery result (a bonus process in the main MPU 72) function) and
Equipped with
The specific granting means grants the specific benefit to the player based on the predetermined corresponding situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section, and the specific award in the second section. The gaming machine according to feature A6, wherein the specific benefit is granted to the player based on the specific response situation triggered by a lottery result.

According to feature A7, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second period becomes a predetermined lottery result or a specific lottery result, a specific benefit will not be granted, and the game will not be awarded any special benefits. Also, a specific benefit is granted based on the occurrence of a predetermined response situation that occurs in a subsequent game in response to the predetermined lottery result or a specific response situation that occurs in response to the specific lottery result in the second section. As a result, players who expect to be given specific benefits will not only pay attention to the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result, but also pay attention to the predetermined response status in games after the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result. Or, if a specific response situation occurs, attention will be paid to whether or not it is the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A8. The second section setting means does not set the predetermined response situation in the second section even if the predetermined response situation occurs in the first section, and sets the second section in the second section if the specific response situation occurs in the first section. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the gaming machine is set to .

According to feature A8, in a configuration in which a specific benefit is granted based on a predetermined response situation in the second section, in order to have a predetermined response situation in the second section, a predetermined lottery result will be obtained in the second section. Even if a predetermined response situation occurs in the game, it is necessary to remain in the second section. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation of the second section, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, even if a specific lottery result is obtained in the first section, this will be used as an opportunity to set the second section. Therefore, regardless of whether the game section is in the first section or the second section, if a specific lottery result is obtained, it will be a situation where the specific response situation is in the second section, and based on this situation, the specific benefit will be given to the player. granted to. Therefore, the player expects a specific lottery result.

Feature A9. Features A1 to A8, characterized in that the second section setting means sets the game section to the second section based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger in which the probability of occurrence does not change according to the set value. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature A9, the transition probability in the second section does not vary depending on the set value. This makes it possible to prevent the setting value from having a significant influence on the probability of being granted a specific benefit.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the predetermined response situation is a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

According to feature A10, the transition probability of the special gaming state fluctuates according to the set value, and the probability of granting a specific benefit also fluctuates according to the set value in relation to the fluctuation according to the set value of the transition probability. becomes. As a result, when the transition probability of a special gaming state advantageous to the player is set to a high value, the probability of granting a specific benefit is also high, increasing the player's expectations for a high setting value being selected. becomes possible.

Feature A11. a setting means (a function for executing the winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
State transition means for transitioning the gaming state between multiple types of gaming states with different advantages (normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) (correspondence at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) functions) and
A first section setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1307, S1314, and S1321 in the main MPU 72) that sets the gaming section to the first section (normal section SC1);
a second section setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S807 and step S2004 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the gaming section to a second section (advantageous section SC2);
Equipped with
In the second section, a specific benefit (transition to ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be provided to the player, or in the second section, a specific benefit may be provided to the player more than in the first section. It has an easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which the player can stay in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and can also stay in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states. and
This gaming machine generates a specific event whose probability of occurrence does not change depending on the setting value (setting of 3rd BB winning data, setting of 4th BB winning data, setting of 1st RB winning data) or based on the occurrence of the specific event. The specific benefit is granted to the player based on the occurrence of a specific response situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB prize or 4th BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB prize) in the second section. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a specific granting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2016 to S2020 in the main MPU 72).

According to feature A11, since the configuration is such that the setting value to be used is set from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level, the player can use the more advantageous setting value. It is to be expected that Further, since there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game sections, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, the second section has a structure in which specific benefits are more easily granted than the first section, and both the first section and the second section have a structure in which it is possible to stay in the predetermined gaming state and other gaming states, The player plays the game while expecting to be in an advantageous gaming state in the second section.

In this case, a specific benefit is granted to the player based on the fact that a specific event whose occurrence probability does not vary according to the set value or a specific response situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event occurs in the second section. As a result, the player expects that a specific event or specific response situation will occur in the second section. Further, according to the configuration, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the influence of the setting value on the probability of granting a specific benefit.

Note that for the configuration of features A1 to A11, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A section setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S807 and step S2004 in the main MPU 72) for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1); ,
Section ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 72) for ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games;
A pre-end effect (ending effect) is executed based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the number of pre-end games set as the number of games less than the upper limit number of games. A pre-end effect execution means (a function of executing the process of step S3505 in the main side MPU 72, a function of executing the process of step S3603 in the effect side MPU 92),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, the second section is terminated based on the number of games played in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, so that the second section advantageous to the player continues excessively. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In this case, the pre-end effect is executed based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the number of pre-end games set as the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second section is nearing its end. In addition, by making the player want to check the pre-end performance, it is possible to increase the player's desire to continue the second section, and furthermore, if the pre-end performance is actually performed, the player will be satisfied. It is possible to give a feeling. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. A feature characterized in that the number of games played in the second section can reach the upper limit number of games based on the occurrence of an increase opportunity and the number of consecutive games in the second section is increased. The gaming machine described in B1.

According to feature B2, a pre-end effect is executed as a benefit when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction when the pre-end performance is executed.

Feature B3. The pre-end effect execution means, in a situation where the remaining number of consecutive games in the second section is a number of games that allows the number of games executed in the second section to reach the upper limit number of games, The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the pre-end effect is executed based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the number of pre-end games.

According to feature B3, since the pre-end effect is executed in a situation where it is certain that the number of games to be executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, even though the pre-end effect is executed. First, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the number of games played in the second section does not reach the upper limit number of games.

Feature B4. There are multiple types of gaming states that can be stayed in the second section,
The pre-end performance execution means determines the number of games executed in the second section in a situation where a predetermined gaming state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) is advantageous to the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the pre-end effect is executed based on the number of games before the end being reached.

According to feature B4, since the pre-end effect is executed in the second section and in a predetermined gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the pre-end effect gives the player a sense of satisfaction when the pre-end effect is executed. becomes possible.

Feature B5. a state generating means (a function for executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) for generating special gaming states (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) advantageous to the player;
A special performance execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S2820 and step S3705 in the performance side MPU 92) for causing a special performance (BB performance) to be executed in the special game state;
If the special game state occurs in a situation where the pre-end performance is being executed, a performance continuation means (processing of step S3709 and step S3713 in the performance side MPU 92) that continues the pre-end performance without starting the special performance. ) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B5, if a special gaming state occurs in a situation where a pre-end presentation is being executed, the continuation of the pre-end presentation is prioritized over the start of the special presentation, thereby ensuring the execution of the pre-end presentation. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature B6. The performance continuation means is a means for starting the special performance when the pre-end performance ends in a situation where the special game state has not ended (the performance side MPU 92 makes an affirmative determination in step S3704). The gaming machine according to feature B5, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

According to feature B6, even in a configuration where the continuation of the pre-end performance is prioritized, it is possible to ensure an opportunity for the special performance to be executed.

Feature B7. The performance continuation means is a means for continuing the pre-end performance (performance side MPU 92 The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the process of step S3709 in .

According to feature B7, even if the second section that is advantageous to the player ends, if the special game state that is advantageous to the player continues, the pre-end performance is continued, thereby creating a situation that is advantageous to the player. It becomes possible to extend the pre-end performance using the continuing period. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that a situation in which the special gaming state continues after the end of the second section is a situation in which the second section continues.

Feature B8. When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, progress stopping means (in the main MPU 72) sets a progress stopping state in which normal game progress based on player operations is stopped. function to execute the processing of step S3806 and step S3809),
The progress stopping means stops the progress if the pre-end effect is continued because the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the special game state has not ended. The gaming machine according to feature B7, characterized in that the gaming machine is not set to a stopped state.

According to feature B8, when the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the player is made to clearly understand that the second section ends by entering a state where the progress is stopped. becomes. In this case, if the special game state continues after the end of the second section and the pre-end performance is continued, the progress will not be stopped at the end of the second section. Thereby, when the pre-end performance is continued, it is possible to prevent the flow of the pre-end performance from being obstructed by the progress stop state. Furthermore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the special gaming state continues after the end of the second section as a situation where the second section continues.

Feature B9. The performance continuation means is
If the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games expected to be required until the special gaming state ends is a relatively long number of games, the end of the game means for starting the special performance after the pre-performance ends (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3704 in the performance side MPU 92);
If the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games expected to be required until the special gaming state ends is a relatively short number of games, the end of the game A means for continuing the pre-production (a function for executing the process of step S3709 in the production-side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, characterized by comprising:

According to feature B9, depending on the number of games expected to be required until the special game state ends, a situation where the special performance is started after the pre-end performance ends and a situation where the pre-end performance is continued are determined. It becomes possible to cause this to occur.

Feature B10. When the special game state is started or ended, a progress stop means (step S1914 and step S2209 in the main MPU 72) sets a progress stop state in which the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped. processing functions),
Any of features B5 to B9 characterized in that the progress stopping means does not set the progress stopping state when the special game state is started or ended in a situation where the pre-end performance is being executed. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature B10, when the special game state is started or ended, the player is made to clearly recognize that the special game state is started or ended by setting the progress stop state. becomes possible. In this case, if the special game state is started or ended in a situation where the pre-end performance is being executed, the progress stop state is not set, so that the flow of the pre-end performance is caused by the special game state. It becomes possible to prevent the progress from being hindered by the stopped state.

Feature B11. State transition means for transitioning the gaming state between multiple types of gaming states with different advantages (normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) (correspondence at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) processing functions),
In the second section, a specific benefit (transition to ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be provided to the player, or in the second section, a specific benefit may be provided to the player more than in the first section. It has an easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which the player can stay in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and can also stay in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

According to feature B11, since there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game sections, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, the second section has a structure in which specific benefits are more easily granted than the first section, and both the first section and the second section have a structure in which it is possible to stay in the predetermined gaming state and other gaming states, The player plays the game while expecting to be in an advantageous gaming state in the second section.

Note that for the configuration of features B1 to B11, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to each of the inventions of the feature A group and the feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. an acquisition means for acquiring lottery information when an acquisition opportunity occurs (a function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main MPU 72);
Winning in which a winning determination is performed using a group of lottery information (normal mode lottery table, first RT mode lottery table, second RT mode lottery table) corresponding to the gaming situation and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. A determining means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 to S513 in the main MPU 72),
A prize handling control means (a function of executing the processing of step S309 and step S310 in the main side MPU 72) that executes prize handling control when a prize corresponding to the result of the winning determination is established;
Equipped with
The lottery information group corresponding to one gaming situation is
multiple pieces of identification information (index value IV),
Lottery correspondence information that is set in correspondence with the identification information and that enables the winning determination means to specify whether or not the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to the corresponding identification information ( point value PV) and
It has
The winning determination means is
A first grasping means (processing of step S504, step S507, step S512, and step S602 in the main MPU 72) that grasps the identification information corresponding to the lottery information in a predetermined lottery information group by using the lottery corresponding information ) and
A second grasping means (step S604 in the main MPU 72) grasps winning information (winning number) which is information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means and is referred to in subsequent control. functions) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, after grasping the identification information corresponding to the lottery information by using the lottery information group, the winning information corresponding to the identification information is grasped, and after the winning decision is made using the grasped winning information. control is executed. This makes it possible to arrange the identification information in an appropriate manner when grasping the identification information in the lottery information group, and to use the winning information that is easy to use in the control after winning determination. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably perform the lottery process.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the winning information is set as serial number information.

According to feature C2, since the winning information is set as serial number information, it is possible to suitably perform processing for grasping the result of winning determination in the control after winning determination.

Feature C3. Predetermined winning information among the winning information corresponds to multiple winning target information (winning data),
Feature C1 characterized in that in a situation where the predetermined winning information is grasped by the second grasping means, any one of the entered prizes corresponding to each of the plurality of winning target information can be established. Or the gaming machine described in C2.

According to feature C3, since winning information different from winning target information itself is used in control after winning determination, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the control.

Feature C4. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing the winning probability setting process in the main MPU 72) for setting the setting value to be used from among the setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
The predetermined lottery information group includes a first aggregation range in which the identification information whose winning probability varies according to the set value (in the case of a lottery table for normal mode, index value IV=17 to 22, first RT mode) The identification information whose winning probability does not vary according to the setting value is aggregated (index value IV = 23 to 28 for the lottery table for the second RT mode, index value IV = 18 to 23 for the lottery table for the second RT mode). Second aggregation range (index value IV = 1 to 16 for the normal mode lottery table, index value IV = 1 to 22 for the first RT mode lottery table, index value for the second RT mode lottery table) The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that IV=1 to 17) is set.

According to feature C4, in the predetermined lottery information group, the identification information is differentiated into the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range depending on whether the winning probability changes according to the setting value, so that the This makes it easier to check a predetermined lottery information group at the design stage, the use stage of the game machine, and the like. Furthermore, even in a configuration in which the identification information is differentiated between the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range, the winning information corresponding to the identification information is grasped at the time of winning determination, so that after the winning determination In the control, it becomes possible to use the winning information, which is a preferable aspect of the control.

Feature C5. As the types of the entered prize, there are at least two types: a type in which game media are given as the entered prize corresponding control, and a type in which the game can be re-executed as the entered prize corresponding control,
The gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the identification information that enables the predetermined type of entered prize is present in both the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range.

According to feature C5, even if the identification information that enables a predetermined type of winning in a predetermined lottery information group is set dispersedly in the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range, it is possible to win a prize. In terms of information, it is possible to aggregate information that enables a predetermined type of winning.

Feature C6. comprising information storage means (main-side ROM 73) storing in advance a correspondence information group (offset table 111) that defines the correspondence between the identification information and the winning information;
Any of the features C1 to C5, wherein the second grasping means grasps the winning information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means, by using the correspondence information group. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature C6, since the correspondence between identification information and winning information is set in advance in the correspondence information group, it is possible to reduce the processing load for understanding winning information from identification information.

Feature C7. The first identification information (for example, the index value IV of the normal mode lottery table) set in the lottery information group (normal mode lottery table) to be used in the first gaming situation and the second gaming situation (first RT Although the content of the identification information is different from the second identification information (for example, index value IV = 23 of the first RT mode lottery table) set in the lottery information group to be used in the lottery table for RT mode), it is possible to establish Identification information that will result in the same winnings,
The second grasping means is configured to detect the same identification information regardless of whether the first identification information is grasped by the first grasping means or the second identification information is grasped by the first grasping means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that winning information (for example, winning number "5") is grasped.

According to feature C7, it is possible to set identification information in a preferable manner for each of the lottery information group corresponding to the first gaming situation and the lottery information group corresponding to the second gaming situation. In addition, even if the identification information is set in a preferable manner in each lottery information group in this way, if the winnings that can be achieved in the lottery information groups are the same but different identification information, the same winning information Therefore, in the control after the winning determination, it is possible to use the winning information in a preferable manner in the control.

Note that for the configuration of features C1 to C7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention of feature C group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably perform a lottery, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for winning combinations in the main MPU 72);
a game execution means (a function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for executing one game in correspondence with the execution of the lottery processing;
A first section setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1307, S1314, and S1321 in the main MPU 72) that sets the gaming section to the first section (normal section SC1);
a second section setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S807 and step S2004 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the gaming section to a second section (advantageous section SC2);
Based on a predetermined lottery result (setting of 1st BB winning data, setting of 2nd BB winning data, setting of 2nd RB winning data) in the lottery process, in a game subsequent to the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result. A predetermined response means (a function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to achieve a predetermined response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB prize or second BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB prize) )and,
A specific awarding means (main MPU 72) that provides a specific benefit (transition to ART state ST9) to the player based on the predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section. (a function to execute the processing of steps S2016 to S2020);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes a predetermined lottery result in the second period, a specific benefit will not be granted, and the predetermined lottery result will not be awarded in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result was obtained. A specific benefit is granted based on the occurrence of a predetermined response situation in the second section triggered by the result. As a result, players who expect to be given specific benefits will not only pay attention to the specified lottery result, but also if the specified response situation occurs in a game after the game that resulted in the specified lottery result. Attention will be paid to whether or not this is the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. According to feature D1, the second section setting means does not set the second section even if the predetermined response situation occurs in response to the predetermined lottery result in the first section. Game machine.

According to feature D2, in a configuration in which a specific benefit is granted based on a predetermined response situation in the second section, in order to have a predetermined response situation in the second section, a predetermined lottery result will be obtained in the second section. Even if a predetermined response situation occurs in the game, it is necessary to remain in the second section. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation of the second section, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D3. Based on a specific lottery result (setting of 3rd BB winning data, setting of 4th BB winning data, setting of 1st RB winning data) in the lottery process, in a game subsequent to the game that resulted in the specific lottery result. Specific response means (a function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to achieve a specific response situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB winning) ),
The specific granting means grants the specific benefit based on the specific response situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second section setting means sets the second section in the specific response situation triggered by the specific lottery result.

According to feature D3, when a specific response situation occurs based on a specific lottery result, the specific response situation is in the second section, and the specific benefit is given based on the fact that the specific response situation is in the second section. Granted to the player. As a result, the player not only expects a predetermined lottery result, but also expects a specific lottery result rather than a predetermined lottery result. Therefore, the targets to be expected become step-by-step, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D4. The specific awarding means may award the specific benefit to the player based on the fact that the first game of the predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result is started in the second section. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to feature D4, since the specific benefit is given to the player based on the fact that the first game in the predetermined response situation is started in the second section, when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the situation in the second section, The player expects that the predetermined response situation will occur at an early stage.

Feature D5. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
Equipped with
The game execution means starts the variable display of the symbols as the start of the one game based on the operation of the start operation means and the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the operation of the game execution means based on the operation of the stop operation means. controlling the pattern display means so that the variable display of the pattern is stopped;
The predetermined response means is configured to determine, when a predetermined stop result corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is displayed after the symbol change is displayed when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process, the predetermined stop result corresponds to the predetermined lottery result. causing the predetermined response situation to start from a game following the displayed game;
The predetermined stop result is a stop result that is not displayed depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means,
Feature D1 characterized in that when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery process and the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the predetermined lottery result is carried over to the next game of the game. The gaming machine according to any one of D4 to D4.

According to feature D5, even if the predetermined lottery result is obtained, the predetermined response situation is not started unless the stop operation is performed in an operation mode that allows display of the predetermined stop result. In this case, even if the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the second section, no specific benefit will be given, and the second section will be held in the predetermined response situation that starts in a game after the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result. Specific benefits will be granted based on this. Therefore, in the case of a predetermined lottery result, a player who is able to display the predetermined stop result early is more likely to have an event that is a predetermined response situation occur in the second period, and accordingly receive specific benefits. It becomes easier to be granted. On the other hand, if the prescribed lottery result is obtained and the prescribed stop result is not displayed, the fact that the prescribed lottery result has been obtained will be carried over to the next game, so if the prescribed lottery result is obtained, the early It is possible to prevent a player who is unable to display a predetermined stop result from suffering an excessive disadvantage.

Feature D6. A second section performance control means (a function for executing performance control processing for the advantageous maintenance section in the performance side MPU 92) that executes a second section corresponding performance (advantageous maintenance performance) in the second section,
The second section effect control means is characterized in that, if the predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section, the second section effect control means prevents the second section corresponding effect from being executed in the final game. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

According to feature D6, even if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, and an opportunity to enter the predetermined response situation occurs, the second section has ended in the predetermined response situation, so no specific benefit will be awarded. On the other hand, if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, the performance corresponding to the second section is not executed in the final game. As a result, even though the specified lottery result occurred in a situation where the second section compatible performance corresponding to the second section was being executed, and an opportunity for the specified corresponding situation occurred, the specific benefit was not granted. This makes it hard to leave an impression on players.

Feature D7. Based on a specific lottery result (setting of 3rd BB winning data, setting of 4th BB winning data, setting of 1st RB winning data) in the lottery process, in a game subsequent to the game that resulted in the specific lottery result. Specific response means (a function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to achieve a specific response situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB winning) ),
The specific granting means grants the specific benefit based on the specific response situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section,
The second section setting means is configured not to set it in the second section even if the predetermined response situation occurs in response to the predetermined lottery result in the first section; In the specific response situation triggered by the situation, the second section is configured,
The second section effect control means is characterized in that even if the specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery process in the final game of the second section, the second section corresponding effect is executed in the final game. The gaming machine according to feature D6.

According to feature D7, when a specific response situation occurs based on a specific lottery result, the specific response situation is in the second section, and the specific benefit is given based on the specific response situation in the second section. Granted to the player. As a result, the player not only expects a predetermined lottery result, but also expects a specific lottery result rather than a predetermined lottery result. Therefore, the targets to be expected become step-by-step, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, even if a specific lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section, the performance corresponding to the second section is executed in the final game. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the chances that a specific corresponding situation will occur in a situation where the second section compatible production is being executed and a specific benefit will be awarded, and the player's attention will be paid to the second section compatible production. It is possible to increase the degree of

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the predetermined response situation is a special gaming state advantageous to the player.

According to feature D8, a specific benefit is granted based on the special gaming state in the second section, so that if a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, further specific benefits can be granted. Become. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the special gaming state in the second section.

Feature D9. State transition means for transitioning the gaming state between multiple types of gaming states with different advantages (normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) (correspondence at the end of the game in the main MPU 72) processing functions),
In the second section, a specific benefit (transition to ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be provided to the player, or in the second section, a specific benefit may be provided to the player more than in the first section. It has an easy configuration,
Both the first section and the second section have a configuration in which the player can stay in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and can also stay in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

According to feature D9, since there are a plurality of types of game states and a plurality of types of game sections, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, the second section has a structure in which specific benefits are more easily granted than the first section, and both the first section and the second section have a structure in which it is possible to stay in the predetermined gaming state and other gaming states, The player plays the game while expecting to be in an advantageous gaming state in the second section.

Note that for the configuration of features D1 to D9, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. A section setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S807 and step S2004 in the main MPU 72) for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1); ,
The first state setting means (the process of step S1514 in the main MPU 72 function) and
a second state setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1524 in the main MPU 72) for setting a second expected state (false omen state ST5) that continues over a plurality of games and does not give the benefit after the end;
Expectation effect control means (in the effect side MPU 92 a function of executing the processes of step S1704, step S1705, step S1710 and step S1723);
Equipped with
The gaming machine characterized in that the section setting means includes means for setting the second section in the second expected state (a function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S807 in the main MPU 72). .

According to feature E1, since the second section is more advantageous than the first section, the player plays the game while expecting that the game section will be the second section. In addition, by entering the first expectation state or the second expectation state, an expectation effect is executed that allows the player to expect a bonus to be given in each game, so that the player who has confirmed the expectation effect Players will look forward to receiving benefits, which will increase the interest in the game. In addition, in addition to the first expected state in which benefits are granted after the game ends, there is also a second expected state in which benefits are not granted after the game ends, so even if the benefits are not actually granted, expectations are maintained across multiple games. Since the performance is executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this case, the game section is set to the second section in the second expectation state. As a result, even if the game is in the second expected state in which no benefits are awarded after the end of the game, the second game period will be more advantageous to the player than the first period. Therefore, even in the second expected state in which no benefits are awarded after the end of the game, it is possible to create a gaming state that is substantially advantageous for the player. It becomes possible to increase the degree of attention.

Feature E2. Feature E1 characterized in that the section setting means includes means for setting the second section in the first expected state (a function of executing the processing of step S802 and step S807 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine described in .

According to feature E2, since it is set in the second period regardless of whether the first expected state or the second expected state is in the first expected state, if the expected performance is performed over multiple games, the first period is set. This means that the second section is more advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the expected performance will be performed over a plurality of games.

Feature E3. The first state setting means includes a first starting means (step S1514 in the main MPU 72, step a function of executing the processing of S1516 and S1517),
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the first starting means starts the first expected state based on the occurrence of the first predetermined opportunity in the second expected state.

According to feature E3, since the first expected state is started based on the occurrence of the first predetermined opportunity in the second expected state, the player does not need to know that the first predetermined opportunity will occur in the second expected state. That's to be expected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second expectation state.

Feature E4. Means for granting the benefit or another benefit to the player based on the occurrence of an opportunity for giving an advantage in the second section, and not granting the benefit even if the opportunity for giving an advantage occurs in the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the game machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of steps S809 to S819 in the side MPU 72.

According to feature E4, a benefit or another benefit is granted to the player based on the occurrence of an advantageous granting opportunity in the second section, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second section. . In this case, since the configuration of feature E1 is provided and the second expected state is set in the second section, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second expected state, and in the second expected state It is possible to make the player expect that an opportunity to give an advantage will occur.

Feature E5. Advantageous transition in which the gaming state is shifted to an advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) in which the second period is maintained and is advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of an advantageous granting opportunity in the second period. means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1501 to S1522 in the main MPU 72);
Section ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 72) for ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games;
Equipped with
The section ending means is configured to determine, when a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the second expected state, the sum of the number of games executed in the second expected state and the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the second section is ended when the number of games reaches the upper limit.

According to feature E5, the second section is ended based on the number of games played in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous second section does not continue excessively. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, if a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the second expected state, the sum of the number of games executed in the second expected state and the number of games executed in the advantageous gaming state becomes the upper limit number of games. In this case, the second section is terminated. As a result, although the benefits of the second period can be obtained in the second expected state, the continuation of the second expected state has a disadvantage regarding the maximum number of games in the second period. becomes possible.

Feature E6. If an advantageous event occurs a predetermined number of times before the second expected state ends, the second section ends when the second expected state ends, and even if the second expected state ends, the advantageous event does not occur. Any one of features E1 to E5 characterized in that the device includes means for continuing the second section (a function of executing the processing of steps S1312 to S1315 in the main MPU 72) until the event occurs the predetermined number of times. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature E6, if the advantageous event has occurred a predetermined number of times before the second expected state ends, the second section ends when the second expected state ends; Even if the period ends, if the beneficial event has not occurred a predetermined number of times, the second section continues. As a result, in the case of the second section, it is guaranteed that the advantageous event will occur a predetermined number of times, making it possible to secure the advantage of the second section, and depending on the manner in which the advantageous event occurs. This makes it possible to diversify the end timing of the second section relative to the end timing of the second expected state.

Feature E7. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays the pattern;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A lottery means (a function of executing the processes of steps S401 to S408 in the main MPU 72) that executes a lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means;
a stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the fluctuating display of the picture on the picture display means;
The pattern may be configured such that the variable display of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition being satisfied, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the stop operation device being operated. A pattern display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) that controls the display means;
If a stop result corresponding to a winning result obtained in the lottery process is displayed after the fluctuation display of the symbol, a winning result corresponding to the winning result is established and a control corresponding to the winning result is executed. means (a function of executing the process of step S309 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The response execution means executes the award response when the award winning result (winning number = 1 to 3) is obtained in the lottery process and the award response stop result corresponding to the award winning result is displayed after the fluctuation of the symbol is displayed. A predetermined number of gaming media are given to the player as a result of winning a prize,
The grant response stop result is a result that is displayed when the stop operation means is operated in a grant response mode when the grant winning result is obtained in the lottery process,
This gaming machine includes means for notifying the granting mode (a function of executing a notification control process in the main side MPU 72, a function of executing notification control processing in the production side MPU 92, The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing business processing.

According to feature E7, in the second section, when a winning result is achieved, the award corresponding mode is notified, and game media corresponding to the achievement of the award corresponding to the award is awarded. This makes it possible to make the second section an advantageous section.

Note that for the configuration of features E1 to E7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. A section setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S807 and step S2004 in the main MPU 72) for setting a game section in a second section (advantageous section SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first section (normal section SC1); ,
advantageous setting means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1508, S1521, and S2308 in the main MPU 72) for causing the player to stay in an advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) in the second section;
Section ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1307 in the main MPU 72) for ending the second section based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games;
Equipped with
The advantageous setting means terminates the advantageous gaming state when the second section ends based on the number of games played in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games;
The section setting means is configured to continue the second section in which the second section continues thereafter, based on the fact that the advantageous gaming state ends before the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a section continuation means (a function of executing the process of step S2708 in the main MPU 72) for making the situation (advantageous maintenance section).

According to feature F1, the second section is terminated based on the number of games played in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, so that the second section advantageous to the player continues excessively. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In addition, if the second section ends based on the number of games played in the second section reaching the upper limit, the advantageous gaming state will also end. It becomes possible to create a gaming state in which the player can stay.

In this case, if the advantageous gaming state ends before the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, a second section continuation situation may occur in which the second section continues thereafter. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect that the second section will continue even after the advantageous gaming state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the section continuation means ends the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation situation reaches the number of continuation ending games.

According to feature F2, it is possible to make the trigger for ending the second section continuation situation clear to the player.

Feature F3. The section continuation means is based on the fact that the advantageous gaming state ends in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section is less than or equal to the number of continuable games set as the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games. , the gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the second section continues.

According to feature F3, it is possible to prevent the second section continuation situation from occurring even though the number of games played in the second section is close to the maximum number of games.

Feature F4. The section continuation means ends the second section when the number of games played in the second section continuation situation reaches the number of continuation ending games,
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the difference between the number of games that can be continued and the maximum number of games is greater than or equal to the number of games that can be continued.

According to feature F4, it is possible to make the trigger for ending the second section continuation situation clear for the player, and the number of games executed in the second section during the second section continuation situation is set to the upper limit game. It is possible to prevent the number from reaching the limit.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the advantageous setting means causes the transition to the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of an advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation situation.

According to feature F5, the player's degree of attention to the second section continuation situation can be increased because the advantageous gaming state is re-transferred based on the occurrence of an advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation situation. becomes.

Feature F6. When the advantageous gaming state ends and the second section continues, and if a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs again in the second section, the section ending means controls the second section. When the sum of the number of games played in the second period before the transition and the number of games played in the advantageous gaming state due to the second transition reaches the upper limit number of games, the second The gaming machine according to feature F5, characterized in that the section is ended.

According to feature F6, even if the configuration is such that the system re-transfers to the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of an advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation situation, the second section is prevented from continuing excessively. becomes possible.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F5 or F6, wherein the occurrence of the advantageous shift opportunity is the occurrence of a shift to a special gaming state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) that is advantageous to the player.

According to feature F7, when a transition to a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs in the second section continuation situation, a further transition to an advantageous gaming state also occurs. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a special gaming state will occur in the second section continuation situation.

Feature F8. A lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for winning combinations in the main MPU 72);
Based on a predetermined lottery result (setting of 1st BB winning data, setting of 2nd BB winning data, setting of 2nd RB winning data) in the lottery process, in a game subsequent to the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result. A predetermined response means (a function of executing bonus processing in the main MPU 72) to achieve a predetermined response status (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the first BB prize or second BB prize, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the second RB prize) )and,
Equipped with
Features F5 to F5 are characterized in that the advantageous setting means causes the game to shift to the advantageous gaming state based on the predetermined corresponding situation being reached in a situation where the second period is being continued based on the second period continuation situation. The gaming machine according to any one of F7.

According to feature F8, even if the lottery result of the lottery process becomes the predetermined lottery result in the second section continuation situation, the transition to the advantageous gaming state will not occur again, and the game will be more competitive than the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result. In the subsequent game, a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs again based on the occurrence of a predetermined response situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in the second section based on the second section continuation situation. As a result, players who are expecting to transition to an advantageous gaming state again will not only pay attention to the predetermined lottery result, but also ensure that the predetermined corresponding situation occurs in a game after the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result. In this case, attention should be paid to whether or not it is the second section depending on the continuation status of the second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F9. The advantageous setting means is characterized in that the advantageous gaming state is shifted to the advantageous gaming state based on the start of the first game of the predetermined corresponding situation in a situation where the second period is being continued based on the second period continuation situation. The gaming machine according to feature F8.

According to feature F9, a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs again based on the first game in the predetermined response situation being started in the second section according to the second section continuation situation. In the case of a lottery result, the player expects that the predetermined response situation will occur soon.

Feature F10. A second section performance control means (a function for executing performance control processing for the advantageous maintenance section in the performance side MPU 92) that executes a performance corresponding to the second section (advantageous maintenance performance) in the second section continuation situation,
The second section performance control means is characterized in that when the predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section continuation situation, the second section performance control means prevents the second section corresponding performance from being executed in the final game. The gaming machine according to feature F8 or F9.

According to feature F10, even if a predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section continuation situation, and an opportunity to enter the predetermined response situation occurs, the second section has ended in the predetermined response situation, so the player cannot return to the advantageous gaming state again. No transition will occur. On the other hand, if a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the final game of the second section continuation situation, the second section corresponding performance is not executed in the final game. As a result, even though the predetermined lottery result has occurred in the situation where the second section corresponding effect corresponding to the second section continuation situation is being executed and the opportunity to become the predetermined corresponding situation has occurred, the advantageous gaming state is returned to. This makes it difficult for the player to get the impression that the transition did not occur.

Note that for the configuration of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. A grant expectation setting means (a function that executes the process of step S1502 in the main MPU 72) that sets a grant expectation state (chance state ST7) that continues over multiple games;
A grant correspondence lottery means (chance state processing in the main side MPU 72) that executes a grant correspondence lottery process to determine whether or not to grant a benefit (transition to ART state ST9) when a grant correspondence opportunity occurs in the grant expectation state. function) and
A matching granting means (a function of executing the process of step S1508 in the main MPU 72) that grants the benefit based on the winning of the granting option in the granting lottery process;
A grant expectation performance control means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1714 and step S1722 in the performance side MPU 92) for causing a grant expectation performance (chance performance) to be performed in each game in the grant expectation state; ,
Equipped with
When the grant expectation setting means sets the grant expectation state in a situation where a specific performance (false omen performance) is being executed, the grant expectation performance control means controls execution of the specific performance to execute the grant expectation performance. (in the first embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step S1713 in the production side MPU 92, and in the sixth embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in step S5005 in the production side MPU 92). A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature G1, when a grant corresponding opportunity occurs in the grant expectation state, a grant corresponding lottery process is executed, and a benefit is awarded based on a grant corresponding winning in the grant corresponding lottery process. As a result, the player expects to be set to the award expectation state, and also expects that an opportunity for award response will occur in the award expectation state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by performing the award expectation effect in each game in the award expectation state, it is possible to suitably increase the player's sense of expectation regarding the award expectation state.

In this case, if the granting expectation state is set in a situation where a specific rendering is being executed, the execution of the currently running specific rendering is given priority over the execution of the granting expected rendering. As a result, if the expected granting effect is started when the granting expectation state is set and the player feels uncomfortable in relation to the content of the specific performance up to that point, the specific performance can be left as is. It becomes possible to continue. In addition, even if the specific performance continues without the expected grant performance being executed, the gaming state remains in the expected grant state, so the benefit of being set in the expected grant state is lost. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing the problem from occurring.

Feature G2. A predetermined expectation setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1524 in the main MPU 72) that sets a predetermined expectation state (false precursor state ST5) that continues over multiple games;
Specific effect control means (step S1704 in the effect-side MPU 92) for performing the specific effect that allows the player to expect the benefit or another benefit to be provided in each game in the predetermined expectation state , a function of executing the processes of step S1705, step S1710 and step S1723),
The gaming machine according to feature G1, comprising:

According to feature G2, by executing a specific performance that makes it possible for the player to expect a bonus to be given in each game by entering a predetermined expectation state, the player who has confirmed the specific performance can receive the bonus. This will increase the interest of the game as players will look forward to receiving the bonus. In this case, when the configuration of feature G1 is provided and the granting expectation state is set in a situation where a specific performance is being executed, the execution of the specific performance being executed is given priority over the execution of the granting expected performance. As a result, if the expected granting effect is started when the granting expectation state is set and the player feels uncomfortable in relation to the content of the specific performance up to that point, the specific performance can be left as is. It becomes possible to continue.

Feature G3. The predetermined expected state includes a first predetermined expected state (main precursor state ST6) in which the benefit or another benefit continues over multiple games and is awarded after the end; There is a second predetermined expected state (false omen state ST5) in which another benefit is not granted,
When the provision expectation setting means sets the provision expectation state in a situation in which the specific performance corresponding to the second predetermined expectation state is being executed, the performance priority means controls the performance of the specific performance from the provision expectation state. The gaming machine according to feature G2, characterized in that priority is given to execution of the performance.

According to feature G3, even in a situation where a specific effect corresponding to the second predetermined expected state in which no benefit is awarded after the end of the execution is executed, the execution of the specific effect that is currently being executed is is given priority over the execution of the expected performance. As a result, even if the specific performance corresponds to the second predetermined expected state, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the content of the performance.

Feature G4. The gaming machine according to feature G3, wherein the benefit granted by the correspondence granting means and the benefit granted after the first predetermined expectation state ends are the same.

If the configuration is such that execution of the specific performance is continued even if the granting expectation state occurs during the second predetermined expected state, a prize corresponding to the grant may be won in the granting lottery process while the specific performance is being executed. is assumed. On the other hand, according to feature G4, since the benefit given in that case is the same as the benefit given after the end of the first predetermined expected state, the specific performance being executed corresponds to the first predetermined expected state. This makes it possible to make the player think that it is a specific performance.

Feature G5. In a situation where execution of the specific performance is prioritized by the performance priority means, based on the fact that the award-compatible lottery has been won in the award-compatible lottery process, a means for executing a corresponding performance (direction) The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S1814 in the side MPU 92.

According to feature G5, in a situation where execution of a specific performance is given priority, if a grant-compatible winning is achieved in the grant-compatible lottery process, the corresponding performance is executed, so that the execution of the specific performance is prioritized. It becomes possible to clearly indicate to the player that a benefit will be given even in a situation where the player

Feature G6. The specific performances include a first specific performance (a false omen performance that is not a cancellation target in the sixth embodiment) and a second specific performance (a false omen performance that is a cancellation target in the sixth embodiment),
When the grant expectation setting means sets the grant expectation state in a situation where the first specific performance is being executed, the performance priority means prioritizes execution of the first specific performance over execution of the grant expected performance. It is a priority,
When the grant expectation setting means sets the grant expectation state in a situation where the second specific performance is being executed, the grant expectation performance control means terminates the second specific performance and executes the grant expectation performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means for starting (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S5005 in the production side MPU 92).

According to feature G6, depending on the type of specific performance, there are cases where priority is given to continuation of the specific performance and cases where priority is given to the new start of the expected performance. This makes it possible to perform effects in a preferable manner in each situation.

Feature G7. The expected grant performance control means controls the expected grant performance when the specific performance ends in a situation where the grant expectation state is in which execution of the specific performance is given priority over execution of the expected grant performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, further comprising a post-completion start means (a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the production side MPU 92).

According to feature G7, since the expected presentation is started after the specific presentation ends, it is possible to provide an opportunity for the expected presentation to be performed.

Feature G8. When the number of games executed in the award expectation state without becoming the award corresponding winning in the award corresponding lottery process reaches the termination reference number of games, the means for terminating the award expectation state (steps in the main MPU 72) A function to execute the processing from S1510 to S1512),
The after-end starting means is configured to start the expected grant performance when the specific performance ends in a situation in which the grant is expected and execution of the specific performance is given priority over execution of the expected grant performance. The gaming machine according to feature G7, characterized in that the gaming machine can be continued until the end standard number of games are played.

According to feature G8, even if the expected presentation is started after the specific presentation ends, the expected presentation can be continued until the end standard number of games are played, so the specific presentation is not executed. It becomes possible to execute the grant expectation performance in the same manner as in the case where the grant expectation state is reached in a situation where the grant is not expected.

Feature G9. The expected grant performance control means is configured to control the expected grant performance even if the specific performance ends in a situation where the grant expectation state is in which execution of the specific performance is given priority over execution of the expected grant performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the gaming machine does not start.

According to feature G9, it is possible to prevent the expected performance from being performed following the specific performance.

Note that for the configuration of features G1 to G9, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A special setting means (a function for executing a pseudo bonus start process in the main MPU 72) for setting a special gaming state (pseudo bonus state);
The total number of games granted to the player (the value of the number of continuous games counter 131) at least at the start of the special gaming state and during the execution of the special gaming state is the number of granting reference games (the value of the number of transition condition games counter 132). A benefit granting means (main system) that grants a benefit (transition to ART state ST9) to a player based on the fulfillment of the number of games condition, which is either the number of games exceeds the number of games given (value) or the number of games granted is equal to or greater than the standard number of games. a function of executing the process of step S4505 in the side MPU 72);
a standard lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S4304 and step S4305 in the main MPU 72) that determines the award standard number of games by lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature H1, if the number of games condition is met by the total number of games awarded to the player in the special gaming state exceeding the awarding reference number of games or being equal to or greater than the awarding reference number of games, the player In a configuration in which benefits are awarded, the award standard number of games is determined by lottery. As a result, when the special game state is entered, the player expects that the award standard number of games, which is a smaller number of games, will be selected, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature H2. It is equipped with a game number awarding means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4403 to S4413 in the main MPU 72) that awards the number of games to the player when the special awarding condition is satisfied during the execution of the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature H1.

According to feature H2, even if the number of games condition is not satisfied at the stage when the standard number of games to be awarded is determined by lottery, the number of games will be awarded to the player even if the special gaming state is being executed. The number of games condition can be satisfied. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the special game state.

Feature H3. If the number of games condition is not satisfied after the number of games is awarded by the number of games granting means, the number of games awarded to the player is used up in the special game state (processing in step S4407 in the main MPU 72) The gaming machine according to feature H2, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the following:

According to feature H3, in a situation where the number of games condition is not satisfied, it is possible to increase the number of consecutive games in the special gaming state as the special granting condition is satisfied.

Feature H4. If the number of games condition is satisfied after the number of games is awarded by the number of games awarding means, the number of games currently awarded by the number of games awarding means is an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player that occurs after the end of the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature H2 or H3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means (a function of executing the process of step S4409 in the main MPU 72) for causing the game to be completed in the (ART state ST9).

According to feature H4, when the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the number of games that triggered the establishment of the number-of-games condition is also consumed in the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, so the advantageous gaming state continues. The more games you play, the easier it becomes.

Feature H5. The number-of-games granting means determines the manner in which the number of games is determined when the number of games is granted to the player after the number-of-games condition is met, and the number of games is awarded to the player before the number-of-games condition is met. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H4, characterized in that the manner in which the number of games is determined is different from that in the case where the number of games is determined.

According to feature H5, the manner in which the number of games is determined when the number of games is awarded for the fulfillment of the special granting condition changes depending on whether the number of games condition is met. It is possible to diversify aspects while relating them to whether or not the number of games condition is met.

Feature H6. The benefit granting means is configured to transition to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player after the special gaming state ends as the granting of the benefit;
The number of games assigning means is
When the number of games is awarded to the player before the number of games condition is satisfied, means for determining the number of games to be awarded according to the determination mode corresponding to the special gaming state (processing of steps S4403 to S4405 in the main MPU 72) ) and
When the number of games is awarded to the player after the number of games condition is satisfied, means for determining the number of games to be awarded according to the determination mode corresponding to the advantageous gaming state (processing from step S4410 to step S4412 in the main MPU 72) function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature H6, before the number-of-games condition is satisfied, it becomes possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a decision mode suitable for the special gaming state, and after the number-of-games condition is satisfied, the number of games to be given to the player is changed to an advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in an appropriate manner.

Feature H7. According to any one of features H1 to H6, the benefit granting means causes the player to transition to an advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) after the end of the special gaming state as the granting of the benefit. Game machine.

According to feature H7, if the number-of-games condition is met, the game enters the advantageous gaming state after the special gaming state ends, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the number-of-games condition is met. Become.

Feature H8. It is characterized by comprising means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4301 to S4303 in the main MPU 72) for determining the initial number of consecutive games in the special gaming state by lottery when the special gaming state is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7.

According to feature H8, not only the grant standard number of games but also the initial number of continuous games in the special gaming state are determined by lottery, so it is possible to diversify the patterns of each number of games when the number of games condition is satisfied. Become.

Feature H9. Even if the number-of-games condition is satisfied by the initial number of consecutive games set when the special gaming state is started, means (main side MPU 72 The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the process of step S4303 in .

According to feature H9, even if the number of games condition is met at the stage when the initial number of consecutive games is determined, the initial number of consecutive games is consumed in the special gaming state, so the number of games condition is met at the start of the special gaming state. Even if the game is played in a special game state, it is possible to play a certain amount of games in the special game state.

Note that for the configuration of features H1 to H9, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A special setting means (a function for executing a pseudo bonus start process in the main MPU 72) for setting a special gaming state (pseudo bonus state);
a game number awarding means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4403 to S4413 in the main MPU 72) that awards the number of games to the player when the special awarding condition is satisfied in the special game state;
When the special gaming state ends in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, an advantageous transition means (in the main MPU 72) that transitions to an advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) advantageous to the player after the special gaming state ends function to execute the process of step S4505);
Equipped with
The number of games assigning means is
means for increasing the number of remaining continuation games in the special gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S4407 in the main MPU 72) when the special granting condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not satisfied;
When the special award condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, means for increasing the number of remaining continuation games in the advantageous gaming state (a function of executing the process of step S4409 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, if the special gaming state ends in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, the advantageous transition condition is satisfied in the special gaming state because the special gaming state is transitioned to the advantageous gaming state after the end of the special gaming state. The player will expect this, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. In this configuration, if the special award condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not satisfied, the number of remaining continuation games in the special gaming state increases. This makes it possible to increase the chances that advantageous transition conditions will be satisfied in the special gaming state. On the other hand, if the special grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition has already been satisfied, the number of remaining consecutive games in the advantageous gaming state increases. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the number of remaining consecutive games in the special game state increases even though the advantageous transition conditions have already been met, causing the game in the special game state to be postponed. At the same time, it becomes possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of remaining consecutive games in an advantageous gaming state.

Feature I2. The number-of-games granting means determines the manner in which the number of games is determined when the number of games is granted to the player after the advantageous transition condition is established, and the number of games is granted to the player before the advantageous transition condition is established. The gaming machine according to feature I1, characterized in that the manner in which the number of games is determined is different from that in the case where the number of games is determined.

According to feature I2, the manner in which the number of games is determined in the case where the number of games is awarded for the fulfillment of the special granting condition changes depending on whether the advantageous transfer condition is satisfied. It becomes possible to diversify aspects while relating them to whether or not favorable transition conditions are met.

Feature I3. The number of games assigning means is
When awarding the number of games to the player before the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, means for determining the number of games to be awarded according to the determination mode corresponding to the special gaming state (processing of steps S4403 to S4405 in the main MPU 72) ) and
When the number of games to be awarded is awarded to the player after the advantageous transition condition is established, means for determining the number of games to be awarded according to the determination mode corresponding to the advantageous gaming state (the processing of steps S4410 to S4412 in the main side MPU 72) function) and
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature I3, before the advantageous transition condition is established, it is possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in a decision mode suitable for the special gaming state, and after the advantageous transition condition is established, the advantageous gaming state is established. It becomes possible to determine the number of games to be given to the player in an appropriate manner.

Feature I4. Features I1 to I1 characterized in that the manner in which the number of games is awarded after the advantageous transition condition is satisfied is more advantageous to the player than the manner in which the number of games is awarded before the advantageous transition condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of I3.

According to feature I4, it is more advantageous for the player if the advantageous transition condition is satisfied earlier in the special gaming state, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the advantageous transition condition is satisfied. .

Feature I5. The advantageous transition condition is established when the number of games awarded to the player in the special gaming state exceeds the award reference number of games (the value of the transfer condition game number counter 132) or becomes equal to or greater than the award reference number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4.

According to feature I5, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games awarded to the player in the special game state.

Feature I6. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state have the same or substantially the same expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games.

According to feature I6, because the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is the same or substantially the same in the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state, the number of games awarded to the player is different from the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state. It becomes possible to make it possible to avoid giving a difference to the advantage even if the game is played in any of the game states.

Note that for the configuration of features I1 to I6, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A predetermined setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined termination means (steps in the main MPU 72) that terminates the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuation games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becoming 0 games; function to execute the process of S2703),
Game number notification means (presentation) that performs game number notification to enable the player to recognize the number of games to be notified (the value of the display counter 126) out of the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state. a function of executing the processes of step S2806 and step S2810 in the side MPU 92);
A special response performance (special additional performance) corresponding to the number of non-notification target games (value of stock game number counter 127) which is the difference between the number of notification target games and the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state is executed. A special response execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3018, S3216, and S3220 in the production side MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature J1, the number of games to be notified among the remaining number of consecutive games in a predetermined gaming state is notified to the player by the game number notification, but the number of games not to be notified, which is not the number of games to be notified, is Players are not notified. Then, a special response effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J2. a game number increasing means (a function of executing an add-on process in the main MPU 72) that increases the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state;
When the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state is increased by the number of games increasing means, means for adding at least a part of the number of games to be increased to the number of games to be notified (step S3010 in the production side MPU 92) function) and
The gaming machine according to feature J1, characterized by comprising:

According to feature J2, since the number of non-notification target games is added during the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to execute a special response effect as a result of the addition.

Feature J3. comprising a notification addition means (a function of executing the process of step S3204 in the production side MPU 92) for adding the number of transition target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-report target games, to the number of notification target games;
Feature J1 or J2 is characterized in that the special response execution means executes, as the special response performance, a performance that corresponds to the addition of the number of games to be transferred to the number of games to be notified. The game machine described.

According to feature J3, at least a part of the number of games not to be notified is added to the number of games to be notified, and a corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the execution timing of the effect in which the number of games is added to the number of games to be notified.

Feature J4. The notification addition means is configured to add the non-notification target game even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference between the number of notification target games and the remaining number of continued games in the predetermined gaming state, is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to feature J3, wherein the number of games to be transferred is selected from among a plurality of types of number of games that do not exceed the number of games.

According to feature J4, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games to be transferred is generated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J5. The gaming machine according to feature J3 or J4, wherein the special response execution means is capable of executing different types of special response effects even in a situation where the number of games to be transferred is the same.

According to feature J5, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special response performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J6. The notification adding means calculates the number of transition target games at one time in the game number selection process within a range that does not exceed the number of non-report target games, which is the difference between the number of target games to be notified and the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state. Equipped with multiple selection means (a function to execute the processing of step S3102 and step S3103 in the production side MPU 92) for making multiple selections in a processing time,
The special response execution means is a means for causing addition of the plurality of numbers of transfer target games selected by the plural selection means to the number of notification target games in the special response effects executed at different timings. A function of executing the processing of step S3021 and step S3216 in the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature J6, it is possible to increase the frequency with which special response effects are executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J7. The special response execution means is configured to execute the transfer target game in which a number of games is given to each of a plurality of games as one of the special response effects, and the sum of the assigned game numbers becomes a trigger for executing the addition response effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J6, characterized in that the game machine executes a performance that becomes a number.

According to feature J7, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature J8. a game number increasing means (a function of executing an add-on process in the main MPU 72) that increases the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state;
When the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the special response effect is being executed, the number of games added to the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state due to the establishment of the predetermined grant condition is the number of games to be notified. means for additionally performing a production corresponding to the addition to the special corresponding production (a function of executing the process of step S2908 in the production side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J7, characterized by comprising:

According to feature J8, even in a situation where a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect than an increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. This makes it possible to provide surprise to the player regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

Note that for the configuration of features J1 to J8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the inventions of the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, the feature H group, the feature I group, and the feature J group, the following problems can be solved. be.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first control means (main side MPU 72) that manages the progress of the game;
a second control means (performance side MPU 92) that controls execution of the performance based on information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
A predetermined setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined termination means (steps in the main MPU 72) that terminates the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuation games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becoming 0 games; function to execute the process of S2703),
Game number increasing means for increasing the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state (a function of executing the processes of step S2410, step S2501, and step S2601 in the main MPU 72) and,
a first transmitting means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the main MPU 72) that transmits first transmitting information (ART start command) corresponding to the start of the predetermined gaming state;
When the number of remaining consecutive games is increased by the number of games increasing means, second transmission information (direct top-up command, A-loop addition command, B-loop addition command) corresponding to the increased number of games is transmitted. a second transmission means (a function of executing the processes of step S2411, step S2502, and step S2603 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The second control means
a predetermined effect starting means (a function of executing the process of step S2811 in the effect-side MPU 92) for starting an effect corresponding to the predetermined gaming state based on reception of the first transmission information;
a reception response means (production side MPU 92 (a function to execute the processes of step S2907, step S2908, step S3010, and step S3302);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, the first control means executes a process for increasing the number of remaining continuation games in a predetermined gaming state, and the second control means executes a process corresponding to the increase in the number of continuation games. Processing is executed. As a result, while the progress control of a predetermined game state is performed centrally in the first control means, the processing load on the first control means does not increase even if complex effects are performed corresponding to an increase in the number of consecutive games. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably control the predetermined gaming state.

Feature K2. The first control means sets an increasing state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined entry opportunity in the predetermined gaming state, and continues the increasing state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. a function of executing the processing of step S2426 and steps S2604 to S2615 in the main MPU 72,
The number of games increasing means is configured to increase the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state by a predetermined increased number of games each time the predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the increased state,
The second control means includes a total notification means (which executes the process of step S3304 in the production side MPU 92) for notifying the player of notification target information corresponding to the plurality of increases in the predetermined increased number of games that have occurred in the increase state. The gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function.

According to feature K2, the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state is increased by the predetermined number of additional games each time the predetermined granting condition is satisfied by entering the increasing state, so the player expects to enter the increasing state. That will happen. In addition, since the player is notified of notification target information corresponding to multiple increases in the predetermined number of games that occur in the increased state, it is possible to notify the player that a large number of games have been granted at once. Become.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein the total notification means notifies the player of notification target information corresponding to the number of games awarded in the increased state based on the completion of the increased state.

According to feature K3, when an increasing state occurs, the player is notified of the notification target information corresponding to the number of games awarded in the increasing state based on the end of the increasing state. It becomes possible to notify at once that the number of games has been awarded.

Feature K4. The total notification means notifies the player of the notification target information in a situation where it is possible to notify the player that the number of games awarded in the increased state is equal to or greater than a specific reference number of games;
The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, wherein the specific standard number of games is a number of games that is more than one times the predetermined increased number of games.

According to feature K4, when the notification target information is notified to the player, it is notified at once that the number of games that is more than multiple times the predetermined number of increased games has been awarded, so that the execution of the notification is It becomes possible to give surprise to the player.

Feature K5. The first control means includes:
In the increasing state, when the increasing state ends after the predetermined increase in the number of games has been increased more than a specific reference number of times, means for setting a standby state for waiting for the progress of the game based on the player's operation (in the main MPU 72) function to execute the process of step S2613);
a third transmission means (a function for executing the process of step S2614 in the main MPU 72) that transmits third transmission information corresponding to the setting of the standby state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the total notification means notifies the player of the notification target information based on receiving the third transmission information.

According to feature K5, since the notification target information is notified to the player in a state where the progress of the game based on the player's operation is on standby, it is possible to increase the attention level of the player to the notification target information. It is possible to increase it.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of games is larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increased number of games.

According to feature K6, when the notification target information is notified, it is possible to notify the player that a specific standard number of games or more has been awarded. It becomes possible to give surprise to the player. In addition, because the value of the specific standard number of games is set as a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific standard number of games by the predetermined number of increased games, the number of games granted in the increased state will be consumed during the execution of the increased state. Even if the number of games is not notified to the player at the timing when the increasing state ends, it is possible to make the number of games not notified to the player equal to or more than the specific reference number of games.

Feature K7. The reception handling means includes:
Notifying means for adding the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information to the number of games to be notified in order to make the player aware of the number of games (a function of executing the processing of step S2903 and step S2905 in the production side MPU 92);
Non-notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S3010 and step S3302 in the production side MPU 92) that adds the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information to the number of non-notification target games that are not made recognizable to the player;
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized by comprising:

According to feature K7, when the number of remaining continuation games in a predetermined gaming state is increased by the main control means, there are cases in which the number of games to be increased is immediately notified and cases in which it is not notified. . This makes it possible to diversify the timing of notifying the increase in the number of remaining consecutive games, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the control for diversifying the notification timing is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K8. The first control means includes a continuous game number storage means (ART game number counter 121) that stores the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state,
The number of games increasing means is configured to increase the number of games to be notified regardless of whether the number of games to be notified is added by the notifying means or the number of games to be notified is added by the non-notifying means. The gaming machine according to feature K7, characterized in that the number of games awarded based on the establishment of a predetermined granting condition is added to the number of consecutive games storage means.

According to feature K8, no matter how the notification that the number of remaining consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state increases is performed, the first control means increases the number of games awarded based on the establishment of the predetermined granting condition. Since it is only necessary to add the number to the number of consecutive games storage means, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K9. The second control means is a special response execution means (processing of steps S3018, S3216, and S3220 in the production side MPU 92) that causes a special response production (special additional production) corresponding to the number of non-notification target games to be executed. The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the above function.

According to feature K9, the number of games to be notified out of the remaining number of consecutive games in a predetermined gaming state is notified to the player by game number notification, but the number of games not to be notified, which is not the number of games to be notified, is Players are not notified. Then, a special response effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed. As a result, an effect corresponding to the number of non-notification target games is executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, since the execution control of the performance is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K10. The second control means includes a notification addition means (a function of executing the process of step S3204 in the performance side MPU 92) that adds the number of transition target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-report target games, to the number of notification target games. Prepare,
The special response execution means is characterized in that, as the special response performance, a performance corresponding to the addition of the number of games to be transferred to the number of games to be notified is executed, as described in feature K9. Game machine.

According to feature K10, at least a part of the number of games not to be notified is added to the number of games to be notified, and a corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the execution timing of the effect in which the number of games is added to the number of games to be notified. Moreover, since the execution control of the performance is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K11. The notification addition means is configured to add the non-notification target game even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games, which is the difference between the number of notification target games and the remaining number of continued games in the predetermined gaming state, is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to feature K10, characterized in that the number of games to be transferred is selected from among a plurality of types of number of games that do not exceed the number of games.

According to feature K11, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games to be transferred is generated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, since the control for diversifying the number of games to be transferred is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K12. The gaming machine according to feature K10 or K11, wherein the special response execution means is capable of executing different types of the special response effects even in a situation where the number of games to be transferred is the same.

According to feature K12, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special response performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the control for diversifying the execution mode of the special response effect is performed in the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means. Become.

Feature K13. The notification adding means calculates the number of transition target games at one time in the game number selection process within a range that does not exceed the number of non-report target games, which is the difference between the number of target games to be notified and the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state. Equipped with multiple selection means (a function to execute the processing of step S3102 and step S3103 in the production side MPU 92) for making multiple selections in a processing time,
The special response execution means is a means for causing addition of the plurality of numbers of transfer target games selected by the plural selection means to the number of notification target games in the special response effects executed at different timings. A function of executing the processing of step S3021 and step S3216 in the production side MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K12, characterized by comprising:

According to feature K13, it is possible to increase the frequency with which special response effects are executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, since the control for increasing the execution frequency of the special response effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K14. The special response execution means is configured to execute the transfer target game in which a number of games is given to each of a plurality of games as one of the special response effects, and the sum of the assigned game numbers becomes a trigger for executing the addition response effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K13, characterized in that the gaming machine executes a performance that becomes a number.

According to feature K14, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K15. When the predetermined granting condition is satisfied in a situation where the special response performance is being executed, the second control means controls the game that is added to the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state due to the establishment of the predetermined granting condition. means for additionally performing a performance corresponding to the number being added to the number of games to be notified to the special corresponding performance (a function of executing the process of step S2908 in the performance side MPU 92). The gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K14.

According to feature K15, even in a situation where a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect than an increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. This makes it possible to provide surprise to the player regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified. Furthermore, since the control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Note that for the configuration of features K1 to K15, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention of the feature K group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably control the execution of a predetermined gaming state, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A predetermined setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined termination means (steps in the main MPU 72) that terminates the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuation games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becoming 0 games; function to execute the process of S2703),
an increasing state setting means for setting an increasing state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined entry trigger in the predetermined gaming state and continuing the increasing state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
a game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2601 in the main MPU 72) that increases the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state by a predetermined increased number of games each time a predetermined provision condition is satisfied in the increased state;
A special effect processing execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2613 in the main MPU 72) that executes a special effect process based on the fact that the predetermined increased number of games increases more than a specific reference number of times in the increase state;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature L1, each time the predetermined granting condition is satisfied by entering the increasing state, the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state is increased by the predetermined number of additional games, so the player expects to enter the increasing state. That will happen. In this case, the special effect processing is executed based on the fact that the predetermined number of increased games has increased more than a specific standard number of times in the increase state, so if a large number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined game state is awarded, It becomes possible to provide the player with a corresponding performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein even if the increased state is set, the performance corresponding to the increased state is not executed until the special performance processing is executed.

According to feature L2, the special performance process is suddenly executed in a situation where the player is not aware of the increasing state, making it possible to provide surprise.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the special performance processing execution means sets, as the special performance processing, a standby state in which the progress of the game based on the player's operation is on standby.

According to feature L3, when a large number of remaining continuation games in a predetermined gaming state is awarded, the progress of the game based on the player's operation is put on hold. It is possible to emphasize things.

Feature L4. Feature L1 characterized in that the special effect processing execution means executes the special effect process when the increased state ends after the predetermined increased number of games increases by more than the specified reference number of times in the increased state. The gaming machine according to any one of L3 to L3.

According to feature L4, when an increasing state occurs, the special effect processing is executed based on the end of the increasing state, so the special effect processing is executed in a situation where a large number of games are given. In addition, it becomes possible to inform the player that the increasing state has been set and that the increasing state has ended by executing the special effect processing.

Feature L5. When the special effect processing is executed, a total notification means (a function of executing the process of step S3304 in the effect side MPU 92) for notifying the player of the information to be notified corresponding to the total number of games given in the increased state. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4.

According to feature L5, it is possible to notify at once that a large number of games have been awarded.

Feature L6. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of games is larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increased number of games.

According to feature L6, the special effect process is executed when a specific standard number of games or more is given in the increasing state, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the special effect process. . In addition, because the value of the specific standard number of games is set as a value larger than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific standard number of games by the predetermined number of increased games, the number of games granted in the increased state will be consumed during the execution of the increased state. Even if the number of games is increased, the special effect processing can be executed in a situation where the number of unused games granted in the increased state is equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games.

Note that for the configuration of features L1 to L6, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A predetermined setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined termination means (steps in the main MPU 72) that terminates the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuation games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becoming 0 games; function to execute the process of S2703),
non-notification target storage means (stock game number counter 127) for storing the number of non-notification target games that are not notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state;
A specific increase state setting means (in the main MPU 72) that sets a specific increase state (A loop) based on the occurrence of a specific entry trigger in the predetermined gaming state and continues the specific increase state until a specific end condition is satisfied. A function to execute the processing of steps S2416 to S2418);
a number-of-games increasing unit (a function of executing the process of step S2501 in the main MPU 72) that increases the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state by a specific number of increased games each time a specific granting condition is satisfied in the specific increased state;
When set to the specific increase state, a specific response performance control means (executes the processing of steps S3004 and S3005 in the production side MPU 92) so that the specific response production (expected production) is executed over the number of specific production games. function) and
Non-notification target adding means (processing of step S3010 in the performance side MPU 92 ) and
When the specific response effect is executed for the number of specific effect games, a special response corresponding to the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means even if the specific increase state has not ended. A special response execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3018, S3216, and S3220 in the performance side MPU 92) for causing the performance (special additional performance) to be executed;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature M1, when a specific increase state occurs in a predetermined gaming state, the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state is increased by the specific increase number of games each time the specific granting condition is satisfied, so that the player can It is expected that the number will increase. In addition, the number of games given in the specific increase state is temporarily given as the number of non-notification target games, while when the specific increase state is set, the specific corresponding effect is executed over the number of specific production games. , it becomes possible to make the player expect how much the number of non-notification target games will increase in the situation where the specific corresponding performance is being executed. In addition, if the specific response performance is executed for the number of specific performance games, the special response performance corresponding to the number of non-notification target games at that time will be executed even if the specific increase state has not ended. . As a result, while the specific response performance is being executed, the player expects the content of the special response performance that will be executed afterwards. Furthermore, it is possible to start the special response effect earlier than in a configuration in which the special response effect is not executed until the specific increase state ends.

Feature M2. The specific increasing state setting means may terminate the specific increasing state if the specific ending condition is satisfied even after the specific increasing state is set and before the specific effect game number is exhausted. The gaming machine described in characteristic feature M1.

According to feature M2, it is possible to create a situation in which the specific increasing state ends before the specific corresponding performance is completed, and a situation in which the specific increasing state continues even after the specific corresponding performance is completed.

Feature M3. The special response execution means is configured to perform, as the special response performance, a number of transition target games that is at least a part of the number of games stored in the non-report target storage means to a number of notification target games to be notified to the player. The gaming machine according to feature M1 or M2, characterized in that a performance corresponding to the addition is executed.

According to feature M3, as a special response performance, a performance corresponding to the number of transition target games, which is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games, being added to the number of notification target games is executed. It becomes possible to increase the attention level of the players.

Feature M4. Multiple selection means (in the performance side MPU 92) for selecting a plurality of the number of transition target games in one processing time of the game number selection process within a range not exceeding the number of non-report target games stored in the non-report target storage means a function of executing the processing of step S3102 and step S3103),
The special response execution means is a means for causing addition of the plurality of numbers of transfer target games selected by the plural selection means to the number of notification target games in the special response effects executed at different timings. The gaming machine according to feature M3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the processing of step S3021 and step S3216 in the production side MPU 92.

According to feature M4, it is possible to increase the frequency with which special response effects are executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature M5. The special response execution means is configured to execute the transfer target game in which a number of games is given to each of a plurality of games as one of the special response effects, and the sum of the assigned game numbers becomes a trigger for executing the addition response effect. The gaming machine according to feature M3 or M4, which is characterized by executing a performance that becomes a number.

According to feature M5, it is possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases over a plurality of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature M6. a game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2410 in the main MPU 72) that increases the number of remaining continuation games in the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined granting condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state;
When the predetermined grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the special response effect is being executed, the number of games added to the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state due to the establishment of the predetermined grant condition is the number of games to be notified. means for additionally performing a production corresponding to the addition to the special corresponding production (a function of executing the process of step S2908 in the production side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5, characterized by comprising:

According to feature M6, even in a situation where a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect than an increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. This makes it possible to provide surprise to the player regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

Feature M7. The special response execution means is configured to allow different special response effects to be executed even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage unit is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6.

According to feature M7, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the special response performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature M8. The special response execution means is configured to perform, as the special response performance, a number of transition target games that is at least a part of the number of games stored in the non-report target storage means to a number of notification target games to be notified to the player. The effect corresponding to the addition is executed, and even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is the same number of games. The gaming machine according to feature M7, wherein the number of games to be transferred is selected from among a plurality of types of numbers of games that do not exceed the number of non-notification target games.

According to feature M8, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games to be transferred is generated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that for the configuration of features M1 to M8, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics N group>
Feature N1. A predetermined setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2308 in the main MPU 72) for setting a predetermined gaming state (ART state ST9);
Predetermined termination means (steps in the main MPU 72) that terminates the predetermined game state based on the number of remaining continuation games (value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined game state becoming 0 games; function to execute the process of S2703),
Game number notification means (presentation) that performs game number notification to enable the player to recognize the number of games to be notified (the value of the display counter 126) out of the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state. a function of executing the processes of step S2806 and step S2810 in the side MPU 92);
non-notification target storage means (stock game number counter 127) for storing the number of non-notification target games that are not notified to the player among the remaining number of continuous games in the predetermined gaming state;
In a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, if the number of notification target games becomes 0 games, the number of non-notification target games is stored in the non-notification target storage means. When the number of non-notification target games is greater than the reference number of games at the end (first release reference value, second release reference value), the predetermined game state is changed in a different manner than when it is less than the end reference number of games. Continuous performance execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3406, S3410, and S3414 in the performance side MPU 92) for causing continuous performances (first release performance, second release performance, third release performance) to be executed; ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature N1, even if the number of games to be notified becomes 0, there is a number of non-notification target games that are not notified to the player among the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state. It is possible to make the player expect that the gaming state will continue. In this case, if the number of games eligible for notification is 0 games in a situation where the number of games eligible for notification is 1 or more, the number of games eligible for notification will vary depending on whether the number of games eligible for notification is equal to or greater than the reference number of games at the end of the game. A continuation performance of a predetermined gaming state is executed in this manner. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of the continuous performance according to the number of non-notification target games, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature N2. The continuous performance execution means is configured to execute the non-notification target when the number of notification target games becomes 0 games in a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means. If the number of non-notification target games stored in the storage means is greater than the reference number of games at the end, the number of games that is at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is used as the continuous effect. It is characterized by comprising a game number notification execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S3410 and step S3414 in the performance side MPU 92) that executes a performance (second release performance, third release performance) that adds to the number. The gaming machine described in feature N1.

According to feature N2, when the number of games to be notified becomes 0 games and the number of games not to be notified is equal to or greater than the reference number of games at the end, the predetermined gaming state continues to some extent. In such a case, by notifying the player of at least a portion of the number of non-notification target games, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the predetermined gaming state will continue.

Feature N3. The continuous performance execution means is
In a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, when the number of notification target games becomes 0 games, the number of non-notification target games is stored in the non-notification target storage unit. If the number of non-notification target games is less than the reference number of games at the end, as the continuous performance, a performance (second release performance) is performed in which the entire number of non-notification target games is added to the number of notification target games. A first continuous performance execution means (a function for executing the process of step S3410 in the performance side MPU 92),
In a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means, when the number of notification target games becomes 0 games, the number of non-notification target games is stored in the non-notification target storage unit. When the number of non-notification target games is greater than the reference number of games at the end, the continuous effect is a performance (the first 3 release performance) (a function to execute the process of step S3414 in the performance side MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature N3, when the number of games targeted for notification becomes 0, at least a portion of the number of games targeted for notification is notified to the player, thereby giving the player a sense of security that the predetermined gaming state will continue. It becomes possible to give. In this case, if the number of games not to be notified is greater than the reference number of games at the end, only a portion of the number of games not to be notified is notified to the player. This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the continuation effect of the predetermined gaming state is executed, and makes players expect that the predetermined gaming state will still continue even if the number of games to be notified approaches 0. becomes possible.

Feature N4. The gaming machine according to feature N3, wherein the second continuous performance execution means selects the number of transition target games from a plurality of types of game numbers within a range that does not exceed the number of non-notification target games.

According to feature N4, it is possible to diversify the number of games to be transferred.

Feature N5. The continuous performance execution means is configured to execute the non-notification target when the number of notification target games becomes 0 games in a situation where the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means. If the number of non-notification target games stored in the storage means is smaller than the reference number of games at the end, the predetermined number of games remaining in the predetermined gaming state is not notified to the player as the continuation effect. Features N1 to N4 are characterized in that they are equipped with a means (a function of executing the process of step S3406 in the performance side MPU 92) for executing a performance (first release performance) that uses up the remaining number of consecutive games in the gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to feature N5, when the number of games to be notified becomes 0 games and the number of games not to be notified is less than the reference number of games at the end, the remaining number of consecutive games in the predetermined gaming state is not notified to the player. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for continuation of the predetermined gaming state from being lowered.

Note that for the configuration of features N1 to N5, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to each invention of the feature L group, the feature M group, and the feature N group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristics Group O>
Feature O1. a first lottery means (for example, a function of executing a transition lottery process for a false precursor state in the main MPU 72) that executes a first lottery process using numerical information when a first lottery opportunity occurs;
a second lottery means (for example, a function of executing a transition lottery process for a chance state in the main MPU 72) that executes a second lottery process using numerical information when a second lottery opportunity occurs;
Predetermined storage means (first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l) whose numerical information is updated when an update trigger occurs;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the numerical information in the predetermined storage means may be acquired by the first lottery means and may be acquired by the second lottery means.

According to feature O1, the numerical information updated in the predetermined storage means is used in the first lottery process and also used in the second lottery process. This makes it possible to suppress the number of means for storing updated numerical information, and to simplify the configuration.

Feature O2. A plurality of numerical information storage means (first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l) whose numerical information is updated, including the predetermined storage means, are provided,
This gaming machine is
Reference information storage means (random number pointer of main side RAM 74) that stores identification reference information that is referred to in order to identify the numerical information storage means from which numerical information is to be acquired;
When the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information becomes the numerical information acquisition target, the identification reference information is updated so that the numerical information storage means in the next order becomes the numerical information acquisition target. (a function for executing the processing of steps S409 to S411 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The first lottery means acquires numerical information from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information when the first lottery opportunity occurs;
The gaming machine according to feature O1, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical information from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information when the second lottery opportunity occurs.

According to feature O2, since a plurality of numerical information storage means are targets of numerical information acquisition in a predetermined order, it is possible to prevent numerical information acquisition targets from being concentrated in one numerical information storage means. It becomes possible. In addition, since the configuration is such that numerical information is acquired from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information, the processing configuration for specifying the numerical information storage means from which numerical information is to be acquired is prevented from becoming complicated. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature O3. A plurality of numerical information storage means (first to twelfth common random number circuits 101a to 101l) whose numerical information is updated, including the predetermined storage means, are provided,
There are a plurality of acquisition target lottery means that are targets for acquiring numerical information from the plurality of numerical information storage means, including the first lottery means and the second lottery means,
The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the number of acquisition target lottery means is greater than the number of numerical information storage means.

According to feature O3, the number of lottery processes that involve acquiring numerical information from a plurality of numerical information storage means is greater than the number of numerical information storage means, so that while suppressing the increase in the number of numerical information storage means, It becomes possible to increase the number of lottery processes.

Feature O4. The gaming machine according to feature O3, wherein the number of the numerical information storage means is greater than or equal to the maximum number of the acquisition target lottery means to be executed in one game.

According to feature O4, the number of numerical information storage means is greater than or equal to the maximum number of acquisition target lottery processes to be executed in one game, so that the plurality of numerical information storage means can be used in multiple acquisition target lottery processes. In a jointly used configuration, it is possible to prevent numerical information in the same numerical information storage means from being used in multiple lottery processes in one game.

Feature O5. a separate numerical information storage means (a first dedicated random number circuit 102a) provided separately from the predetermined storage means and whose numerical information is updated when an update trigger occurs;
a separate lottery means (a function of executing the processes of steps S501 to S513 in the main MPU 72) that executes a separate lottery process using numerical information acquired from the separate numerical information storage means when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs; ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4, characterized by comprising:

According to feature O5, in the separate lottery process, numerical information is acquired from separate numerical information storage means provided separately from the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to strictly perform separate lottery processing.

Feature O6. Numerical information storage means (first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) whose numerical information is updated when an update opportunity occurs and is a target for obtaining numerical information in each of the first lottery means and the second lottery means. including the predetermined storage means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein the plurality of numerical information storage means all have the same number of bits.

According to feature O6, since the plurality of numerical information storage means used jointly in multiple lottery processes all have the same number of bits, no matter which numerical information storage means is used in one lottery process, It becomes possible to obtain and use numerical information with the same number of bits.

Feature O7. The first lottery means acquires numerical information from one of the numerical information storage means when the first lottery opportunity occurs;
The gaming machine according to feature O6, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical information from the plurality of numerical information storage means when the second lottery opportunity occurs.

According to feature O7, even if the lottery means uses numerical information with different numbers of bits during lottery processing, it is possible to use a plurality of numerical information storage means jointly with other lottery means.

Note that for the configuration of features O1 to O7, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. A first specific lottery means (a first lottery unit in the main side MPU 72) that executes a lottery process (additional lottery process) by comparing the acquired numerical information with the first lottery information group (first additional lottery table 141) when an acquisition opportunity occurs. (1) a function of executing an add-on lottery process using the add-on table 141);
A second specific lottery means (a second lottery unit in the main MPU 72) that executes a lottery process (additional lottery process) by comparing the acquired numerical information with the second lottery information group (second additional lottery table 142) when an acquisition opportunity occurs. (2) a function of executing a top-up lottery process using the top-up table 142;
Equipped with
The first lottery information group is
Multiple identification information (additional index) and
Lottery correspondence information (number of winning random numbers) that is set in correspondence with the identification information and allows the first specific lottery means to specify whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information. and,
It has
The second lottery information group is
Multiple identification information (additional index) and
Lottery correspondence information (number of winning random numbers) that is set in correspondence with the identification information and allows the second specific lottery means to specify whether or not the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information. and,
It has
The same information is set as the plurality of identification information in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group,
In the first lottery information group, the lottery corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that predetermined identification information among the plurality of pieces of identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means. has been
In the second lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that the predetermined identification information can be selected in the lottery process of the second specific lottery means,
This gaming machine is
information storage means (main-side ROM 73) for storing a group of correspondence information (index correspondence table 145) in which lottery result information (number of additional games) is set in association with each of the plurality of pieces of identification information;
Information grasping means for grasping the lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected by the first specific lottery means or the second specific lottery means from the corresponding information group (executes the process of step S4708 in the main MPU 72) function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature P1, even though the predetermined identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means when the first lottery information group is referred to, the first lottery information group includes the predetermined identification information. A plurality of pieces of identification information are set to be the same as the second lottery information group including . Further, a group of correspondence information in which lottery result information is set in association with each of the plurality of pieces of identification information is stored in the information storage means, and the lottery processing of the first specific lottery means or the lottery processing of the second specific lottery means Lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected in is grasped from the corresponding information group. With this configuration, it is not necessary to store corresponding information groups corresponding to each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group in the information storage means, so that it is not necessary to store the corresponding information groups in the information storage means. It becomes possible to reduce the required storage capacity.

Feature P2. The plural pieces of identification information are set to be serial numbers,
The lottery process is characterized in that a determination process (processing of steps S4804 to S4806 in the main MPU 72) for determining whether or not each piece of identification information is selected as a lottery result according to the numerical order of the plurality of pieces of identification information is executed. The gaming machine described in feature P1.

According to feature P2, since the identification information is set as serial numbers, it becomes possible to suitably perform the lottery process. In this case, if the identification information is treated as different information in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the corresponding information group is made to correspond to each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group. It will be necessary to prepare. On the other hand, since the configuration of feature P1 is provided and the same identification information is set in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group It becomes possible to standardize the correspondence information group.

Feature P3. In the second lottery information group, the lottery corresponding information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the second specific lottery means. has been
In the first lottery information group, the lottery correspondence information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that the specific identification information can be selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature P1 or P2.

According to feature P3, even though the identification information that is not selected in the lottery process is different between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the same identification information is set. It becomes possible to share the corresponding information group between the lottery information group and the second lottery information group.

Feature P4. The information storage means stores first compressed information (first compressed data 146) corresponding to the first lottery information group,
This gaming machine includes means for generating the first lottery information group by executing expansion processing on the first compressed information (a function for executing the processes of steps S4702 to S4704 in the main MPU 72),
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, wherein the first compressed information does not include the lottery corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined identification information.

According to feature P4, even if predetermined identification information that is not selected in the lottery process is set in the first lottery information group, the predetermined identification information is set in the first compressed information corresponding to the first lottery information group. The corresponding lottery support information has not been set. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of information necessary for using the first lottery information group.

Note that for the configuration of features P1 to P4, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to each of the inventions of the feature O group and the feature P group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game in a situation where medals have been bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need for a configuration that can suitably perform a lottery, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature Q group>
Features Q1. History storage execution means (in the main MPU 72) that stores game history information corresponding to a predetermined event when a game is executed in the history storage means (total number of games counter 74a, advantageous games number counter 74b). A function to execute the processing of steps S4001 to S4004);
information deriving means (a function of executing the process of step S4007 in the main MPU 72) for deriving mode information corresponding to the result of the game in a predetermined period using the history information stored in the history storage means;
Information display control means (step S4008 in the main MPU 72) that controls the display of the information display means (combined display section 66, advantageous section display section 67) so that a display corresponding to the mode information derived by the information derivation means is displayed. function) and
Equipped with
The information display control means includes a termination control means (which executes the process of step S4010 in the main MPU 72) so that the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of a termination trigger. A gaming machine characterized by having the following functions:

According to feature Q1, when a predetermined event occurs, history information corresponding to it is stored in the history storage means. This makes it possible for gaming machines to store and retain information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of predetermined events, and by using this managed information, it is possible to better manage the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by storing the history information in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Further, mode information corresponding to the results of the game in a predetermined period is derived using the history information stored in the history storage means. Then, a display corresponding to the aspect information is performed on the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the gaming history management results, such as the frequency of occurrence of predetermined events. Further, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is ended based on the occurrence of the end trigger. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the mode information from being displayed on the information display means in a situation where there is no need to display the mode information.

Features Q2. The gaming machine according to feature Q1, characterized in that there are multiple types of termination triggers.

According to feature Q2, since there are multiple types of termination triggers, it is possible to improve the operability when terminating the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means.

Feature Q3. The information display control means includes a start control means (which executes the process of step S4008 in the main MPU 72) so that the display corresponding to the aspect information on the information display means is started based on the occurrence of a start trigger. function),
The gaming machine according to feature Q2, wherein the starting opportunity is one type.

According to feature Q3, since there is only one type of start trigger, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means from being started unintentionally.

Features Q4. The end control means controls corresponding events that may occur to satisfy the conditions for starting the game (the output of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a, the output of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the output of an ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensor 47a). The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3, characterized in that it is specified that the termination trigger has occurred based on the occurrence of the output of the ON signal of .about.49a.

According to feature Q4, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is ended based on the occurrence of a target event that may occur when starting a game, so the mode information is not displayed on the information display means. This makes it possible to prevent the game from being played unintentionally.

Features Q5. Predetermined output means (start detection sensor 41a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a) that enter a predetermined output state when a corresponding event occurs;
Means for executing effective response control based on the fact that the predetermined output means is in the predetermined output state in an effective state (a function of executing the process of step S302 in the main MPU 72, an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) function) and
Equipped with
Any one of features Q1 to Q4, characterized in that the termination control means specifies that the termination trigger has occurred based on the fact that the predetermined output means has entered the predetermined output state in a situation that is not the valid condition. 1. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to feature Q5, even if the situation is not a valid status, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display unit is terminated when the predetermined output unit enters the predetermined output status, so there is no need to wait for the status to become valid. It becomes possible to terminate the display corresponding to the mode information even when the mode information is displayed.

Note that for the configuration of features Q1 to Q5, features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, and features H1 to H9, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J8, Features K1 to K15, Features L1 to L6, Features M1 to M8, Features N1 to N5, Features O1 to O7, Features P1 to P4, Features Q1 to Q5 One or more configurations may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention related to the feature Q group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko gaming machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is equipped with a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to players, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball firing device. , is fired toward the gaming area in response to the player's firing operation. For example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the gaming area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to a tray storage section, for example. Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine, a configuration is known in which the tray storage section includes an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are fired. Guided by the device, surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Furthermore, in the slot machine, when a start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are being bet, a lottery process is executed by the control means. In addition, when the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation start control. Rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, if the stop result after the reels stop rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a benefit corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately manage the gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: The rotating body starts rotating based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player A gaming machine that gives benefits to

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10...Slot machine, 31...Reel unit, 41...Start lever, 41a...Start detection sensor, 42-44...Stop button, 45a...Input medal detection sensor, 47a-49a...Credit input detection sensor, 72...Main side MPU, 73...Main side ROM, 74...Main side RAM, 74a...Total game number counter, 74b...Advantageous game number counter, 92...Production side MPU, 93...Production side ROM, 94...Production side RAM, 101a to 101l...First - 12th shared random number circuit, 102a... First dedicated random number circuit, 111... Offset table, 121... ART game number counter, 126... Display counter, 127... Stock game number counter, 132... Transition condition game number counter, 141... First additional table, 142... Second additional table, 145... Index correspondence table, 146... First compressed data.

Claims (1)

a first control means for managing the progress of the game;
a second control means that controls execution of the performance based on information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means includes:
a predetermined setting means for setting a predetermined gaming state;
means for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means to a side closer to the end information based on the fact that the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state and an update opportunity occurs;
a predetermined termination means for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the continuation reference information becoming the termination information in the predetermined gaming state;
a predetermined updating means that updates the continuation reference information to a side that moves it away from the termination information by a predetermined amount of update information when a predetermined provision condition is satisfied in the predetermined gaming state;
a first transmitting means for transmitting first transmission information corresponding to the start of the predetermined gaming state;
a second transmitting means for transmitting second transmission information corresponding to the updated information when the continuation reference information is updated to move away from the termination information;
Equipped with
The second control means
a predetermined performance starting means for starting a performance corresponding to the predetermined gaming state based on reception of the first transmission information;
a reception response means for executing a reception response process for executing an effect corresponding to the continuation reference information being updated to move away from the termination information based on the reception of the second transmission information;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images